(11.19) Inglés Owner’s manual SEAT Mii Electric · 2019-11-11 · Owner’s manual SEAT Mii...

Owner’s manualSEAT Mii Electric

12S012720BA

Ingl

és 1

2S01

2720

BA (

11.19

)

SEA

T M

ii El

ectr

ic I

nglé

s (11

.19)

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

IntroductionThank you for your trust choosing a SEAT ve-hicle.

With your new SEAT, you will be able to enjoya vehicle with state-of-the-art technologyand top quality features.

We recommend reading this Instruction Man-ual carefully to learn more about your vehicleso you can enjoy all its benefits in your dailydriving.

Information about handling is complementedwith instructions regarding the operation andmaintenance of the vehicle in order to ensureits safety and maintain its value. Moreover, wewant to give you valuable advice and tips todrive your vehicle efficiently and respectingthe environment.

We wish you safe and enjoyable motoring.

SEAT, S.A.

WARNINGRead and always observe safety infor-mation concerning the passenger'sfront airbag ››› page 29, Fitting and us-ing child seats.

About this manualThis manual describes the features of the ve-hicle at the time of drafting this text. Some ofthe features described below will be intro-duced in the future or will only be available incertain markets.

Some of the features described here arenot included in all the types or variationsof the model and they can be varied ormodified based on technical or marketingrequirements without it being consideredmisleading advertising.

Some details on the drawings may vary fromits vehicle and must be interpreted as astandard representation.

The direction indicators (left, right, forwards,backwards) in this manual refer to the traveldirection of the vehicle unless otherwise sta-ted.

The audiovisual material is only meant tohelp the users better understand some fea-tures of the car. It is not a replacement for theinstruction manual. Access the instructionmanual to see the complete information andwarnings.

The features marked with an asteriskare included by default only in certainversions of the model, supplied as op-tional only for certain versions or only of-fered in certain countries.

Trademarks are marked with ®. The ab-sence of this symbol does not guaranteethat the term is not a trademark.It indicates that the section continues onthe next page.

You can access the information in this manualusing:

● Thematic table of contents that follows themanual’s general chapter structure.● Visual table of contents that uses graphicsto indicate the pages containing “essential”information, which is detailed in the corre-sponding chapters.● Alphabetical index with many terms andsynonyms to help you find information.

WARNINGTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about safety and warn you aboutpossible accident or injury risks.

CAUTIONTexts after this symbol indicate possibledamage to the vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentTexts after this symbol contain informa-tion about the protection of the environ-ment.

®

NoteTexts after this symbol contain addition-al information.

Printed and digital instruction man-ualThe printed instruction manual contains rele-vant information about the use of the vehicleand the Infotainment System.

The digital version of the manuals containsmore in-depth information. It is available onSEAT's official website.

To view the digital version of the manual:

Fig. 1 SEAT website

● scan the QR code ››› Fig. 1● OR enter the following address in the navi-gator website:

http://www.seat.com/owners/your-seat/manuals-offline.html

and select your vehicle.

Frequently Asked Ques-tions

Before driving

How do you adjust the seat? ››› page 91

How do you adjust the steering wheel?››› page 13

How do you adjust the exterior mirrors?››› page 89

How do you turn on the exterior lights?››› page 80

How does the automatic gearbox selector leverwork? ››› page 145

How is the high-voltage battery charged?››› page 163

How do you activate the windscreen wipers andwindscreen washer system? ››› page 86

Emergency situations

A warning lamp lights up or flashes. What doesthis mean? ››› page 69

Where are the first-aid kit and the warning trian-gle in the vehicle? ››› page 35

How do you open the bonnet? ››› page 181

How do you perform a jump start? ››› page 45

Where is the vehicle tool kit located?››› page 35

How do you repair a tyre with the anti-puncturekit? ››› page 37

How do you change a wheel? ››› page 39

How do you change a fuse? ››› page 50

How do you change a light? ››› page 52

How do you tow a vehicle? ››› page 47

Useful tips

How do you set the time? ››› page 63

When should the vehicle inspection should beperformed? ››› page 67

How do you remove the luggage compartmentcover? ››› page 95

How do you check and top up the engine cool-ant? ››› page 182

How do you top up the windscreen washer fluid?››› page 185

How do you check and top up the brake fluid?››› page 184

How do you check and adjust tyre pressure val-ues? ››› page 191

Vehicle washing tips ››› page 200

Functions of interest

What parking assistants are available?››› page 160

How does tyre pressure monitoring work?››› page 195

Interior lighting ››› page 86

Table of Contents

Table of ContentsGeneral views of the vehicle . . . . . . . . 7Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Advice about driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Correct position of vehicle occupants . . . . . . 11Pedal area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14The reason for seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14How to properly adjust your seat belt . . . . . . 17Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Brief introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20Operation of the airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Safe transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . 27Safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Self-help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Emergency equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Changing the windscreen wiper blades . . . . 44Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Tow start and towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Fuses and bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50Changing bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Controls and displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59Instruments and warning/controllamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Operating the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . 68Control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Vehicle lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Wipers and rear window wiper system . . . . . 86Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Seats and head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Adjusting seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91Seat functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Transport and practical equipment . . . . . . 94Transporting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Roof carrier* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Object holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Smartphone support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Heating, ventilation and cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Stationary air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114General instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Operating modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120Digital radio mode* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130Drive Mii App* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134SEAT CONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135

Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Drive system and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Driving indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138Connecting and disconnecting the drivesystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Gear selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Hill driving assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Driving profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Driver assistance systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Cruise control system (CCS)* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151Lane Assist* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

5

Table of Contents

Braking and parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Stabilisation and brake assistance sys-tems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Help with parking and manoeuvring . . . . . 160Parking distance warning system* . . . . . . . . . 160Towing bracket device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Driving with trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Practical tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163High-voltage battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Safety warnings relating to the high-volt-age network and the high-voltage bat-tery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163Charging the high-voltage battery . . . . . . . . . 165Charging cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174Verification and replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184Windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18512-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Wheels and tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Tyre pressure loss indicator* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197SEAT Maintenance Programme . . . . . . . . . . 197Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Additional service offers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199

Vehicle maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Maintenance and cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Accessories and modifications to the ve-hicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Accessories, spare parts and repair work . . . 205

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Information stored by the control units . . . . . . 207Other important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Information about the EU Directive2014/53/EU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Indications about the technical data . . . . 214Important information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

6

General views of the vehicle

Exterior view

Opening and closing– Doors ››› page 76– Central locking ››› page 73Rear lid– Opening from outside ››› page 78– Emergency opening ››› page 79High-voltage battery charging socket– Open/Close cap ››› page 165Levels control– Brake fluid ››› page 184

1

2

3

4

– Battery 12V ››› page 186Bonnet– Unlocking lever ››› page 181– Open/close ››› page 181Action in the event of a puncture– Anti-puncture kit ››› page 36– Wheel change ››› page 39Towing the vehicle– Towline anchorage ››› page 49– Tow start ››› page 48

5

6

7

7


Overview (left hand drive)

Electric windows ››› page 79Exterior mirror adjustment ››› page 89Headlight switch ››› page 81Turn signal and main beam lever››› page 82Cruise control ››› page 151Steering wheel adjustment ››› page 13Warning lamps ››› page 69Wipers and rear window wiper››› page 86

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Driver information system ››› page 68Air conditioning ››› page 105Hazard warning lights ››› page 84Central locking ››› page 73Fuses ››› page 50Open bonnet lever ››› page 181Ignition lock ››› page 140Infotainment system (factory fitted)››› page 112

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

8


Interior view

Headrest adjustment ››› page 91Isofix anchors ››› page 30Seat belts ››› page 14Interior mirror ››› page 89Handbrake ››› page 157Disconnecting the front passenger frontairbag ››› page 24

1

2

3

4

5

6

9

Safety

Safety

Safe driving

Advice about driving

Safety first!

WARNING● This manual contains important informa-tion about the operation of the vehicle,both for the driver and the passengers. Theother sections of the on-board documenta-tion also contain further information thatyou should be aware of for your own safetyand for the safety of your passengers.● Ensure that the on-board documentationis kept in the vehicle at all times. This is es-pecially important when lending or sellingthe vehicle to another person.

Before starting to drive

For your own safety and the safety of yourpassengers, always note the following pointsbefore every trip:

– Make sure that the vehicle's lights and turnsignals are working properly.

– Check tyre pressure.

– Ensure that all windows provide a clear andgood view of the surroundings.

– Do not block the entrance of air to the elec-tric drive train or cover it with blankets or in-sulating materials.

– Make sure all luggage is secured››› page 94.

– Make sure that no objects can interfere withthe pedals.

– Adjust front seat, head restraint and mirrorsproperly according to your size.

– Ensure that the passengers in the rear seatsalways have the head restraints in the in-use position ››› page 91.

– Instruct passengers to adjust the head re-straints according to their height.

– Protect children with appropriate childseats and properly applied seat belts››› page 27.

– Assume the correct sitting position. Instructyour passengers also to assume a propersitting position ››› page 11.

– Fasten your seat belt securely. Instruct yourcompanions to fasten their seat belt prop-erly ››› page 14.

Factors that influence on safety

You, as the driver, are responsible for yoursafety and that of your companions.

– Always pay attention to traffic and do notget distracted by passengers or telephonecalls.

– Never drive when your driving ability is im-paired (e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs).

– Observe traffic laws and speed limits.

– Always reduce your speed as appropriatefor road, traffic and weather conditions.

– On long trips, stop regularly to rest, at leastevery two hours.

– If possible, avoid driving when you are tiredor stressed.

WARNINGDriving under the influence of alcohol,drugs, medication or narcotics may resultin severe accidents and even loss of life.● Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcoticsmay significantly alter perception, affectreaction times and safety while driving,which could result in the loss of control ofthe vehicle.

10

Safe driving

Safety equipment

Never put your safety or the safety of yourpassengers in danger. In the event of an acci-dent, the safety equipment may reduce therisk of injury. The following points cover partof the safety equipment in your SEAT1):

● three-point seat belts,● belt tension limiter for the front and rearseats● belt tensioners for the front and rear seats,● front and rear airbags,● side airbags on the backs of the front seats,and head airbags for the front and rear seats.● “ISOFIX” anchor points for child seats in therear side seats with the “ISOFIX” system,● rear head restraints with in-use position andnon-use position,● adjustable steering column.

The safety equipment mentioned aboveworks together to provide you and your pas-sengers with the best possible protection inthe event of an accident. However, thesesafety systems can only be effective if youand your passengers are sitting in a correctposition and use this equipment properly.

Safety is everyone's business!

Correct position of vehicleoccupants

Correct position in the seat

Fig. 2 The correct distance between the driverand the steering wheel must be at least 25 cm(10 inches).

Fig. 3 Correct belt web and head restraint po-sitions

The correct sitting positions for the driver andpassengers are shown below.

If your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct sitting position,contact a specialised workshop for help withany special devices. The seat belt and airbagcan only provide optimum protection if a cor-rect sitting position is adopted. SEAT recom-mends taking your car in for technical serv-ice.

For your own safety and to reduce the risk ofinjury in the event of an accident or suddenbraking or manoeuvre, SEAT recommend thefollowing positions: »

1) Depending on the version/market.11

Safety

Valid for all vehicle occupants:● Adjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of yourhead, or as close as possible to the same lev-el as the top of your head and under no cir-cumstances below eye level. Keep the backof your neck as close as possible to theheadrest ››› Fig. 3.● Short people must lower the head restraintcompletely, even if your head is below its up-per edge.● Tall people must raise the head restraintcompletely.● Always keep your feet in the footwell whilethe vehicle is in motion.● Adjust and fasten your seat belt correctly››› page 17.

For the driver, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Adjust the steering wheel so that it is at adistance of at least 25 cm (10 inches) fromthe sternum ››› Fig. 2 and can hold it withboth hands on the sides, on the outside, withthe arms slightly flexed.● The steering wheel must always point to-wards the chest and never towards the face.● Adjust the seat lengthwise so that you canfully step on the pedals with your knees

slightly bent and there is a distance betweenthe knee area and the instrument panel of atleast 10 cm (4 inches) ››› Fig. 2.● Adjust the height of the seat so that youcan reach the top of the steering wheel.● Always keep both feet in the footwell sothat you have the vehicle under control at alltimes.

For the passenger, the following applies:● Move the seat backrest to an almost up-right position so that your back rests com-pletely against it.● Move the seat as far back as possible (mini-mum 25 cm between the chest and the in-strument panel check translation). If you aresitting closer than 25 cm, the airbag systemcannot protect you properly.

Number of seats

The vehicle has 4 seats, 2 in the front and 2 inthe rear. All seats are equipped with a safetybelt.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position may in-crease the risk of severe or lethal injuries inthe event of sudden braking or manoeu-vring, in case of collision or accident and ifthe airbags deploy.

● Before starting the car, all passengersmust be sitting in a correct position andstay like that for the entire journey. This al-so applies to a correct use of the seat belt.● The maximum amount of people in thevehicle is the same as the amount of seatswith seat belts.● For children, always use a certified pro-tection system, certified and suited for theirweight and height ››› page 27.● While driving, always keep your feet inthe footwell. Never place them over theseat or the instrument panel, for example,or outside the window. Otherwise the air-bag and seat belt may offer insufficientprotection and also increase the risk of in-jury in the event of an accident.

Risks due to sitting in an incorrectposition

If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not at all,the risk of severe or lethal injuries increases.Seat belts can provide optimal protection on-ly if the belt web is properly worn. Incorrectsitting positions substantially reduce the pro-tective function of seat belts and, therefore,increase the risk of severe or even lethal inju-ries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is espe-cially heightened when a deploying airbagstrikes a vehicle occupant who has assumedan incorrect sitting position. The driver is

12

Safe driving

responsible for all people, particularly chil-dren, inside the vehicle.

The following list contains examples of incor-rect sitting positions that could be dangerousfor all vehicle occupants.

When the vehicle is in motion:● Never stand in the vehicle.● Never stand on the seats.● Never kneel on the seats.● Never tilt your seat backrest too far to therear.● Never lean against the instrument panel.● Never lie on the rear seats.● Never sit on the front edge of a seat.● Never sit sideways.● Never lean out of a window.● Never put your feet out of a window.● Never put your feet on the instrument panel.● Never place your feet on the bench or onthe backrest of the seat.● Never travel in a footwell.● Never sit on the armrests.● Never travel without wearing the seat belt.● Never travel in the luggage compartment.

WARNINGSitting in an incorrect position increasesthe risk of severe or fatal injuries in theevent of accidents and sudden braking ormanoeuvres.● All occupants must sit correctly duringthe journey and wear the seat belt correct-ly.● Occupants of the vehicle that are not sit-ting correctly, not wearing the seat belt orare not at a proper distance of the airbagrisk suffering very serious or lethal injuries,especially if the airbags deploy and strikethem.

Adjust the steering wheel position

Fig. 4 Lever in the lower left side of the steeringcolumn.

Adjust the steering wheel before your trip andonly when the vehicle is stationary.

● Pull lever ››› Fig. 4 1 down, move the steer-ing wheel to the desired position and lift thelever back up until it locks.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the steering wheel adjust-ment function and an incorrect adjustmentof the steering wheel can result in severe orfatal injury.● After adjusting the steering column, pushlever ››› Fig. 4 1 firmly upwards so that thesteering wheel does not accidentallychange position while driving.● Never adjust the steering wheel while thevehicle is in motion. If you need to adjustthe steering wheel while the vehicle is inmotion, stop safely and make the properadjustment.● The adjusted steering wheel should befacing your chest and not your face so asnot to hinder the driver's front airbag pro-tection in the event of an accident.● When driving, always hold the steeringwheel with both hands on the outside of thering at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positionsto reduce injuries when the driver's frontairbag deploys.● Never hold the steering wheel at the 12o'clock position or in any other manner(e.g. in the centre of the steering wheel). Insuch cases, if the driver's airbag deploys, »

13

Safety

you may sustain injuries to your arms,hands and head.

Pedal area

Pedals

– Make sure you can always step on thebrake and accelerator pedals without anyproblems.

– Ensure that the pedals can return unim-paired to their initial positions.

– Ensure that the floor mats are securely fas-tened during the trip and do not obstructthe pedals ››› .

Only use floor mats which leave the pedalsclear and which are secured to prevent themfrom slipping. You can obtain suitable floormats from a specialised dealership. Fasten-ers* for floor mats are fitted in the footwells.

If a brake circuit fails, the brake pedal must bepressed down thoroughly in order to stop thevehicle.

Wear suitable footwearAlways wear shoes which support your feetproperly and give you a good feeling for thepedals.

WARNING● Restricting pedal operation can lead tocritical situations while driving.● Never lay or fit floor mats or other floorcoverings over the original floor mats. Thiswould reduce the pedal area and could ob-struct the pedals. Risk of accident.● Never place objects in the driver footwell.An object could move into the pedal areaand impair pedal operation.

Seat belts

The reason for seat belts

Control lamps

It lights up red

Driver or passenger has not fastened seat belt.

Objects on the front passenger seat.Remove the objects from the front passenger seatand store them safely.

The control lamp lights up to remind thedriver to fasten their seat belt.

Before starting the vehicle:

● Fasten your seat belt securely.● Instruct your passengers to fasten theirseat belts properly before driving off.● Protect children by using a child seat ac-cording to the child's height and weight››› page 27.

When starting to drive, if the vehicle's speedexceeds approx. 25 km/h (15 mph) and theseat belts are not fastened or are unfastenedwhile driving, a warning sound will be heardfor a few seconds. The warning light will alsoflash .

14

Seat belts

The lamp goes out when the driver andpassenger seat belts are fastened with theignition switched on.

Indication of fastening the seatbelts of the rear seats*

Fig. 5 Indication of seat belt status in the rearseats on the instrument panel display

When the ignition is switched on, the statusdisplay of the belts ››› Fig. 5 informs the driveron the instrument panel display whether theoccupants of the rear seats have their seatbelts fastened.

It indicates that the corresponding seatis empty.Indicates that the seat is occupied andthe occupant is wearing the seat belt.

The seat belt status flashes for a maximum of30 seconds when a seat belt in the rear seats

is unfastened while the vehicle is in motion. Anaudible warning will also be heard if the vehi-cle is travelling at over 25 km/h (15 mph).

If a seat belt is fastened or unfastened whiledriving in some of the rear seats, the seat beltstatus is displayed for approximately 30 sec-onds. The indication can be hidden by press-ing the button on the instrument panel.

The protective function of seatbelts

Fig. 6 Drivers with properly worn seat beltswill not be thrown forward in the event of sud-den braking.

Properly worn seat belts hold the occupantsin the proper position. They also help preventuncontrolled movements that may result inserious injury and reduce the risk of beingthrown out of the vehicle in case of an acci-dent.

Vehicle occupants wearing their seat beltscorrectly benefit greatly from the ability ofthe belts to absorb kinetic energy. In addition,the front part of your vehicle and other pas-sive safety features (such as the airbag sys-tem) are designed to absorb the kinetic ener-gy released in a collision. Taken together, allthese features reduce the releasing kineticenergy and consequently, the risk of injury.This is why it is so important to fasten seatbelts before every trip, even when "just drivingaround the corner".

Ensure that your passengers wear their seatbelts as well. Accident statistics have shownthat wearing seat belts is an effective meansof substantially reducing the risk of injury andimproving the chances of survival when in-volved in a serious accident. Furthermore,properly worn seat belts improve the protec-tion provided by airbags in the event of anaccident. For this reason, wearing a seat beltis required by law in most countries.

Although your vehicle is equipped with air-bags, the seat belts must be fastened andworn. The front airbags, for example, are onlytriggered in some cases of head-on collision.The front airbags will not be triggered duringminor frontal or side collisions, rear-end colli-sions, overturns or accidents in which the air-bag trigger threshold value in the control unitis not exceeded.

15

Safety

Important safety instructions forthe use of seat belts

– Always wear the seat belt as described inthis section.

– Ensure that the seat belts can be fastenedat all times and are not damaged.

WARNING● If seat belts are worn incorrectly or not atall, the risk of severe injuries increases. Theoptimal protection from seat belts can beachieved only if you use them properly.● Never allow two passengers (even chil-dren) to share the same seat belt.● Never unbuckle a seat belt while the ve-hicle is in motion. Risk of fatal injury.● The seat belt should never lie on hard orfragile objects (such as glasses or pens,etc.) because this can cause injuries.● Do not allow the seat belt to be damagedor jammed, or to rub on any sharp edges.● Never wear the seat belt under the arm orin any other incorrect position.● Bulky and unfastened clothing (such asan overcoat over a sweater) impairs theproper fit and function of the seat belts, re-ducing their capacity to protect.● The slot in the seat belt buckle must notbe blocked with paper or other objects, asthis can prevent the latch plate from en-gaging securely.

● Never use seat belt clips, fastening ringsor similar items to alter the position of thebelt webbing.● Frayed or torn seat belts or damage tothe connections, belt retractors or parts ofthe buckle could cause severe injuries inthe event of an accident. Therefore, youmust check the condition of all seat beltsat regular intervals.● Seat belts which have been worn in anaccident and have been stretched must bereplaced by a specialised workshop. Re-newal may be necessary even if there is noapparent damage. The belt anchorageshould also be checked.● Do not attempt to repair a damaged seatbelt yourself. The seat belts must not be re-moved or modified in any way.● The belts must be kept clean, otherwisethe retractors may not work properly.

Head-on collisions and the laws ofphysics

Fig. 7 A driver not wearing a seat belt is thrownforward violently.

Fig. 8 The unbelted passenger in the rear seatis thrown forward violently, hitting the driverwho is wearing a seat belt.

The effects of the laws of physics in the caseof a head-on collision are easy to explain: the

16

Seat belts

moment a vehicle starts moving, a type of en-ergy called “kinetic energy” starts acting onboth the vehicle and its passengers.

The amount of “kinetic energy” depends onthe speed of the vehicle and on the weight ofthe vehicle and of its passengers. The higherthey are, the more energy there is to be “ab-sorbed” in the event of an accident.

The most significant factor, however, is thespeed of the vehicle. If the speed doublesfrom 25 km/h (15 mph) to 50 km/h (30 mph),for example, the corresponding kinetic ener-gy is multiplied by four.

Given that the passengers of the vehicle inour example do not have their seat belts fas-tened, in the event of a collision the entireamount of the passengers' kinetic energy willbe only absorbed by the mentioned impact.

Even at speeds of 30 km/h (19 mph) to50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on bod-ies in a collision can easily exceed one tonne(1000 kg). At greater speed these forces areeven higher.

Vehicle occupants not wearing seat belts arenot “attached” to the vehicle. In a head-oncollision, they will move forward at the samespeed their vehicle was travelling just beforethe impact. This example applies not only tohead-on collisions, but to all accidents andcollisions.

Even at low speeds the forces acting on thebody in a collision are so great that it is notpossible to brace oneself with one's hands. Inthe event of a head-on collision, vehicle oc-cupants not wearing a seat belt will bethrown uncontrollably forward and will col-lide, for example, against the steering wheel,instrument panel or windscreen ››› Fig. 7.

It is also important for rear passengers towear seat belts properly, as they could other-wise be thrown forward violently through thevehicle interior in an accident. If a rear seatoccupant is not wearing a seat belt, they arenot only endangering themselves but alsothe occupants of the front seats ››› Fig. 8.

How to properly adjust yourseat belt

Buckle and unbuckle seat belt

Fig. 9 Insert the latch plate of the seat belt intothe buckle.

Fig. 10 Release the seat belt's buckle.

Properly worn seat belts hold the vehicle oc-cupants in the position that most protects »

17

Safety

them in the event of an accident or suddenbraking ››› .

Fastening the seat beltFasten your seat belt before each trip.

● Adjust the front seat and head restraint cor-rectly ››› page 11.● Engage the seat backrest of the rear seat inan upright position ››› .● Pull the latch plate and place the belt web-bing evenly across your chest and lap. Donot twist the seat belt when doing so ››› .● Insert the buckle plate in the buckle of thecorrect seat ››› Fig. 9.● Pull the belt to ensure that the latch plate issecurely engaged in the buckle.

Releasing the seat beltOnly unfasten the seat belt when the vehiclehas come to a standstill ››› .

● Press the red button on the buckle››› Fig. 10. The latch plate is released from thebuckle.● Guide the belt back by hand so that it rollsup easily and the trim will not be damaged.

WARNING● The seat belt cannot offer its full protec-tion unless the seat backrest is in an up-

right position and the seat belt is worn cor-rectly, according to your size.● Unbuckling your seat belt while the vehi-cle is in motion can cause severe or fatalinjuries in the event of an accident or sud-den braking.● The seat belt itself, or a loose seat belt,can cause severe injuries if the belt movesfrom hard areas of the body to soft areas(e.g. the stomach).

Correct fitting of the seat belt

Fig. 11 Correct seat belt and head restraintpositions, viewed from front and the side.

Fig. 12 Position of seat belt during pregnancy.

Seat belts offer their maximum protection inthe event of an accident and reduce the riskof sustaining severe or fatal injuries only whenthey are properly positioned. Furthermore, ifthe webbing is correctly positioned, the seatbelt will hold the vehicle occupants in the op-timum position to ensure the airbag providesthe maximum protection. The seat belt musttherefore always be worn and the webbingcorrectly positioned.

Incorrectly worn seat belts can cause severeor even fatal injuries ››› page 11, Correct po-sition of vehicle occupants.

● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm, under the arm or behindthe shoulder.● The lap part of the seat belt must lie acrossthe pelvis, never across the stomach.

18

Seat belts

● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comforta-bly. Pull the belt tight if necessary to take upany slack.

In the case of pregnant women, the seat beltshould pass uniformly over the chest and aslow as possible through the pelvic area withthe strap flat so it does not press down on theabdomen; in addition, it must be usedthroughout the entire pregnancy ››› Fig. 12.

Adapting the position of the belt webbingto your sizeThe seat belt can be adapted using the fol-lowing equipment:

● Belt height adjustment for the front seats.

WARNINGAn incorrectly worn seat belt web cancause severe or fatal injuries in the event ofan accident.● The shoulder part of the seat belt must lieon the centre of the shoulder, never acrossthe neck or the arm.● The seat belt must lie flat and fit comfort-ably on the torso● The lap part of the seat belt must lieacross the pelvis, never across the stom-ach. The seat belt must lie flat and fit com-fortably on the pelvis Pull the belt tight ifnecessary to take up any slack.

● In the case of pregnant women, the ab-dominal strap of the seat belt should passas low as possible across the pelvic area,resting flat and “surrounding” the abdomen››› Fig. 12.● Do not twist the seat belt while it is fas-tened.● Once the seat belt is positioned correct-ly, don't pull it away from your body withyour hand.● Do not lie the seat belt across rigid orfragile objects, e.g. glasses, pens or keys.● Never use seat belt clips, retaining ringsor similar instruments to alter the positionof the belt webbing.

NoteIf your physical constitution prevents youfrom maintaining the correct position of thebelt webbing, contact a specialised work-shop for help with any special devices toensure the optimum protection of the seatbelt and airbag. SEAT recommends takingyour car in for technical service.

Seat belt tensioners

How the seat belt tensioner works

The seat belts for the front and rear occu-pants are fitted with belt tensioners.

The belt tensioners are activated by sensors,although only in severe head-on, lateral andrear-end collisions. This retracts and tightensthe seat belts, reducing the forward motion ofthe occupants.

The belt pre-tensioners work in combinationwith the airbag system. In case of overturn,the pre-tensioners do not activate unless thehead airbags are deployed.

Belt tension limiterThe belt tension limiter reduces the force ofthe seat belt on the body in the event of anaccident.

Note● If the seat belt tensioners are triggered, afine dust is produced. This is normal and itis not an indication of fire in the vehicle.● The relevant safety requirements must beobserved when the vehicle or componentsof the system are scrapped. Specialisedworkshops are familiar with these regula-tions, which are also available to you.

Maintenance and disposal of seatbelt tensioners

The belt tensioners are components of theseat belts that are installed in the seats ofyour vehicle. If you work on the belt »

19

Safety

tensioners or remove and install parts of thesystem when performing other repair work,the seat belt may be damaged. The conse-quence may be that, in the event of an acci-dent, the belt tensioners function incorrectlyor may not function at all.

So that the effectiveness of the seat belt ten-sioner is not reduced and that removed partsdo not cause any injuries or environmentalpollution, regulations, which are known to thespecialised workshops, must be observed.

WARNING● Improper use or repairs not carried out byqualified mechanics increase the risk of se-vere or fatal injuries. The belt tensionersmay fail to trigger or may trigger in thewrong circumstances.● The seat belt tensioner, seat belt and au-tomatic retractor cannot be repaired.● Any work on the belt tensioners and seatbelts, including the removal and refitting ofsystem parts in conjunction with other re-pair work, must be performed by a special-ised workshop only.● The belt tensioners will only provide pro-tection for one accident and must bechanged if they have been activated.

For the sake of the environmentAirbag modules and belt tensioners maycontain perchlorate. Observe the legal re-quirements for their disposal.

Airbag system

Brief introduction

Why is it important to wear the seatbelt and to adopt a correct posi-tion?

For the inflating airbags to achieve the bestprotection, the seat belt must always be wornproperly and the correct sitting position mustbe assumed.

The airbag system is not a substitute for seatbelts, but it is an integral part of the vehicle'soverall passive safety system. Please bear inmind that the airbag system can only workeffectively when the vehicle occupants arewearing their seat belts correctly and haveadjusted the head restraints properly. There-fore, it is most important to properly wear theseat belts at all times, not only because this isrequired by law in most countries, but also foryour safety ››› page 14, The reason for seatbelts.

The airbag inflates in a matter of seconds, soif you are not properly seated when the air-bag is triggered, you may sustain fatal inju-ries. Therefore, it is essential that all vehicleoccupants assume a correct sitting positionwhile travelling.

20

Airbag system

Sharp braking before an accident may causea passenger not wearing a seat belt to bethrown forward into the area of the deployingairbag. In this case, the inflating airbag mayinflict critical or fatal injuries on the occupant.This also applies to children.

Always maintain the greatest possible dis-tance between yourself and the front airbag.This way, the front airbags can completelydeploy when triggered, providing their maxi-mum protection.

The most important factors for triggering theairbag are the type of accident, the angle ofimpact and the vehicle speed.

Whether or not the airbags are triggered de-pends primarily on the vehicle decelerationrate resulting from the collision and detectedby the control unit. If the vehicle decelerationoccurring during the collision and measuredby the control unit remains below the speci-fied reference values, the front, side and/orcurtain airbags will not be triggered. Take intoaccount that the visible damage in a vehicleinvolved in an accident, no matter how seri-ous, is not a determining factor for the air-bags to have been triggered.

WARNING● Wearing the seat belt incorrectly or as-suming an incorrect sitting position canlead to critical or fatal injuries.

● All vehicle occupants, including children,who are not properly belted can sustaincritical or fatal injuries if the airbag is trig-gered. Children up to 12 years old shouldalways travel on the rear seat. Never trans-port children in the vehicle if they are notrestrained or the restraint system is not ap-propriate for their age, size or weight.● To reduce the risk of injury from an inflat-ing airbag, always wear the seat belt prop-erly ››› page 14.

Description of the airbag system

The airbag system offers additional protec-tion for the occupants in combination with theseat belts.

The airbag system comprises the follow-ing modules (as per vehicle equipment):● Electronic control unit● Front airbags for driver and passenger● Side airbags for driver and passenger.● Head airbag● Airbag control lamp on the instrumentpanel ››› page 22● Key-operated switch for front passengerairbag● Control lamp for disabled/enabled statusof the front passenger airbag.

The airbag system operation is monitoredelectronically. The airbag control lamp will il-luminate for a few seconds every time the ig-nition is switched on (self-diagnosis).

There is a fault in the system if the controllamp :● does not light up when the ignition isswitched on ››› page 22,● turns off after 4 seconds after the ignition isswitched on,● turns off and then lights up again after theignition is switched on,● illuminates or flashes while the vehicle ismoving.

The airbag system is not triggered if:● the ignition is switched off● there is a minor frontal collision● there is a minor side collision● there is a rear-end collision● the vehicle turns over.

WARNING● The seat belts and airbags can only pro-vide maximum protection if the occupantsare seated correctly ››› page 11.● If a fault has occurred in the airbag sys-tem, have the system checked immediatelyby a specialised workshop. Otherwisethere is a danger that during a collision, the »

21

Safety

system may fail to trigger, or not triggercorrectly.

Airbag activation

The airbags deploy extremely rapidly, withinthousands of a second, to provide additionalprotection in the event of an accident. A finedust may develop when the airbag deploys.This is normal and it is not an indication of firein the vehicle.

The airbag system is only ready to functionwhen the ignition is on.

In special accidents instances, several air-bags may activate at the same time.

In the event of minor head-on and side colli-sions, rear-end collisions, overturning or roll-over of the vehicle, airbags do not activate.

Activation factorsThe conditions that lead to the airbag systemactivating in each situation cannot be gener-alised. Some factors play an important role,such as the properties of the object the vehi-cle hits (hard/soft), angle of impact, vehiclespeed, etc.

Deceleration trajectory is key for airbag acti-vation.

The control unit analyses the collision trajec-tory and activates the respective restraintsystem.

If the deceleration rate is below the prede-fined reference value in the control unit theairbags will not be triggered, even though theaccident may cause extensive damage to thecar.

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous head-on collisions:● Driver airbag.● Front passenger front airbag

The following airbags are triggered in seri-ous side-on collisions:● Front side airbag on the side of the acci-dent.● Curtain (head) airbag on the side of the ac-cident.

In an accident with airbag activation:● the interior lights switch on (if the interiorlight switch is in the courtesy light position);● the hazard warning lights switch on;● all doors are unlocked;● the electric current supply to the motor iscut off.

Operation of the airbags

Airbag system control lamps

It lights up on the combi-instru-ment

Fault in airbag system and seat belt tensioners.Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

It lights up on the instrumentpanel

Fault in airbag system.Have the system checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.

Front passenger front airbag disabled.Check if the airbag should be kept deactivated

Several warning and control lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on, signalling that the function is beingverified. They will switch off after a few sec-onds.

If the airbag and seat belt tensioner systemcontrol lamp remains on or flashes, it indi-cates a malfunction in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system ››› . Have the systemchecked immediately by a specialised work-shop.

If the front passenger airbag is deactivated,the lamp does not

22

Airbag system

remain lit, or if it is lit together with the con-trol lamp on the instrument panel, theremay be a fault in the airbag system ››› .

WARNINGIn the event of a fault in the airbag and seatbelt tensioner system, the airbags and seatbelts may not trigger correctly, may fail totrigger or may even trigger unexpectedly.● The vehicle occupants run the risk of sus-taining severe or fatal injuries. Have thesystem checked immediately by a special-ised workshop.● Do not mount a child seat in the frontpassenger seat or remove the mountedchild seat! The front passenger front airbagmay deploy during an accident in spite ofthe fault.

CAUTIONAlways pay attention to any lit controllamps and to the corresponding descrip-tions and instructions to avoid damage tothe vehicle or harm to the occupants.

Front airbags

Fig. 13 Driver airbag located in steeringwheel.

Fig. 14 Front passenger airbag located in in-strument panel.

The driver's front airbag is housed in thesteering wheel ››› Fig. 13 and that of the frontpassenger, on the instrument panel ››› Fig. 14.Airbags are identified by the word “AIRBAG”.

The airbag covers open and remain attachedto the steering wheel and instrument panelwhen the driver and front passenger airbags »

23

Safety

are triggered, respectively ››› Fig. 13››› Fig. 14.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the frontairbag system gives the front occupants ad-ditional protection for the head and chest inthe event of a severe frontal collision ››› .

Their special design allows the controlled es-cape of the propellant gas when an occu-pant puts pressure on the bag. Thus, thehead and chest are protected by the airbag.After the collision, the airbag deflates suffi-ciently to allow visibility.

WARNING● The deployment space between the frontpassengers and the airbags must not inany case be occupied by other passenger,pets and objects.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● It is also important not to attach any ob-jects such as cup holders or telephonemountings to the surfaces covering the air-bag units.

Activate and deactivate front pas-senger front airbag

Fig. 15 Switch for activating and deactivatingthe front passenger airbag.

Fig. 16 On the interior mirror mounting: controllamp for the deactivation of the front passen-ger airbag.

Deactivate the front passenger front airbagonly if you have to use a rear-facing childseat in the front passenger seat.

SEAT recommends fitting the child seat in therear seat to avoid having to deactivate thefront passenger airbag.

When the front passenger airbag is deacti-vated, this means that only the front passen-ger front airbag is deactivated. All the otherairbags in the vehicle remain activated.

Deactivate and activate the front passen-ger front airbag● Switch the ignition off.● Open the door on the front passenger side.● Insert the key blade into the slot provided inthe front passenger airbag disconnectionswitch ››› Fig. 15. About 3/4 of the key shouldenter; this is as far as it will go.● Turn the key gently to change its position to (deactivate) or to (activate). If you havedifficulty, ensure that you have inserted thekey as far as it will go.● Close the front passenger door.● When deactivating the airbag check, whilethe ignition of on, the control lamp lights up the lettering onthe interior mirror mounting ››› Fig. 16.● When reactivating the airbag, check thatwhen the ignition is switched on, the control lamp does not turn on.

24

Airbag system

WARNING● The driver of the vehicle is responsible fordisabling or switching on the airbag.● Always switch off the ignition before dis-abling the front passenger airbag! Failureto do so could result in a fault in the airbagdeactivation system.● Never leave the key in the airbag disa-bling switch as it could get damaged or en-able or disable the airbag during driving.● If for any reason an airbag is deactivated,reactivate it as soon as possible so that itcan fulfil its protective function.

Side airbags

Fig. 17 Side airbag in driver's seat.

Fig. 18 Illustration of completely inflated sideairbag on left side of vehicle.

Side airbags are mounted on the paddedbackrest of the driver's seat ››› Fig. 17 and thefront passenger’s seat.

The locations are identified by the text “AIR-BAG” in the upper region of the backrests.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the side air-bag system provides additional protection forthe upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

In a side collision, the side airbags reduce therisk of injury to passengers to the areas of thebody facing the impact. In addition to theirnormal protection, the seat belts also holdthe passengers in the event of a side collision;this is how these airbags provide maximumprotection.

WARNING● If the occupants seat belts are not buck-led or they lean forward while the vehicle ismoving or are not seated correctly and anaccident occurs, they are at a greater riskof being injured if the airbag system is trig-gered.● In order for the side airbags to providetheir maximum protection, the prescribedsitting position must always be maintainedwith seat belts fastened while travelling.● In a side-on collision the side airbags willnot work if the sensors do not correctlymeasure the pressure increase on the inte-rior of the doors, due to air escapingthrough the areas with holes or openings inthe door panel.● Never drive if the interior door panelshave been removed or if the panels havenot been correctly fitted.● Never drive the vehicle if the loudspeak-ers in the door panels have been removed,unless the holes left by the loudspeakershave been closed properly.● Always check that the openings areclosed or covered if loudspeakers or otherequipment are fitted inside the door pan-els.● Occupants of the outer seats must nevercarry any objects or pets in the deploy-ment space between them and the airbags,or allow children or other passengers totravel in this position. It is also important »

25

Safety

not to attach any accessories (such as cupholders) to the doors. This would impair theprotection offered by the side airbags.● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets.● Great forces, such as hard blows or kicks,must not be exerted upon the backrest bol-ster because the system may be damaged.In this case, the side airbags would not betriggered.● Under no circumstances should protec-tive covers be fitted over seats with sideairbags unless the covers have been ap-proved for use in your vehicle. Because theairbag deploys from the side of the back-rest, the use of conventional seat coverswould obstruct the side airbag, seriouslyreducing the airbag's effectiveness.● Any damage to the original seat uphols-tery or around the seams of the side airbagunits must be repaired immediately by aspecialised workshop.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.● Any work on the side airbag system or re-moval and installation of the airbag com-ponents for other repairs (such as removalof the front seat) should only be performedby a specialised workshop. Otherwise,faults may occur during the airbag systemoperation.

Head-protection airbags*

Fig. 19 Location and deployment area of thehead-protection airbag.

Head-protection airbags are on both sides ofthe passenger compartment, above thedoors ››› Fig. 19 and their location is indicatedwith the word “AIRBAG”.

In conjunction with the seat belts, the head-protection airbag system gives the vehicleoccupants additional protection for the headand upper body in the event of a severe sidecollision ››› .

When triggered, the head-protection airbagoccupies the area framed in red (deploymentzone) ››› Fig. 19. Therefore, objects shouldnever be placed or mounted in this area ››› .

In the event of a side collision the curtain air-bag is triggered on the impact side of the ve-hicle.

The head-protection airbags reduce the riskof injury to passengers in the front and rearside seats facing the impact.

WARNING● In order for the head-protection airbagsto provide their maximum protection, theprescribed sitting position must always bemaintained with seat belts fastened whiletravelling.● For safety reasons, the curtain airbagmust be disabled in those vehicles fittedwith a screen dividing the interior of the ve-hicle. See your technical service to makethis adjustment.● There must be no other persons, animalsor objects between the occupants of theouter seats and the deployment space ofthe head-protection airbags so that thehead-protection airbag can deploy com-pletely without restriction and provide thegreatest possible protection. Therefore,sun blinds which have not been expresslyapproved for use in your vehicle may not beattached to the side windows● The built-in coat hooks should be usedonly for lightweight clothing. Do not leaveany heavy or sharp-edged objects in thepockets. Please, do not hang the clothes oncoat hangers.● The airbags provide protection for justone accident; replace them once they havedeployed.

26

Safe transportation of children

● Any work on the head-protection airbagsystem or removal and installation of theairbag components for other repairs (suchas removal of the roof lining) should onlybe performed by a specialised workshop.Otherwise, faults may occur during the air-bag system operation.● The side and head airbags are managedthrough sensors located in the interior ofthe front doors. To ensure the correct oper-ation of the side and curtain airbags nei-ther the doors nor the door panels shouldbe modified in any way (e.g. fitting loud-speakers). If the front door is damaged, theairbag system may not work correctly. Allwork carried out on the front door must bedone in a specialised workshop.

Safe transportation ofchildren

Safety for children

Introduction

For safety reasons, as we have learned fromaccident statistics, we recommend that chil-dren under 12 years of age travel in the rearseats. Depending on their age, height andweight, children travelling in rear seats mustuse a child seat or a seat belt. For safety rea-sons, the child seat should be installed in therear seat, behind the front passenger seat orin the centre back seat.

The physical laws involved and the forcesacting in a collision apply also to children››› page 16. But unlike adults, children do nothave fully developed muscle and bone struc-tures. This means that children are subject toa greater risk of injury.

To reduce the risk of injuries, children must al-ways use special child restraint systemswhen travelling in the vehicle.

We recommend the use of child safety prod-ucts from the SEAT Original Accessories Pro-gramme, which includes systems for all agesmade by “Peke” (not for all countries) (seewww.seat.com).

These systems have been especially de-signed and approved, complying with theECE-R44. regulation.

SEAT recommends securing the child seatsshown on the website as described below:

● Child seats in the opposite direction of trav-el (group 0+): ISOFIX and support foot (RÖ-MER BABY SAFE PLUS SHR II + ISOFIX BASE /PEKE G0 I-SIZE + I-SIZE BASE).● Child seats in the direction of travel (group1): ISOFIX and Top Tether (RÖMER DUO PLUS+ TOP TETHER / PEKE G1 TRIFIX I-SIZE).● Child seats facing the direction of travel(group 2): safety belt and ISOFIX (RÖMERKIDFIX XP).● Child seats facing the direction of travel(group 3): safety belt and ISOFIX (RÖMERKIDFIX XP).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats. Always readand note ››› page 29.

We recommend you always carry the manu-facturer's Child Seat Instruction Manual to-gether with the on-board documentation.

27

Safety

Child seats group classification

Fig. 20 Examples of child seats.

Use only child seats that are officially ap-proved and suitable for the child.

Child seats are subject to the regulation ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129. ECE-R stands for: Eco-nomic Commission for Europe Regulation.

Child seats by weight groupThe child seats are grouped into 5 catego-ries:

Age group Weight of the child

Group 0 Up to 10 kg

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg

Group 1 From 9 to 18 kg



Child seats that have been tested and ap-proved under the ECE-R 44 or ECE-R 129standard bear the test mark ECE-R 44 orECE-R 129 on the seat (the letter E in a circlewith the test number below it).

Follow the manufacturer's instructions andobserve any statutory requirements when in-stalling and using child seats.

We recommend you to always include themanufacturer's Child Seat Instruction Manualtogether with the on-board documentation.

SEAT recommends you use child seats fromthe Original Accessories Catalogue. Thesechild seats have been designed and testedfor use in SEAT vehicles. You can find the rightchild seat for your model and age group atSEAT dealers.

Child seats by approval categoryChild seats may have the approval categoryof universal, semi-universal, vehicle specific(all according to the ECE-R 44 standard) or i-Size (according to the ECE-R 129 standard).

● Universal: child seats with universal appro-val can be installed in all vehicles. There is noneed to consult any list of models. In the caseof universal approval for ISOFIX, the childseat is additionally provided with a Top Tetherbelt.● Semi-universal: semi-universal approval,in addition to the standard requirements of

universal approval, requires safety devices tolock the child seat, which require additionaltesting. Child seats with semi-universal ap-proval include a list of vehicle models forwhich they can be installed.● Vehicle-specific: vehicle-specific approvalrequires a dynamic test of the child seat foreach vehicle model separately. Child seatswith vehicle-specific approval also include alist of vehicle models for which they can beinstalled.● i-Size: child seats with i-Size approval mustmeet the requirements prescribed in the ECE-R 129 standard in relation to installation andsafety. Child seat manufacturers can tell youwhich seats have i-Size approval for this vehi-cle.

28


Fitting and using child seats

Fig. 21 Airbag sticker: on the passenger sidesunshade blind

Fig. 22 Airbag sticker: on the rear frame of thepassenger side door

Warnings about fitting a child seatTake the following general warnings into ac-count if you are going to fit a child seat. Theyare valid for all child seats regardless of theirattachment system.

● Please read and follow the child seat man-ufacturer's operating instructions.● The child seat should preferably be fitted tothe rear seat behind the front passenger seatso that the child can exit the vehicle on thepavement side.● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● To correctly use a child seat in the back,the front backrest must be adjusted so thatthere is no contact with the child seat in theback in the case that it goes opposite to thedirection of the car. In the case of front facingrestraint systems, the front backrest must beadjusted so that there is no contact with thechild's feet.● If a semi-universal type chair is to be instal-led, in which the method of attachment to thecar is through the seat belt and support

bracket, it should never be installed in thecentral rear seat as the ground clearance islower than in other places and the supportbracket will not allow the seat to remain suffi-ciently stable.● When fitting a child seat on the front pas-senger seat, the seat must be moved back-wards as far as possible and placed in thehighest position. The backrest must also beput in a vertical position1).

Important information about the front pas-senger front airbagA sticker with important information about thepassenger airbag is located on the passeng-er's sunshade blind and/or on the passengerside door frame ››› Fig. 21.

Read and always observe the safety informa-tion included in the following chapters:

● Safety distance with respect to the passen-ger airbag ››› page 20.● Objects between the passenger and thepassenger side airbag ››› in Front airbagson page 24.

The passenger side front airbag, when ena-bled, is a serious risk for a child that is facingbackward since the airbag can strike the seat »

1) Compliance with current national legislationand the manufacturer's instructions is requiredwhen using or installing child seats.

29

Safety

with such force that it can cause serious orfatal injuries. Children up to 12 years oldshould always travel on the rear seat.

Therefore we strongly recommend you totransport children on the rear seats. This isthe safest location in the vehicle. Alternative-ly, the front passenger airbag can be disa-bled with a key-operated switch ››› page 24.When transporting children, use a child seatsuitable for the age and size of each child››› page 28.

WARNING● If a child seat is secured to the front pas-senger seat, the risk to the child of sustain-ing critical or fatal injuries in the event of anaccident increases.● An inflating front passenger airbag canstrike the rear-facing child seat and projectit with great force against the door, the roofor the backrest.● Never install a child seat facing back-wards on the front passenger seat unlessthe front passenger front airbag has beendisabled. Risk of potentially fatal injuries tothe child! However, if necessary, the frontpassenger front airbag must be deactiva-ted ››› page 24. If the passenger seat has aheight adjustment option, move it to thehighest, most upright position. If you have afixed seat, do not install any child restraintsystem in this location.

● For those vehicles that do not include akey lock switch to deactivate the airbag,the vehicle must be taken to a technicalservice. Do not forget to reconnect the air-bag when an adult wants to sit in the frontpassenger seat.● Never allow a child to be transported in avehicle without being properly secured, orto stand up or kneel on a seat while travel-ling. In an accident, the child could be flungthrough the vehicle, causing possibly fatalinjuries to themselves and to the other vehi-cle occupants.● Never leave a child alone in the child seator in the vehicle.● Children who are less than 1.5 metres tallmust not wear a normal seat belt without achild seat, as this could cause injuries tothe abdominal and neck areas during asudden braking manoeuvre or in an acci-dent.● When a child seat is mounted in the rearseats, the door child-proof lock should beactivated ››› page 77.

Attachment systems

Depending on the country, different attach-ment systems are used for safely installingchild seats.

Attachment systems overview● ISOFIX: ISOFIX is a standardised attach-ment system allowing quick and safe attach-ment of child seats in the vehicle. ISOFIX at-tachment establishes a rigid connection be-tween the child seat and the car body.

The child seat has two rigid attachment clips,called connectors. These connectors are fit-ted into the ISOFIX attachment rings foundbetween the seat cushion and the backrestof the vehicle's back seat (on the sides). ISO-FIX attachment systems are used mainly inEurope ››› page 31. If necessary, ISOFIX at-tachment may have to be supplemented witha Top Tether belt or a support bracket.

● Automatic three-point seat belt. When-ever possible, it is preferable to attach thechild seats with the ISOFIX system rather thanattaching them with an automatic three-pointseat belt ››› page 34.

Additional attachment:

● Top Tether: the Top Tether belt is guidedover the back of the rear seat and attachedto an anchor point with a hook. Anchor pointsare located at the back of the rear seat back-rest on the boot side ››› page 33. The ringsfor retaining the Top Tether belt are markedwith an anchor symbol.● Support bracket: some child seats rest onthe floor of the vehicle with a support bracket.The support bracket prevents the child seat

30


from tipping forward in the event of impact.Child seats fitted with a support bracketshould only be used in the passenger seatand side rear seats ››› . For the assembly ofthis type of seat you should also consult thelist of approved vehicles for this assembly,available in the instructions for child restraintsystems.

Recommended systems for attachingchild seatsSEAT recommends attaching child seats asfollows:

● Baby carriers or child seats in the oppo-site direction of travel: ISOFIX and supportbracket or i-Size.

● Child seats in the direction of travel: ISO-FIX and Top Tether.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the support bracket cancause serious or fatal injury.● Make sure the support bracket is correct-ly and safely installed.

Secure a child seat with the ISOFIX/i-Size and Top Tether system*

Fig. 23 Rear seat: ISOFIX/i-Size securing rings. Fig. 24 Rear seats: fitting a child seat with theISOFIX system.

Child seats can be secured quickly, easilyand safely on the rear seats with the ISOFIX/i-Size* and Top Tether system.

Two “ISOFIX” retaining rings are fitted on eachrear side seat. The “ISOFIX” rings are located

between the backrest and the seat cushion-ing of the rear seat ››› Fig. 23. The Top Teth-er* rings are located on the rear part of thebackrests of the rear seats (behind the seatbackrest or in the boot) ››› page 33.

To understand the compatibility of the ISO-FIX/i-Size systems in the vehicle, check the ta-ble below. »

31

Safety

Age group Class according to sizea) Front passenger seat Rear seats

Group 0: up to 10 kg E X IL-SU

Group 0+: up to 13 kg

E X

IL-SUD X

C X

Group 1: 9 to 18 kg

D X

IL-SUIUF

C X

B X

B1 X

A X

Group 2: 15 to 25 kg – X IL-SU

Group 3: 22 to 36 kg – X IL-SU

i-Size child restraint system – X i-U

X: space not suitable for fixing an ISOFIX or i-Size child seat in this group.IL-SU: space suitable for installing an ISOFIX child seat with semi-universal approval. Take the child seat manufacturer's vehicle list into account.IUF: suitable place for installing an ISOFIX child seat with universal approval.i-U: space suitable for fitting a forward- or rear-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval.i-UF: space suitable for fitting a forward-facing i-Size child seat with universal approval.

a) The indication of class according to size corresponds to the authorised bodyweight for the child seat. In child seats with universal or semi-universal approval, the classaccording to size is indicated on the ECE approval label. The indication of class according to size is stated on the corresponding child seat.

Securing the child seat with the “ISOFIX/i-Size” systemYou are obliged to follow the seat manufac-turer's instructions.

● Press the child seat onto the “ISOFIX/iSize”retaining rings until the child seat is heard toengage securely ››› Fig. 24. If the child seat isequipped with Top Tether* anchor points, se-cure it to the correspondent ring

››› page 33. Observe the manufacturer's in-structions.● Pull on both sides of the child seat to ensurethat it is properly anchored.

32


Child seats with the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*attachment system are available from Tech-nical Services.

WARNINGThe retaining rings are designed only foruse with “ISOFIX” and Top Tether* systemchild seats.● Never secure other child seats that donot have the “ISOFIX” or Top Tether* sys-tem, or retaining belts or objects to the fas-tening rings - this can result in potentiallyfatal injuries to the child.● Ensure that the child seat is secured cor-rectly using the “ISOFIX” and Top Tether*securing rings.

Top Tether* securing belts

Fig. 25 Rear part of the rear seats: securingrings for the Top Tether strap.

Child seats with the Top Tether system comewith a strap for securing the seat to the vehi-cle anchor point, located at the back of therear seat backrest and provide greater re-straint.

The objective of this strap is to reduce for-ward movements of the child seat in a crash,to reduce the risk of injuries to the head fromhitting the inside of the vehicle.

Using the Top Tether in rear-facing moun-ted seatsCurrently, there are very few rear-facing childsafety seats that have Top Tether. Pleasecarefully read and follow the seat manufac-turer instructions to learn the proper way toinstall the Top Tether strap.

Securing the retaining strap● Follow the manufacturer's instructions todeploy the child seat Top Tether retainingstrap.● Place the belt under the headrest of theback seat (depending on the instructions ofthe chair itself, lift or remove the headrest ifnecessary).● Slide the strap and secure it properly withthe anchor on the rear seat backrest››› Fig. 25.

● Firmly tighten the strap following the manu-facturer's instructions.

Releasing the retaining strap● Loosen the strap following the manufactur-er's instructions.● Push the lock and release it from the an-choring support.

WARNINGAn undue installation of the safety seat willincrease the risk of injury in the event of acrash.● Never tie the retainer strap to a hook inthe luggage compartment.● Never secure or tie luggage or otheritems to the lower anchorages (ISOFIX) orthe upper ones (Top Tether).

33

Safety

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt

If you want to fit a universal approval catego-ry (U) child seat in your vehicle, you mustcheck that the seat is approved for your vehi-

cle. You will find any necessary informationon the child seat’s orange ECE approval la-

bel. The following table shows the differentfitting options.

Age group Weight of the childFront passenger seat

Rear seatsFront passenger air-bag activated

Front passenger air-bag deactivated

Group 0 Up to 10 kg X U U

Group 0+ Up to 13 kg X U U

Group 1Rear-facing From 9 to 18 kg X U U

Forward-facing From 9 to 18 kg U X U

Group 2 From 15 to 25 kg U X U

Group 3 From 22 to 36 kg U X U

U: universal.X: vehicle seat unsuitable for fitting a child seat from this group.

Fitting a child seat using the seat belt● Set the height of the seat belt such that itadapts to the child seat naturally, withouttwisting. The lowest position of the seat beltheight regulator must be used with rear-fac-ing child seats.● Put the seat belt in place and pass itthrough the child seat according to the in-structions of the child seat manufacturer.● Make sure that the seat belt is not twisted.

● Insert the latch plate into the seat's buckleuntil you hear the engagement click.

WARNINGWhen travelling, children must be securedin the vehicle with a restraint system suita-ble for age, weight and size.● Read and always observe informationand warnings concerning the use of childseats ››› page 29.

34

Self-help

Emergencies

Self-help

Emergency equipment

First aid kit, warning triangle andfire extinguishers*

Fig. 26 In the boot: storage compartment forthe warning triangle

Warning triangleThe use of reflective warning triangles isobligatory in emergencies in some countries.As are the first aid kit and a set of spare lightbulbs.

Depending on the vehicle’s equipment, thewarning triangle can be found in a compart-ment located under the cover of the loadarea of the luggage compartment ››› Fig. 26.

First aid kitThe first aid kit must comply with legal re-quirements. Check the expiry date of thecontents of the first aid kit.

Fire extinguisherA fire extinguisher can be stored in a holder inthe passenger seat footwell.

The fire extinguisher must conform to legalrequirements, be ready for use and bechecked regularly. Check the certificationseal on the extinguisher.

WARNINGLoose objects in the vehicle interior can beviolently thrown in case of a sudden ma-noeuvre or braking and especially in acci-dents causing serious injury.● Secure or store fire extinguishers, first aidkit, reflective vests and warning trianglesecurely in the vehicle.

Note● The first aid kit, warning triangle, reflec-tive vests and fire extinguishers are not partof the vehicle's standard equipment.● The warning triangle should meet legalrequirements.● Before acquiring accessories and emer-gency equipment see the instructions in“Accessories and spares” ››› page 205.

Vehicle tool kit

Fig. 27 In the boot: carpet raised.

Fig. 28 Underneath the floor panel of the lug-gage compartment: on-board tools.

The vehicle tool kit is located under the floorpanel in the luggage compartment ››› Fig. 27.To access the vehicle tools ››› page 95.

The tool kit includes: »

35

Emergencies

Screwdriver with hexagon socket in thehandle for screwing and unscrewing thewheel nutsAdapter for the anti-theft boltTowing eye, removableHook for extracting the central wheeltrims*Wheel spannerClip for removing the wheel bolt caps

Some of the items listed are only provided incertain model versions, or are optional extras.

WARNINGIf loose, the vehicle tool kit and anti-punc-ture kit could be thrown violently in thepassenger compartment in case of suddenmanoeuvres, sudden braking and acci-dents, and could cause serious injuries.● Always check that the vehicle tool kit andthe anti-puncture kit are securely fastenedin the luggage compartment.

WARNINGUnsuitable or damaged vehicle tools cancause injury or accidents.● Never work with inappropriate or dam-aged tools.

1

2

3

4

5

6

Tyre repairs

TMS (Tyre Mobility System)*

The Anti-puncture kit* (Tyre Mobility System)will reliably seal punctures caused by thepenetration of a foreign body of up to about4 mm in diameter. Do not remove foreignobjects, e.g. screws or nails, from the tyre.

After inserting the sealant residue in the tyre,you must again check the tyre pressureabout 10 minutes after starting the engine.

You should only use the tyre mobility set if thevehicle is parked in a safe place, you are fa-miliar with the procedure and you have thenecessary tyre mobility set! Otherwise, youshould seek professional assistance.

Do not use the tyre sealant in the followingcases:● If the wheel rim has been damaged.● In outside temperatures below -20°C(-4°F).● In the event of cuts or perforations in thetyre greater than 4 mm.● If you have been driving with very low pres-sure or a completely flat tyre.● If the sealant bottle has passed its use bydate.

WARNINGUsing the tyre mobility system can be dan-gerous, especially when filling the tyre atthe roadside. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble. Park it at a safe distance from sur-rounding traffic to fill the tyre.● Ensure the ground on which you park isflat and solid.● All passengers and particularly childrenmust keep a safe distance from the workarea.● Turn on the hazard warning lights to warnother road users.● Use the tyre mobility system only if youare familiar with the necessary procedures.Otherwise, you should seek professionalassistance.● The tyre mobility set is intended for tem-porary emergency use only until you canreach the nearest specialised workshop.● Replace the repaired tyre with the tyremobility set as soon as possible.● The sealant is a health hazard and mustbe cleaned immediately if it comes intocontact with the skin.● Always keep the tyre mobility set out ofthe reach of small children.

36

Self-help

● Always stop the engine, apply the handbrake and put it in gear when using a man-ual gearbox, in order to reduce the risk ofinvoluntary movement of the vehicle.

WARNINGA tyre filled with sealant does not have thesame performance properties as a conven-tional tyre.● Never drive faster than 80 km/h(50 mph).● Avoid heavy acceleration, hard brakingand fast cornering.● Drive for only 10 minutes at a maximumspeed of 80 km/h (50 mph) and then checkthe tyre.

For the sake of the environmentDispose of used or expired sealant observ-ing any legal requirements.

NoteA new bottle of sealant can be purchasedat SEAT dealerships.

NoteTake into account the separate instructionmanual of the tyre mobility set* manufac-turer.

Anti-puncture kit contents*

Fig. 29 Standard display: contents of the anti-puncture kit.

The anti-puncture kit is located underneaththe floor covering in the luggage compart-ment. Includes the following components››› Fig. 29:

Valve insert removerA sticker to be adhered to the instrumentcluster, within the driver's visual field, toremind that the maximum advisablespeed “max. 80 km/h” or “max. 50 mph”Filler tube with capAir compressorON/OFF switchAir bleed screw (it can also be integratedin the inflator tube).

1

2

3

4

5

6

Warning provided by tyre pressure moni-toring system (it can also be integrated inthe inflator tube).Tube for inflating tyres12 volt connectorBottle of sealantSpare tyre valve

The valve insert remover 1 has a gap atthe lower end for a valve insert. The valve in-sert can only be screwed or unscrewed in thisway. This also applies to its replacement part11 .

Sealing and inflating a tyre

Sealing the tyre● Unscrew the tyre valve cap and insert. Usethe device ››› Fig. 29 1 to remove the howit-zer. Place it on a clean surface.● Shake the tyre sealant bottle vigorously››› Fig. 29 10 .● Screw the tyre inflation hose ››› Fig. 29 3into the tyre sealant bottle. The bottle's sealwill break automatically.● Remove the filler cap ››› Fig. 29 3 andscrew the open end of the tube into the tyrevalve.● With the bottle upside down, empty all ofthe contents into the tyre. »

7

8

9

10

11

37

Emergencies

● Remove the bottle from the valve.● Replace the howitzer with the device››› Fig. 29 1 on the tyre valve.

Inflating the tyre● Screw the tyre inflation tube of the com-pressor ››› Fig. 29 8 on the tyre valve.● Check that the air evacuation screw isclosed ››› Fig. 29 6 .● Connect the vehicle's drive system.● Attach the connector ››› Fig. 29 9 to thevehicle’s 12 volt power outlet ››› page 102.● Connect the air compressor with ON/OFFswitch ››› Fig. 29 5 .● Keep the air compressor running until it rea-ches 2.0 to 2.5 bar (29-36 psi/200-250 kPa).A maximum of 8 minutes.● Disconnect the air compressor.● If it does not reach the pressure indicated,unscrew the tyre inflator tube from the valve.● Move the vehicle 10m so that the sealant isdistributed throughout the tyre.● Screw the compressor tyre inflator into thevalve.● Repeat the inflation process.● If the indicated pressure still cannot bereached, the tyre is too badly damaged. Stopand request assistance from an authorisedtechnician.

● Disconnect the air compressor. Unscrewthe tyre inflator tube from the tyre valve.● When the tyre pressure is between 2.5 and2.0 bars, continue driving without exceeding80 km/h (50 mph).● Attach the sticker ››› Fig. 29 2 to the in-strument panel display, within the driver'sfield of vision.● Check the pressure again after 10 minutes››› page 38.

WARNINGWhen inflating the wheel, the air compres-sor and the inflator tube may become hot.● Protect hands and skin from hot parts.● Do not place the hot flexible inflator tubeor hot air compressor on flammable mate-rial.● Allow them to cool before storing the de-vice.● If it is not possible to inflate the tyre to atleast 2.0 bars (29 psi / 200 kPa), the tyre istoo badly damaged. The sealant is not in agood condition to seal the tyre. Do not con-tinue driving. Seek specialist assistance.

CAUTIONSwitch off the air compressor after a maxi-mum of 8 operational minutes to avoidoverheating! Before switching on the aircompressor again, let it cool for several mi-nutes.

Check after 10 minutes of driving

Screw the inflator tube ››› Fig. 29 5 againand check the pressure on the gauge 6 .

1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower:● Stop the vehicle! The tyre cannot besealed sufficiently with the tyre mobility set.● You should obtain professional assistance››› .

1.4 bar (20 psi / 140 kPa) and higher:● Set the tyre pressure to the correct valueagain.● Carefully resume your journey until youreach the nearest specialised workshop with-out exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph).● Have the damaged tyre replaced.

WARNINGDriving with an unsealed tyre is dangerousand can cause accidents and serious in-jury.● Do not continue driving if the tyre pres-sure is 1.3 bar (19 psi / 130 kPa) and lower.● Seek specialist assistance.

38

Self-help

Changing a wheel

What to do first

● Park the vehicle on a horizontal surface andin a safe place as far away from traffic aspossible.● Apply the handbrake.● Switch on the hazard warning lights.● Position the selector lever in N or P.● Keep the vehicle tool kit ››› page 35 andthe spare wheel* available.● Observe the applicable legislation for eachcountry (reflective vest, warning triangles,etc.).● All occupants should leave the vehicle andwait in a safe place (for instance behind theroadside crash barrier).

WARNING● Always observe the above steps and pro-tect yourself and other road users.● If you change the wheel on a slope, blockthe wheel on the opposite side of the carwith a stone or similar to prevent the vehi-cle from moving.

Integral wheel trim

Fig. 30 Remove the wheel cover.

The wheel covers must be removed for ac-cess to the wheel bolts.

Removing● Take the wheel brace and the wire hookfrom the vehicle tool kit ››› page 35.● Hook the wire through one of the grooves ofthe trim.● Insert the box spanner through the hook,rest it on the tyre and remove the wheel trim››› Fig. 30.

Fitting● Press the trim against the wheel so that thehole for the valve fits over the tyre valve.● Make sure that the trim is correctly fitted allthe way around the wheel. If you are using an

anti-theft wheel lock, screw it in the oppositeposition to the valve.

Wheel bolt caps*

Fig. 31 Wheel: wheel bolts with caps.

Removal● Fit the plastic clip (vehicle tools ››› Fig. 28)over the cap until it clicks into place››› Fig. 31.● Remove the cap with the plastic clip.

The caps protect the wheel bolts and shouldbe remounted after changing the tyre.

The anti-theft wheel locking bolt has aspecial cap. This only fits on anti-theft lockingbolts and is not for use with standard wheelbolts.

39

Emergencies

Anti-theft wheel bolts

Fig. 32 Anti-theft wheel bolt with cap andadapter.

Loosening the anti-theft wheel bolt● Remove the wheel cover* or the cap*.● Insert the special adapter ››› Fig. 32 1 (ve-hicle tools ››› page 35) onto the anti-theftwheel bolt and push it on as far as it will go.● Insert the wheel brace (vehicle tools) ontothe adapter as far as it will go.● Remove the wheel bolt ››› page 40.

NoteMake a note of the code number of the an-ti-theft wheel bolt and keep it in a safeplace, but not in your vehicle. If you need anew adapter, you can obtain it from theSEAT Official Service, indicating the codenumber.

Loosening wheel bolts

Fig. 33 Tyre change: slacken the wheel bolts.

Fig. 34 Tyre change: tyre valve 1 and thecorrect position for the anti-theft wheel lockingbolt 2 or 3 .

Use only the wheel wrench belonging to thecar to loosen the wheel bolts.

Loosen the wheel bolts only about one turnbefore raising the vehicle with the jack.

If the wheel bolt is very tight, carefully pushon the end of the wheel wrench with yourfoot. Hold on to the vehicle for support andtake care not to slip during this operation.

Loosening wheel bolts● Fit the box spanner into the bolt as far as itwill go ››› Fig. 33.● Hold the wrench at the end and rotate thebolt approximately one turn anticlock-wise ››› .

Important information about wheel boltsFactory-fitted rims and wheel bolts are spe-cially matched during construction. There-fore, if different rims are fitted, the correctwheel bolts with the right length and headsmust be used. This ensures that wheels arefitted securely and that the brake systemfunctions correctly.

In certain circumstances, you should not evenuse wheel bolts from vehicles of the samemodel.

On wheels with integral hubcaps, the anti-theft wheel locking bolt must be screwed inthe positions ››› Fig. 34 2 or 3 , taking asreference the position of the tyre valve 1 .Otherwise it will not be possible to mount thehubcap.

40

Self-help

WARNINGIf the wheel bolts are not properly tight-ened, they could come loose while drivingand cause an accident, serious injury andloss of vehicle control.● Use only wheel bolts which correspondto the rim in question.● Never use different wheel bolts.● Wheel bolts and threads should be clean,free of oil and grease, and it should be pos-sible to screw them easily.● To loosen and tighten wheel bolts, onlyuse the wheel wrench that came with thecar from the factory.● The wheel bolts should only be loosenedslightly (about one turn) before raising thevehicle with the jack. Risk of accident!● Never apply grease or oil to wheel boltsor to the wheel hub threads. Even if thebolts have been tightened to the prescri-bed torque, they could come loose whiledriving.● Never loosen the screwed joints of wheelrims with bolted ring trims.● If wheel bolts are tightened below theprescribed torque, the bolts and rims couldcome loose while driving. If tightening tor-que is too high, the wheel bolts or threadscan be damaged.

Raising the vehicle

Fig. 35 Jack position points.

Fig. 36 Crossbar: mounting the jack on the ve-hicle.

● Rest the jack (vehicles tools) on firmground. If necessary use a large, strongboard or similar support. If the surface is slip-pery (for example tiles) place the jack on arubber mat or similar to prevent it from slip-ping ››› . »

41

Emergencies

● Look on the strut for the mark of the jacksupport point (sunken area) closest to thewheel to be changed ››› Fig. 35.● Raise the jack with the crank handle until itcan be inserted just below the support pointof the vehicle.● Make sure that the base of the jack restsfirmly on the ground and that it is exactly be-low the vertical support point ››› Fig. 36.● Centre the jack and continue to raise it withthe crank handle until the claw grasps the re-inforcement located under the vehicle››› Fig. 36.● Keep raising the jack until the wheel comesslightly off the ground.

WARNINGThe factory-supplied jack is only designedfor changing wheels on this model. On noaccount attempt to use it for lifting heaviervehicles or other loads. Risk of injury.● Make sure the jack remains stable. If thesurface is slippery or soft, the jack couldslip or sink, respectively, with the conse-quent risk of causing injuries.● Lift the vehicle using only the jack sup-plied from the factory. Other jacks, eventhose approved for other SEAT modelscould slip, with the consequent risk of in-jury.● Place the jack only at the support pointsprovided on the strut and align it. Other-

wise, the jack could slip because it doesnot have sufficient grip on the vehicle: riskof injury!● You should never place a body limb suchas an arm or leg under a raised vehicle thatis solely supported by the jack.● If you have to work underneath the vehi-cle, you must use suitable stands addition-ally to support the vehicle, there is a risk ofaccident!.● Never raise the vehicle if it is tilting to oneside or the engine is running.● Never start the engine when the vehicle israised. The vehicle may come loose fromthe jack due to the engine vibrations.

CAUTIONThe vehicle must not be raised on thecrossbar. Place the jack only at the supportpoints provided on the strut and align it.Otherwise, the vehicle may be damaged.

Removing and installing a wheel

Fig. 37 Changing the tyre: loosen wheel boltswith the socket at the end of the wheel brace

Change the wheel after loosening the wheelbolts and raising the vehicle with the jack.

When removing/fitting the wheel, the rim mayhit and damage the brake disc. For this rea-son, please take care and get a second per-son to assist you.

Taking off the wheel● Fully unscrew the loosened wheel boltswith the inner hexagon of the screwdriverhandle ››› Fig. 37 and place them on a cleansurface.● Take off the wheel.

Putting on the spare wheelCheck the direction of rotation of the tyre››› page 43.

42

Self-help

● Place the spare wheel or temporary sparewheel into position.● Replace the wheel bolts and tighten slight-ly using the hexagonal socket on the end ofthe wheel brace.● To tighten the anti-theft locking wheel boltsuse the corresponding adaptor.● Carefully lower the vehicle using the jack.● Use the wheel spanner to tighten all of thewheel nuts clockwise. Tighten the bolts in di-agonal pairs (not in a circle).● Put the caps or full hubcap back on.

The wheel bolts should be clean and turneasily. Before fitting the spare wheel, inspectthe wheel condition and hub mounting surfa-ces. These surfaces must be clean before fit-ting the wheel.

Tightening torque of the wheel boltsThe prescribed tightening torque for wheelbolts for steel and alloy wheels is 110 Nm. Af-ter changing a wheel, have the tightening tor-que checked immediately with a torquewrench that is working perfectly.

Before checking tightening torque, have anyrusty wheel bolts that are difficult to screw re-placed and clean the wheel hub threads.

Never apply grease or oil to wheel bolts or tothe wheel hub threads. Even if the bolts have

been tightened to the prescribed torque, theycould come loose while driving.

WARNINGThe hexagonal socket in the wheel braceshould be used for turning wheel bolts only.Do not use it to loosen or tighten the wheelbolts.

Tyres with directional tread pattern

Tyres with directional tread pattern havebeen designed to operate best when rotatingin only one direction. An arrow on the tyresidewall indicates the direction of rotation ontyres with directional tread. Always observethe indicated direction of rotation in order toguarantee optimum grip and help avoidaquaplaning, excessive noise and wear.

If the tyre is mounted in the opposite directionof rotation, drive with extreme caution, as thetyre is no longer being used correctly. This isof particular importance when the road sur-face is wet. Change the tyre as soon as pos-sible or remount it with the correct directionof rotation.

Works after changing a wheel

● Alloy wheels: replace the wheel bolt caps.● Plate wheels: replace the wheel hubcap .

● Return all tools to their proper storing loca-tion.● If the replaced wheel does not fit in thespare wheel housing, store it safely in the lug-gage compartment ››› page 94.● Check the tyre pressure of the newly moun-ted tyre as soon as possible.● In vehicles fitted with a tyre pressure indica-tor, adjust the pressure and store it in memory››› page 195.● Have the tightening torque of the wheelnuts checked as soon as possible with a tor-que wrench ››› page 43. Meanwhile, drivecarefully.● Have the flat tyre replaced as quickly aspossible.

43

Emergencies

Changing the windscreenwiper blades

Wiper service position

Fig. 38 Wipers in service position.

With the wiper in service position, it is possibleto the fold the wiper arms ››› Fig. 38.

● Close the bonnet ››› page 180.● Switch the ignition on and off.● Press the windscreen wiper lever down-wards briefly ››› page 86 4 .

Before driving, always lower the wiper arms.Using the windscreen wiper lever, the wind-screen wiper arms return to their initial posi-tion.

Note● The windscreen wiper arms can bemoved to the service position only whenthe bonnet is properly closed.● You can also use the service position, forexample, if you want to fix a cover over thewindscreen in the winter to keep it clear ofice.

Changing the windscreen and rearwindow wiper blades

Fig. 39 Changing the windscreen wiperblades

Fig. 40 Removing and fitting the rear windowwiper blade.

The windscreen wiper blades are supplied asstandard with a layer of graphite. This layer isresponsible for ensuring that the wipe is silent.If the graphite layer is damaged, the noise ofthe water as it is wiped across the windscreenwill be louder.

Check the condition of the wiper blades reg-ularly. If the wipers scrape across theglass, they should be changed if they aredamaged, or cleaned if they are dirty ››› .

If this does not produce the desired results,the setting angle of the windscreen wiperarms might be incorrect. They should bechecked by a specialised workshop and cor-rected if necessary.

Damaged windscreen wiper blades shouldbe replaced immediately. These are availa-ble from qualified workshops.

44

Self-help

Raising and lowering windscreen wiperarms● Place the windscreen wipers in the serviceposition ››› page 44.● Grip the wiper arms only by the blade'sfastening point.

Cleaning windscreen wiper blades● Raise the wiper arms.● Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirtfrom the windscreen wiper blades.● If the blades are very dirty, a sponge ordamp cloth may be used ››› .

Changing the windscreen wiper blades● Lift and unfold the wiper arms.● Press and hold release button ››› Fig. 39 1and pull gently on the wiper blade in the di-rection of the arrow.● Fit a new wiper blade of the same lengthand design on to the wiper arm and hook itinto place.● Rest the wiper arms back onto the wind-screen.

Changing the rear wiper blade● Lift and fold the wiper arm.● Rotate the blade lightly ››› Fig. 40 (arrowA ).

● Hold down the release button 1 while gen-tly pulling the blade in the direction of arrowB .● Insert a new blade of the same length andtype in the rear wiper arm in the opposite di-rection to the arrow B and hook into placebutton 1 .● Replace the wiper arm on the rear window.

WARNINGWorn or dirty windscreen wiper blades re-duce visibility and increase the risk of acci-dent and serious injury.● Always replace damaged or worn wind-screen wiper blades or blades that no lon-ger clean the windscreen properly.

CAUTION● Damaged or dirty windscreen wiperscould scratch the glass.● If products containing solvents, roughsponges or sharp objects are used to cleanthe blades, the graphite layer will be dam-aged.● Never use fuel, nail varnish remover, paintthinner or similar products to clean the win-dows.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 44.

CAUTION● To prevent damage to the bonnet and thewiper arms, only leave them in the serviceposition.● Before driving, always lower the wiperarms.

Jump starting

Jump leads

The jump lead must have a sufficient wirecross section.

If the engine fails to start because of a dis-charged battery, the battery can be connec-ted to the battery of another vehicle to startthe engine.

Jump leads must comply with standard DIN72553 (see cable manufacturer's instruc-tions).

Note● The vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.● The discharged battery must be properlyconnected to the on-board network.

45

Emergencies

Jump starting: description

Fig. 41 Connection diagram.

Jump lead terminal connectionsThe jump leads should only be connectedfollowing the order ››› Fig. 41 1. > 2. > 3. > 4.

● Switch off the ignition of both vehicles ››› .● Connect one end of the red jump lead tothe positive pole + of the vehicle with the dis-charged battery A ››› Fig. 41.● Connect the other end of the red jump leadto the positive terminal + in the vehicle provid-ing assistance B .

● Connect one end of the black jump leadC , to a suitable earth terminal, to a piece of

solid metal that is bolted to the crankcase orto the crankcase of the vehicle itself that sup-plies the power.● Connect the other end of the black jumplead C , in to the vehicle with the dischargedbattery, to a piece of solid metal that is bol-ted to the crankcase or to the crankcase itselfbut as far a possible from the battery A . Donot connect the black jump lead to the nega-tive pole – of the 12-volt battery. If it is con-nected, this may cause an erroneous evalua-tion of the state of the battery inside the elec-tronic system of the vehicle.● Position the leads in such a way that theycannot come into contact with any movingparts in the engine compartment.

Make sure the battery clamps have sufficientmetal-to-metal contact with the battery ter-minals.

Starting● Start the engine of the vehicle with theboosting battery and let it run at idling speed.● Connect the vehicle's drive system with thedischarged 12-volt battery.

Removing the jump leads● Before you remove the jump leads, switchoff the dipped beam headlights if they areswitched on.

● When the engine is running, disconnect theleads in reverse order to the details givenabove.

If the engine fails to start after about 10 sec-onds, switch off the starter and try again afterabout 1 minute.

WARNING● Please note the safety warnings referringto working in the engine compartment››› page 180.● The battery providing assistance musthave the same voltage as the flat battery(12V) and approximately the same capaci-ty (see imprint on battery). Failure to com-ply could result in an explosion.● If one of the batteries is frozen, do not at-tempt to start the engine with the jumpleads, as this may cause an explosion. Evenafter the battery has thawed, battery acidcould leak and cause chemical burns. If abattery freezes, it should be replaced.● Keep sparks, flames and lighted ciga-rettes away from batteries, danger of ex-plosion. Failure to comply could result in anexplosion.● Observe the instructions provided by themanufacturer of the jump leads.● Do not connect the negative cable fromthe other vehicle directly to the negativeterminal of the flat battery. The gas emit-ted from the battery could be ignited bysparks. Danger of explosion.

46

Self-help

● Never attach the negative cable to fuelsystem components or the brake lines inthe other vehicle.● The non-insulated parts of the batteryclamps must not be allowed to touch. Thecable that goes to the positive pole of thebattery should never come into contactwith electrically conductive parts of thevehicle, as this may cause a short circuit.● Do not lean on the batteries. This couldresult in chemical burns.

NoteThe vehicles must not touch each other,otherwise electricity could flow as soon asthe positive terminals are connected.

Tow start and towing

Introduction

It takes practice to tow a vehicle, especiallywhen using a tow cable. Both drivers shouldbe well informed of the special features oftowing. Inexperienced drivers should refrainfrom towing.

During towing, make sure at all times that noinadmissible traction forces or jolts are gener-ated. On roads without a firm surface there isalways the danger of overloading the attach-ment parts.

Take into account the legal provisions regard-ing tow starting and towing.

Tow startTow starting means starting a vehicle's en-gine while another puts it in motion by pullingit.

TowingTowing means a vehicle pulling another vehi-cle that is not in a condition to run.

The vehicle can be towed with a tow bar orcable. When the engine is stopped, the gear-box is not lubricated enough when driving athigh speeds and travelling long distances:

● The maximum towing speed allowed is 50km/h (30 mph).● The maximum towing distance allowed is50 km.

Tow cable and tow barIt is safer for the vehicle to be towed using atow bar, avoiding damage to the vehicle. Thetow cable should only be used if a tow bar isnot available.

A tow rope should be slightly elastic to avoiddamage to both vehicles. It is advisable touse a tow rope made of synthetic fibre or sim-ilarly elastic material.

Tow with a tow truckIf the vehicle must be lifted by an axle to towit, it can only be lifted using the front axle.SEAT recommends requesting that the vehi-cle be transported without the wheels touch-ing the road.

WARNINGDuring the towing of a vehicle, the drivingbehaviour and braking capacity changeconsiderably.

WARNINGNever allow the vehicle to be towed if it hasno power.● When towing, never remove the key fromthe ignition or disconnect the ignition withthe ignition and start button. Otherwise, themechanical locking of the steering column(steering lock) or the electronic blocking ofthe steering column could suddenly be-come blocked and it would be impossibleto steer the vehicle. This could cause anaccident, serious injury and loss of controlof the vehicle.● If the vehicle runs out of power duringtowing, stop the process immediately andseek the assistance of specialised person-nel. »

47

Emergencies

CAUTIONTowing the vehicle with a tow cable or atow bar can cause damage to the vehicle.● If the vehicle is towed with a tow cable ortow bar, special care must be taken.● If possible, have the vehicle towed with atow truck.

CAUTIONIf the vehicle is pushed by hand, the taillight units, the side spoilers of the rear win-dow and large sheet metal surfaces maybe damaged. In addition, the rear spoilercould be detached.● If the vehicle is pushed by hand, do notpress on the tail light units, the side spoilersof the rear window, large sheet metal surfa-ces or the rear spoiler.

CAUTIONRemoving and attaching the cover and thetowing eye may cause damage to the vehi-cle, for example, on the paintwork.● To avoid damaging the vehicle, removeand replace the cover and the towing eyecarefully.

Instructions for tow starting andtowing

During towing, the change of direction can besignalled on the towed vehicle even when thehazard warning lights are on. To do so, at thesame time, the turn signal lever must be oper-ated with ignition switched on. During thistime the hazard warning lights remain discon-nected. When the turn signal lever is returnedto the rest position, the hazard warning lightswill be automatically reactivated.

Do not two start or tow the vehicle in thefollowing casesIn the following situations, do not allow thevehicle to be towed:

● If the following message is shown on the in-strument panel display: The towing dam-ages the electrical system. Manual!● The power supply of the on-board 12-voltelectrical system cannot be guaranteed.● The 12-volt battery is discharged.● The indicator on the instrument panel dis-play is not working properly.● The selector lever cannot be set to positionN.● There is no guarantee that the wheels willturn smoothly or that the steering will workafter an accident.

If the vehicle cannot be towed on its wheelsfor any of the reasons mentioned above, re-quest assistance from specialised personneland, if necessary, order the transport of thevehicle without the wheels touching the road.If necessary, inform the people involved in thetowing process, especially the organisingcentre and the carrier, that it is an electric ve-hicle.

Tow start

The vehicle is not suitable for starting othervehicles by towing.

Due to technical reasons it is not possible tostart the vehicle by towing. Try connectingthe drive system with the jump start››› page 45.

Towing

Previous steps● Secure the tow cable or tow bar using onlythe attachment points provided for this pur-pose ››› page 47.● Make sure the tow cable is not twisted. Oth-erwise, the towing eye could become un-screwed during towing.● Switch on the ignition and the hazard warn-ing lights of both vehicles. If necessary, take

48

Self-help

into account other different provisions thatmay exist in this regard.● Take into account the instructions on towingprovided in the instruction manual of the oth-er vehicle.

Towing vehicle (front)The vehicle is not suitable for towing other ve-hicles.

Towed vehicle (behind)● Make sure the ignition is switched on so thatthe steering wheel does not lock and so that,if necessary, you can use the turn signals andthe windscreen wiper.● The electromechanical brake servo and thepower steering only work when the vehicle'sdrive system is connected. Otherwise you willhave to step on the brake pedal with muchmore force and you will also need morestrength to turn the steering wheel.● Release the handbrake.● Make sure the tow cable is always taut.● Set the selector lever to the N position.

In emergency situations, the vehicle can betowed or pushed on its own wheels, but onlyat pedestrian speed and for a maximum of100 m until the vehicle can be towed by atow truck ››› .

WARNINGIf, in spite of displaying the message Tow-ing damages the electrical system.Manual! on the instrument panel display,the vehicle is towed, vibrations can occur inthe traction system and the front wheelscan be locked, especially if the road is wetor has ice. When the front wheels arelocked, the steering properties may be im-paired and could result in an accident andserious injury.● If the message Towing damages theelectrical system. Manual! is displayedon the instrument panel display, only towthe vehicle in emergency situations.● If the message Towing damages theelectrical system. Manual! is displayedon the instrument panel display, only towthe vehicle at pedestrian speed and for amaximum of 100 m.

Front towline anchorage

Fig. 42 Right side of the front bumper: removethe lid.

Fig. 43 Right side of the front bumper: towlineanchorage screwed in.

The housing of the removable towline an-chorage is on the right side of the front bump-er underneath a cover ››› Fig. 42.

The towing eye should always be kept in thevehicle. »

49

Emergencies

Bear in mind the instructions for towing››› page 48.

Fitting the towline anchorage● Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit in the luggage compartment››› page 35.● Remove the cover by pressing down on thetop and leave it hanging from the vehicle››› Fig. 42.● Screw the towing eye in the housing byturning it to the maximum anticlock-wise ››› Fig. 43 ››› . Use a suitable objectthat can completely and securely tighten thetowing eye in its housing.● After towing, unscrew the towing eyeclockwise with a suitable object.● Replace the cover and press on its lowerpart until the tab snaps into the bumper.● Clean the towing eye if necessary and thenstore it in the luggage compartment alongwith the other vehicle tools.

CAUTIONThe towing eye must always be completelyand firmly tightened. Otherwise, it could bereleased while towing and tow-starting.

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses

Introduction

In general, a fuse can be assigned to variouselectrical components. Likewise, an electricalcomponent can be protected by severalfuses.

Only replace fuses when the cause of theproblem has been solved. If a newly insertedfuse blows after a short time, you must havethe electrical system checked by a special-ised workshop as soon as possible.

WARNINGThe high voltages in the electrical systemcan give serious electrical shocks, causingburns and even death!● Never touch the electrical wiring of theignition system.● Take care not to cause short circuits inthe electrical system.

WARNINGUsing unsuitable fuses, repairing fuses orbridging a current circuit without fuses cancause a fire and serious injury.● Never use a fuse with a higher value. Onlyreplace fuses with a fuse of the same am-

perage (same colour and markings) andsize.● Never replace a fuse by a metal strip, sta-ple or similar.

CAUTIONTo prevent damage to the vehicle's electricsystem, before replacing a fuse always turnoff the ignition, the lights and all electricalelements and remove the key from the igni-tion.

NoteIn the vehicle, there are more fuses thanthose indicated in this chapter.

50

Fuses and bulbs

Fuses inside the vehicle

Fig. 44 On the driver's side: lid of the instru-ment panel fuse box.

Fig. 45 Under the instrument panel on thedriver side: lid of the fuse box.

To open the instrument panel fuse box● Open the driver's door (front left).● Fit a flat object, i.e. a screwdriver, in thegroove ››› Fig. 44 and carefully lever and re-move the cover.

Opening and closing the fuse box locatedbelow the instrument panel● Open: Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 45 1until it is possible to open the cover. Fold thecover down.● Close: Fold the cover up in the opposite di-rection to the arrow until it clicks into the lock-ing lever 1 .

Identifying fuses below the instrumentpanel by colours

Colour Amp rating

Purple 3

Light brown 5

Brown 7.5

Red 10

Blue 15

Yellow 20

White or transparent 25

Green 30

Orange 40

CAUTION● Always carefully remove the fuse boxcovers and refit them correctly to avoidproblems with your vehicle.

● Protect the fuse boxes when open toavoid the entry of dust or humidity. Dirt andhumidity inside fuse boxes can cause dam-age to the electrical system.

Fuses in the engine compartment

Fig. 46 In the engine compartment: lid of thefuse box.

To open the engine compartment fuse box● Open the bonnet ››› page 180.● Press the locking tabs to unlock the fusebox cover ››› Fig. 46.● Then lift the cover out.● To fit the cover, place it on the fuse box.Push the locking tabs down until they clickaudibly into place.

51

Emergencies

Replace a blown fuse

Fig. 47 Image of a blown fuse.

Preparations● Switch off the ignition, lights and all electri-cal equipment.● Open the corresponding fuse box››› page 51, ››› page 51.

Recognise a blown fuseA blown fuse can be recognised if the metalstrip is melted ››› Fig. 47.

● Point a lamp at the fuse to see if it hasblown.

To replace a fuse● Remove the fuse.● Replace the blown fuse by one with anidentical amperage rating (same colour andmarkings) and identical size.

● Replace the cover again or close the fusebox lid.

Changing bulbs

Introduction

Changing bulbs requires a certain degree ofpractical skill. If you are unsure, SEAT recom-mends that you consult a technical service orrequest assistance from a specialist. In gen-eral a specialist is needed if, in addition to thebulbs, other vehicle components require re-moval.

If you choose to change the engine compart-ment lamps yourself, remember that it is adangerous area ››› .

Always use identical bulbs with the samedesignation. The name can be found on thebase of the bulb holder.

Additional bulb specificationsThe specifications of some headlamp bulbsand bulbs for the rear lamps fitted at the fac-tory may be different to those of conventionalbulbs. Bulb information is displayed on thebulb socket or on the bulb itself.

Bulbs (12 V)

Light source used for each function

Halogen headlights. Type

Daytime running light/sidelight W21/5W

Dipped beam headlights H4 LL

Main beam headlights H4 LL

Turn signal PY21W NA

Rear bulb light Type

Brake/side lights P21/5W LL

Side lights P21/5W LL

Turn signal PY21W NA LL

Retro fog light P21W

Reverse lights R10W

WARNING● Take particular care when working oncomponents in the engine compartment ifthe engine is warm. Risk of burns.● The bulbs H4, HB4 and H7 are pressurisedand might explode on changing them.● Only replace the bulbs concerned whenthey have cooled.● Bulbs are highly sensitive to pressure. Theglass can break when you touch the bulb,causing injury.

52

Fuses and bulbs

● When changing bulbs, please take carenot to injure yourself on sharp edges, inparticular on the headlight housing.● Never replace bulbs alone if you are notfamiliar with the operations necessary. Ifyou are not sure about procedures then vis-it a specialised workshop to carry out thenecessary work.● Never touch the bulb glass directly. Fin-gerprints will be evaporated by the heat ofthe operating bulb thus “fogging” up thereflector.

CAUTION● If, after replacing a bulb, the rubber coveris not correctly positioned in the headlighthousing, water or humidity can enter anddamage the electrical system.● Remove the ignition key before workingon the electric system. Otherwise, a shortcircuit could occur.● Switch off the lights and the parking lightbefore changing a bulb.● Take good care to avoid damaging anycomponents.

For the sake of the environmentPlease ask your specialist retailer how todispose of used bulbs in the proper manner.

Note● Please check at regular intervals that alllighting (especially the exterior lighting) onyour vehicle is functioning properly. This isnot only in the interest of your own safety,but also that of all other road users.● Before changing a bulb, make sure youhave the correct new bulb.

Replacing the headlight bulbs

Fig. 48 In the engine compartment: rear viewof the left headlight with rubber cover.

Fig. 49 Left headlight

Dipped and main beam headlightsDipped beam lights and daytime runninglightsTurn signal

There is no need to remove the headlight toreplace bulbs.

Dipped and main beam headlight A

● Open the bonnet .● Remove the H4 lamp connector and therubber cover from the tabs.● Press the safety step ››› Fig. 49 D down inthe direction of the arrow, unhook it to theside and move it away.● Remove the bulb from the holder. If neces-sary, press the lock on the bulb holder.● Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb. »

A

B

C

53

Emergencies

● Place the bulb, return it to its position andsecure the safety step ››› Fig. 49 D.

● Place the rubber cover and check that is inthe correct position. Insert the connector tothe bulb H4.

Dipped beam light and daytime runninglight B / Turn signal C

● Open the bonnet ● Turn the bulb holder in an anticlockwisedirection as far as it will go and remove it,along with the bulb, pulling backwards.● Remove the bulb from the holder. If neces-sary, press the lock on the bulb holder.● Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb.● Insert the bulb holder in the headlight andturn it clockwise as far as the stop.

NoteThe images show the left hand headlightfrom behind. The structure of the right handside headlight is symmetric.

Replacing the front bumper bulb

Fig. 50 Front right wheel arch: access to thebulb

Fig. 51 Changing the bulbs in the headlights

● Unscrew 2 securing bolts from the wheelarch trim ››› Fig. 50 (arrows) with the screw-driver in the vehicle tool kit ››› page 35.● Unscrew the expansive rivet in the lowerfront part of the wheel arch trim A with thescrewdriver from the vehicle tool kit and com-pletely remove it ››› page 35.● Carefully fold the wheel arch trim to theside.● Release the connector ››› Fig. 51 1 and re-move it.● Turn the bulb holder ››› Fig. 51 in the direc-tion of the arrow, anticlockwise as fas as itwill go and remove it together with the bulbby pulling it backwards.● Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb.● Insert the bulb holder in the headlight andturn it clockwise as far as the stop.● Plug the connector 1 into the bulb holder.The connector must audibly click into place.● Replace the wheel arch trim into its posi-tion.● Place the expansive rivet in the wheel archtrim and bumper and press it completely in-wards ››› Fig. 50 A .● Securely tighten the 2 securing bolts››› Fig. 50 (arrows) with a screwdriver.

54

Fuses and bulbs

Changing the tail light bulbs

Fig. 52 On the side of the luggage compart-ment: remove the tail light unit.

Fig. 53 Tail light unit: remove the bulb holder

Removing the rear light units● Open the rear lid.● Remove cover 1 by carefully levering it››› Fig. 52 .● Pull lock 3 on connector 2 in the directionof the arrow ››› Fig. 52 . Help yourself withthe screwdriver from the vehicle tool kit.● Press fastener 4 and remove connector 2››› Fig. 52 .● Unscrew wing nut 5 ››› Fig. 52 .● Remove the tail light from the bodywork bycarefully pulling backwards.

● Disassemble the tail light unit and place iton a flat, clean surface.

To change the bulb● Unlock the bulb holder on the locking flang-es (arrow) ››› Fig. 53 and remove the bulbholder from the tail light.● Replace the damaged bulb with a newidentical bulb ››› Fig. 53 .● Place the bulb holder in the tail light unit.The locking tabs (arrow) must be heard to en-gage ››› Fig. 53 .

Assembling the rear light units● Carefully insert the tail light unit into theopening in the bodywork.● Hold the tail light in the installation positionwith one hand and tighten the wing nut withthe other hand 5 ››› Fig. 52 .● Ensure that the tail light unit has been cor-rectly fitted and is firmly secured.● Insert connector 2 into the bulb holderand press lock 3 on the connector in the di-rection opposite to the arrow ››› Fig. 52 .● Insert the cover. The cover should lock intoplace.● Close the rear lid.

55

Emergencies

Changing the number plate bulbs

Fig. 54 In the rear bumper: remove the platelight.

Fig. 55 Number plate light: detach the bulbholder.

● Press the license plate light from left to rightwith one hand and remove it from the bumper››› Fig. 54.● Detach the number plate light carefullyfrom the bumper.

● Turn the bulb holder with the bulb anti-clockwise and remove it in the direction ofthe arrow ››› Fig. 55.● Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb.● Place the bulb holder in the number platelight and press it in the opposite directionfrom the arrow as far as it will go ››› Fig. 55.● Insert the number plate light carefully intothe left edge of the opening on the bumper.During this process, check that the assemblydirection of the number plate light is correct,i.e. the spring must be on the right.● Insert the number plate light into the bump-er until it audibly clicks into place.

Changing the side turn signal bulb

Fig. 56 Removing the side turn signal

Fig. 57 Side turn light: bulb change.

● With one hand move the side turn signalbackwards ››› Fig. 56 1 .● Remove the side turn signal from the chas-sis by leverage 2 .● Remove the bulb holder with the bulb in thedirection of the arrow ››› Fig. 57 1 .● Remove the bulb holder bulb in a straightdirection.● Replace the faulty bulb with a new identicalbulb.● Install the bulb holder.● Place the side turn signal on the chassis onthe side situated towards the rear of the vehi-cle until the spring clicks into the other side ofthe side turn signal.

56

Fuses and bulbs

Additional brake light

Taking into account that it consists of LEDbulbs, the change should be made at a tech-nical service centre.

57

Operation

Fig. 58 Instruments and controls.

58

Controls and displays

Operation

Controls and displays

Interior view

Overview

Door handle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76Switch for adjusting the exterior mir-rors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Air vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Lever for– Turn signals and main beam

headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82– Cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . 151Steering wheel with horn and driverairbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60Lever for:– Wipers and rear window wiper . . . . 86– Multi-function display control . . . . . 68Buttons for:– Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106– Rear window heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106– Left seat heating controls . . . . . . . . . 108Controls for the Climatronic . . . . . . . . . 105

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Radio (factory fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112Buttons for:– Turn the emergency lights on and

off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84– Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153– Right seat heating controls . . . . . . . 108Storage compartment with drinkholder in the centre console . . . . . . . . . 100Storage glove compartment . . . . . . . . 99Key switch for switching off the frontpassenger airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24front passenger front airbag . . . . . . . . 2312 volt socket or cigarette light-er* . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102automatic gearbox lever . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Handbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Controls for:– Selecting the driving profile . . . . . . . 149– Selecting charging mode . . . . . . . . . 165– Tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . . . . 195Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140PedalsSteering column adjustment lev-er . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13Open bonnet lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Central locking button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

Buttons for operating the front elec-tric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

27

59

Operation

Instruments and warn-ing/control lamps

Instrument panel display

Introduction

WARNINGAny distraction may lead to an accident,with the risk of injury.● Do not operate the instrument panel con-trols when driving.● To reduce the risk of accident and injury,only make adjustments to the instructionson the instrument panel display and to theinstructions on the Infotainment systemdisplay when the vehicle is stationary.

60

Instruments and warning/control lamps

Analogue instrument panel

Fig. 59 Front passenger airbag located in instru-ment panel.

Explanations about the instruments››› Fig. 59:

Speedometer. Depending on the vehiclein km/h or in mph.Power display ››› page 61Time set button ››› page 63Display indications ››› page 63.Charge level display: indicates the levelof charge of the high voltage battery››› page 168.Reset button for trip recorder (trip).

1

2

3

4

5

6

NoteDepending on the vehicle, other functionsof the multifunction display can be dis-played on the screen of a mobile phone.

Power display and available power

Fig. 60 In the instrument panel display: powerdisplay with zones for low consumption opera-tion A and for brake energy recuperation B. »

61

Operation

Fig. 61 On the instrument panel display: avail-able power. : Indication displayed complete-ly. : Indication moved down.

When the drive system is connected andwhile driving, information on the power usedand on the available power is displayed in theinstrument panel display.

Power displayWhen connecting the drive system beforestarting to move, the indicator changes from to ››› Fig. 60.

When the vehicle is moving, the power usedat that moment to move is indicated in the in-strument panel display (in % PWR x 10)››› Fig. 60.

When the indicator needle is in the bluezone, the vehicle is moving with a particu-larly low energy consumption.When the indicator needle is in the greenzone, the brake energy and kinetic energyare converted into electrical energy (en-ergy recuperation) by the electric drivesystem and stored in the high-voltagebattery.

Indication of available powerWhile driving, the current available power ofthe electric engine is displayed on the instru-ment panel display ››› Fig. 61 . When the in-strument panel display changes to anotherindication, the indication of the availablepower moves downwards ››› Fig. 61 .

When all segments are displayed, it meansthat the maximum power of the electric en-gine is available. Having high power availableis necessary for, i.e. accelerating the vehiclequickly to, for example, overtake safely.

If a lot of power is required for a long periodof time (it is mainly seen because the powerindicator needle is above the low consump-tion zone) ››› Fig. 60 A ), the time duringwhich the maximum power is available is re-duced. In the indication of the available pow-er, the segments of the E-Max zone turn offfrom right to left.

When all segments of the E-Max zone turn off,it means that the maximum power of the

A

B

electric engine is no longer available ››› . Ifthere is still a high demand, the power cur-rently available is reduced, which is indicatedby the shortening of the Normal zone bar,starting from the right. Based on the length ofthe bar, it is possible to know how much thedrive power has been reduced. If less poweris then used, the available power graduallyincreases once again.

Limited availability of power may be relatedto driving behaviour, i.e., accelerating the ve-hicle quickly. In general, the available poweris limited under the following conditions:

● The temperature of the high-voltage bat-tery is very low or very high.● The level of charge of the high-voltage bat-tery is low.

When the charge level of the high-voltagebattery approaches the reserve level, in addi-tion to the available power, the maximumspeed at which the vehicle can be driven isalso reduced. Charge the high voltage bat-tery as soon as possible ››› page 165.

WARNINGIf the vehicle is driven with a very low acharge level of the high-voltage battery,the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing seri-ous damage or accidents and injuries.● Always ensure that the charge level ofthe high-voltage battery is sufficient!

62


WARNINGWhen the maximum power reserve is notavailable or the level of charge of the highvoltage battery is low, the driving proper-ties may vary, i.e. the acceleration behav-iour of the vehicle.● Always adapt the speed and driving styleto the conditions of visibility, weather, roadand traffic, as well as the charge level ofthe high-voltage battery.

CAUTIONLeaving the vehicle parked for a long peri-od of time with the high-voltage batterydischarged may cause irreversible damageto the battery.● Always charge the high-voltage batteryimmediately.

Indications on the display

On the instrument panel display ››› Fig. 59 2different information may be displayed de-pending on the vehicle’s equipment:

● Doors, bonnet and rear lid open● Warning and information messages.● Current driving profile● Odometer.● Indication of available power ››› page 61

● Time.● Outside temperature.● Selector lever positions ››› page 145.● Multifunction display (MFI) ››› page 68● Service interval display ››› page 67.● Range indication● Seat belt status display for rear seats››› page 15.● Remaining charge time when charging thehigh-voltage battery

Doors, bonnet and rear lid openWhen the vehicle is unlocked and while driv-ing, the instrument panel display shows if anyof the doors, the bonnet or rear lid areopened and, in some cases, it is also indica-ted by an audible warning. The display mayvary according to the type of instrument pan-el fitted.

Warning and information messagesThe system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.The anomalies are displayed on the instru-ment panel display by means of warningsymbols which, depending on the case, mayalso be accompanied by an acoustic warn-ing. The display may vary according to thetype of instrument panel fitted.

Current driving profileYou can choose between three different driv-ing profiles. After changing the driving profile,the new selected profile is displayed on theinstrument panel display for a few seconds.

OdometerThe odometer registers the total distancetravelled by the car.

The odometer (trip) shows the distancetravelled since the last odometer reset. Thelast figure indicates 100 m.

● Briefly press the button to changefrom the trip odometer and the range indica-tion.● While viewing the trip odometer, press thebutton for longer to reset the trip od-ometer and, if necessary, other indications ofthe multifunction display ››› page 65. If youpress the button for more than 5 seconds, the“old” value of the trip odometer is reset.

Indication of available powerWhile driving, the current available power ofthe electric engine is displayed on the instru-ment panel display ››› page 61.

Time● Switch the ignition on.● To adjust the time, if necessary, change tothe indication of the same; to do this, press »

63

Operation

the rocker switch on the wiper lever or the ad-justment button on the instrument panel.● Pressed the button and hold pressedto mark the hour field. This will flash.● To move forward, press the button . Tomove quickly, keep it pressed.● Briefly press the button to change tothe minute field. This will flash.● To move forward, press the button . Tomove quickly, keep it pressed.● To finish setting the time, press the buttonagain .

Outside temperature indicatorWhen the outside temperature is below +4°C(+39°F), the “ice crystal” (risk of frost warn-ing) symbol is displayed in addition to saidtemperature. At first this symbol flashes andthen it remains lit until the outside tempera-ture rises above +6°C (+43°F) ››› .

When the vehicle is stopped, when the inde-pendent air conditioning is connected orwhen driving at very low speed, the indicatedoutside temperature may be higher than thereal one due to the heat emitted by the elec-tric drive system.

The temperatures measured range from-40°C to +50°C (-40°F to +122°F).

Selector lever positionsThe current position of the selector lever isdisplayed both next to the lever, using illumi-nated letters, and on the instrument paneldisplay.

Range indicationIt indicates the approximate distance in kmthat can still be travelled with the current ca-pacity of the battery charge if the same driv-ing style is maintained. The calculation ismade based on current energy consumption,among other factors.

● To change between the indication of therange and the trip odometer, briefly press theadjustment button located on the instrumentpanel.

Seat belt status display for the rear seats*The seat belt status display on the instrumentpanel display informs the driver, when the ig-nition is switched on, whether any passen-gers in the rear seats have fastened their seatbelts ››› page 15.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps are ignored, the vehi-cle may stall in traffic, or may cause acci-dents and severe injuries.● Never ignore the warning lamps.

● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● Park the vehicle away from traffic andensure that no highly flammable materialsare under the vehicle that could come intocontact with the exhaust system (e.g. drygrass, fuel).

WARNINGEven though outside temperatures areabove freezing, some roads and bridgesmay be icy.● At outside temperatures above +4°C(+39°F), even when the “ice crystal sym-bol” is not visible, there may still be patch-es of ice on the road.● The outside temperature sensor takes aguideline measurement.

CAUTIONFailure to heed the warning lamps whenthey appear may result in faults in the vehi-cle.

NoteWhen several warnings are active at thesame time, the symbols are shown

64


successively for a few seconds and willstay on until the fault is rectified.

Driving data indicator (multifunc-tion display)

The display of the travel data (multifunctiondisplay) shows different values about thejourney and the consumption.

Change from one display to another

● Press the rocker switch ››› Fig. 62 2 onthe wiper lever.

Driving data memoriesThe multifunction display has two automaticmemories:

Partial memory: The memory collectsjourney and consumption data fromwhen the ignition is turned on until whenit is turned off. The memory is automati-cally deleted if the journey is interruptedfor more than 2 hours. If the journey iscontinued in less than 2 hours after theignition is switched off, the new data isadded to the data already stored in thememory.Total memory: The memory records thevalues for a specific number of partialtrips, up to a total of 19 hours and 59 mi-

1

2

nutes, or 1,999.9 km (miles), dependingon the model of instrument panel. Onreaching either of these limits, the mem-ory is automatically erased and starts tocount from 0 again.

The selected memory will be shown in theupper right-hand corner of the display.

Changing memory● With the ignition switched on, and display-ing memory 1 or 2, briefly press button ››› Fig. 62 1 to change from one

memory to another

Manually erasing memory 1 or 2● Select the memory that you wish to erase.● Hold button pressed for about 2seconds.

Possible displays● Time: Current time in hours (h) and minutes(min).● Travelling time: This indicates the hours (h)and minutes (min) since the ignition wasswitched on.● Consumption: The current energy con-sumption is indicated. While driving, it is indi-cated in kilowatt-hours per 100 kilometres(kWh/100 km). When the vehicle is stoppedwith the drive system connected, the currentpower consumption is indicated in kilowatts.

● Average consumption: Indication of theaverage power consumption in kilowatt-hourper 100 kilometres (kWh/100 km). The indica-tion appears after travelling approximately100 meters. Until then, dashes appear. Theindicated value is updated every 5 secondsapprox.● Range: It indicates the approximate dis-tance in km that can still be travelled with thecurrent capacity of the battery charge if thesame driving style and consumption aremaintained. The calculation is made basedon current energy consumption, among otherfactors. Keep in mind that autonomy can varyvery considerably if, for example, the climatecontrol is switched on or off or if the drivingprofile is changed. In the calculation of theautonomy, the difference between the tem-perature of the passenger compartment andthe outside temperature when the climatecontrol is connected also influences. The fol-lowing applies to the forecast autonomy: Themore energy the convenience consumersuse, such as climate control and seat heating,the less energy will be available for the rest ofthe journey.● Power availability: While driving, the cur-rent available power of the electric engine isdisplayed on the instrument panel display››› page 61.● Distance: Distance in km travelled sincethe ignition was switched on. »

65

Operation

● Average speed: After switching on the igni-tion, the average speed starts to be dis-played after tavelling approximately 100 me-ters. Otherwise horizontal lines are displayed.The value shown is updated approximatelyevery 5 seconds.● Digital speed display: Current speed dis-played digitally.● Digital outside temperature display: Cur-rent outside temperature in digital format.● Speed warning at --- km/h: If the storedspeed is exceeded, between 30 km/h (18mph) and 250 km/h (155 mph), an acousticwarning is sounded and, if necessary, an op-tical warning also. Depending on the country,this warning also occurs when driving atspeeds above 120 km/h (75 mph). This warn-ing is mandatory by law and you are not al-lowed to change it.

Storing a speed for the speed warning● Select the display Speed warning at--- km/h.● Press the button on the wiper leverto memorise the current speed and deacti-vate the warning.● Adjust to the desired speed for 5 secondsusing the rocker switch on the wiper lever.Next, press the again or wait for a fewseconds. The speed is stored and the warn-ing activated.

● To deactivate, press . The storedspeed is deleted.

Warning and information messages(Vehicle status)

The system runs a check on certain compo-nents and functions when the ignition isswitched on and while the vehicle is moving.Faults displayed on the instrument panel asred and yellow warning symbols accompa-nied with messages and, depending on thecase, even an audible warning ››› page 69.The representation of the messages andsymbols may vary depending on the versionof the instrument panel.

Priority 1 warning (red)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Stopdriving! Danger! Check the fault and elimi-nate the cause. If necessary, seek professio-nal assistance.

Priority 2 warning (yellow)The symbol lights up or flashes (in part ac-companied by audible warnings). Operatingfaults or the lack of operating fluids cancause damage to the vehicle or a fault.Check the faulty function as soon as possible.If necessary, seek professional assistance.

Information messageIt provides information about processes in thevehicle.

Settings Menu

The actual number of menus available andthe names of their options depend on theelectronic system and the vehicle’s equip-ment.

Multifunction displayInformation and configuration options of themultifunction indicator ››› page 65 .

Vehicle statusCurrent warning and information messages.This menu option only appears when thereare messages of this type. The number of ex-isting messages is indicated on the display.

LanguageSetting the language of the texts on the dis-play.

Multifunction display dataSetting the data that must be displayed onthe multifunction display of the instrumentpanel display.

66


TimeHours and minutes of the instrument panelclock. The time can be displayed in 12 or 24hour format. If necessary, an S appears at thetop of the display to indicate that the summertime is set.

UnitsAdjusting the temperature, consumption anddistance units.

ServiceChecking service messages.

Factory settingsThe default factory setting of some functionsare reset in the Settings menu.

Service intervals

The inspection indication appears on the in-strument panel display ››› Fig. 59 2 .

The dates of the services (i.e. the next Inspec-tion Service or change of brake fluid) are de-tailed on the sticker on the door pillar or in theMaintenance Schedule.

The set service intervals have been specifiedwith the service dependent on time/dis-tance travelled.

Inspection reminderIf an inspection expires soon, an Inspectionreminder appears in the form of an abbrevia-tion and an indication in km appears whenthe ignition is switched on. The number of kil-ometres shown is the maximum number thatmay be driven until the next service.

Service dueAfter the service date, an audible warning isgiven when the ignition is switched on and theabbreviation will flash on the display for afew seconds.

Check the service dateWith the ignition switched on, the engine offand the vehicle stopped, the current servicecan be checked:

● Select the menu Settings.● Select the Information option from theService submenu. If the service has notbeen carried out when due, Service from--- km or --- days will appear on the in-strument panel display.

Restart the service interval displayIf the service has not been performed by aSEAT dealer, the indicator can be reset in theinstrument panel as described below:

● Switch the ignition off.

● Press the button on the instrumentpanel and keep it pressed.● Switch ignition back on.● Release the button and press it againbriefly before about 10 seconds haveelapsed.

Do not restart the indicator between theservice intervals, otherwise the informationdisplayed will be incorrect.

Note● The service message disappears after afew seconds, when the engine is started orwhen the button is pressed on thewiper lever.● If the 12-volt battery was disconnectedfor a long period of time, it will not be possi-ble to calculate the days remaining untilthe next service. Hence, the indicator mayshow incorrect calculations. In this case itwill be necessary to take into account themaximum maintenance intervals allowed››› page 197.

67

Operation

Operating the instrumentpanel

Introduction

With the ignition switched on it is possible toaccess different messages via the display onthe instrument panel display.

Some menu options can only be read whenthe vehicle is stationary.

The number of messages displayed on the in-strument panel display will vary according tothe vehicle electronics and equipment.

A specialised workshop will be able to pro-gramme or modify additional functions, ac-cording to the vehicle equipment. SEAT rec-ommends taking your car in for technicalservice.

Instrument panel menus■ Multifunction display ››› page 65■ Audio.■ Telephone.■ Vehicle status ››› page 66.■ Setup ››› page 66

Main menu● MFA: Information and setting options of themultifunction indicator ››› page 65

● Vehicle status: Current warning and infor-mation messages. This menu option only ap-pears when there are messages of this type.The number of existing messages is indicatedon the display. Example: 1/1 or 2/2››› page 63.● Settings: Different setting options, i.e. forthe time, language and units ››› page 66.

WARNINGDistracting the driver in any way can leadto an accident and cause injuries.● Never use the menus on the instrumentpanel display while the vehicle is in motion.

NoteAfter loading or changing the 12-volt bat-tery, check the system settings. If the pow-er supply is interrupted, the system settingsmight be incorrect or deleted.

Operation with the windscreen wip-er lever

Fig. 62 Windscreen wipers: buttons to accessthe instrument panel menus

As long as a priority 1 ››› page 66 warning isactive, it will not be possible to access anymenu. Some warnings can be confirmed andhidden with the button ››› Fig. 62 1 .

Select a menu or an informative display● Switch the ignition on.● If a message or a vehicle pictogram is dis-played, press the button 1 ; severaltimes if necessary.● To display the menus or to return to themenu selection from a menu or from an infor-mation displays, press and hold the rockerswitch 2 .● To change from one menu to another, pressthe upper or lower part of the rocker switch.

68


● To open the menu or the information dis-play that is displayed, press the button 1 or wait a few seconds until the

menu or information display opens automati-cally.

Changing menu settings● In the menu displayed, press the upper orlower part of the rocker switch 2 until the re-quired menu option is checked. The optionappears framed.● Press the button 1 to make the de-sired modifications. A mark indicates that thesystem or function is activated.

Back to menu selectionSelect Back on the corresponding menu toexit.

NoteIf when switching on the ignition warningsare shown about existing faults, it might notbe possible to change the settings or showthe information as described. In this case,go to a specialised workshop and request arepair.

Control lamps

Control and warning lamps

The control and warning lamps are indicatorsof warnings ››› , faults or certain functions.Some control and warning lamps come onwhen the ignition is switched on, and switchoff when the engine starts running, or whiledriving.

When certain control and warning lamps arelit, an audible warning is also heard.

Handbrake ››› page 155.

Fault in the brake system››› page 155.

Coolant of the drive system››› page 182.

Fault in the steering system››› page 149.

Driver or passenger has not fastenedseat belt ››› page 14.

Fault in the generator ››› page 187.

Failure in the electric drive system››› page 145.

Fault in ESC or disconnection causedby the system; OR ESC or ASR in oper-ation ››› page 157.

Fault in Traction Control* or discon-nection caused by the system; ORTraction Control* in operation››› page 157.

Fault in the ABS ››› page 157.

Rear fog light switched on››› page 80.

Fault in the engine management››› page 140.

The operation of the electromechani-cal steering is limited ››› page 149.

High-voltage battery charging; ORlevel of charge of the high-voltagebattery is low.

Fault in airbag system and seat belttensioners ››› page 22.

Failure in the electric drive system››› page 145.

Almost empty high-voltage battery››› page 165.

Tyre monitor system ››› page 195.

Lane Assist warning system in opera-tion ››› page 153.

Turn lights or emergency lights on››› page 80.

Cruise control ››› page 151.

Press the foot brake ››› page 145. »

69

Operation

Indication that the drive system is con-nected ››› page 141.

Lane assist warning (Lane Assist)››› page 153.

Main beam on or flasher on››› page 80.

Door(s), rear lid or bonnet open or notproperly closed ››› page 63.

Charging connector plugged in››› page 169.

A passenger in the rear seats has fas-tened their seat belt ››› page 14.

A passenger in the rear seats has notfastened their seat belt ››› page 14.

The outside temperature is below+4°C (+39°F) ››› page 63.

Service interval display ››› page 67.

WARNINGIf the warning lamps and messages are ig-nored, faults may occur in the vehicle, itmay stall in traffic, or accidents and seri-ous injuries may occur.● Never ignore warning lamps or text mes-sages.● Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possi-ble.● A faulty vehicle represents a risk of acci-dent for the driver and for other road users.

If necessary, switch on the hazard warninglamps and put out the warning triangle toadvise other drivers.● In any vehicle, the engine compartment isa hazardous area and could cause severeinjuries ››› page 180.

70

Opening and closing

Opening and closing

Set of vehicle keys

Vehicle key

Fig. 63 Assignment of buttons on the remotecontrol key.

Unlock the vehicleLock the vehicleUnlock only the rear lid. Press the buttonuntil all the turn signals on the vehicleflash briefly. You have 2 minutes to openthe rear lid. Once this time has passed, itwill lock again. In addition, the lamp onthe key flashes.Folding the key shaft in and out

With the vehicle key the vehicle may belocked or unlocked remotely ››› page 73.

1

2

3

4

The vehicle key includes an emitter and bat-tery. The receiver is in the interior of the vehi-cle. The range of the vehicle key with remotecontrol and new battery is several metresaround the vehicle.

If it is not possible to open or close the vehicleusing the remote control key, this should bere-synchronised ››› page 73 or the batterychanged ››› page 72.

Different keys belonging to the vehicle maybe used.

Control lamp on the vehicle keyWhen a button is pressed briefly on the vehi-cle key, the control lamp flashes ››› Fig. 63(arrow) once briefly, but if pressed for a longperiod of time, it will flash several times, forexample, in the convenience opening.

If the vehicle key control lamp does not lightup when the button is pressed, replace thekey's battery ››› page 72.

Spare keyTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key contains a microchip whichmust be coded with the data from the vehicleelectronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will notwork if it does not contain a microchip or themicrochip has not been encoded. This is also

true for keys which are specially cut for thevehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT Official Service, a spe-cialised workshop or an approved key servicequalified to create this kind of key.

New keys or spare keys must be synchronisedbefore use ››› page 73.

WARNING● Never leave children or disabled personsin the vehicle. In case of emergency, theymay not be able to leave the vehicle ormanage on their own.● An uncontrolled use of the key could startthe engine or activate any electric equip-ment (e.g. electric windows), causing riskof accident. The doors can be locked usingthe remote control key. This could becomean obstacle for assistance in an emergen-cy situation.● Never forget the keys inside the vehicle.An unauthorised use of your vehicle couldresult in injury, damage or theft. Thereforealways take the key with you when youleave the vehicle.● Never remove the key from the ignition ifthe vehicle is in motion. Otherwise, thesteering could suddenly block and it wouldbe impossible to steer the vehicle. »

71

Operation

CAUTIONAll of the vehicle keys contain electroniccomponents. Protect them from damage,impacts and humidity.

Note● Only use the key button when you requirethe corresponding function. Pushing thebutton unnecessarily could accidentallyunlock the vehicle or trigger the alarm. It isalso possible even when you are outsidethe radius of action.● Key operation can be greatly influencedby overlapping radio signals close to thevehicle working in the same range of fre-quencies, for example, radio transmitters ormobile telephones.● Obstacles between the remote controland the vehicle, bad weather conditionsand discharged batteries can considerablyreduce the range of the remote control.● If the buttons of the vehicle key arepressed or one of the central locking but-tons ››› page 75 is pressed repeatedly inshort succession, the central locking brief-ly disconnects as protection against over-loading. The vehicle is then unlocked. Lockit if necessary.● Spare remote control keys are availableat your Technical Service, where they mustbe matched to the locking system.● Up to five remote control keys can beused.

Mechanical key of the vehicle

Fig. 64 Vehicle mechanical key

The set of vehicle keys may include a me-chanical key ››› Fig. 64.

Duplicate keysTo obtain a spare key and other vehicle keys,the vehicle chassis number is required.

Each new key must contain a microchip andbe coded with the data from the vehicle elec-tronic immobiliser. A vehicle key will not workif it does not contain a microchip or the mi-crochip has not been encoded. This is alsotrue for keys cut for the vehicle.

The vehicle keys or new spare keys can beobtained from a SEAT dealership, a special-ised workshop or an approved locksmithqualified to create them.

Changing the battery

Fig. 65 Vehicle key: opening the battery com-partment.

Fig. 66 Vehicle key: removing the battery.

SEAT recommends you ask a specialisedworkshop to replace the battery.

The battery is located to the rear of the vehi-cle key, under a cover.

72

Opening and closing

Changing the battery● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 71.● Remove the lid on the back of the vehiclekey ››› Fig. 65 in the direction of the arrow››› .● Remove the battery from the compartmentwith a suitable fine object ››› Fig. 66.● Insert the new battery as shown ››› Fig. 66and press it in the battery compartment in theopposite direction to the arrow ››› .● Place the lid as shown ››› Fig. 65 and pressit into the housing of the vehicle key in the op-posite direction to the arrow until it engages.

CAUTION● If the battery is not changed correctly,the vehicle key may be damaged.● Use of unsuitable batteries may damagethe vehicle key. For this reason, always re-place the dead battery with another of thesame voltage, size and specifications.● When fitting the battery, check that thepolarity is correct.

For the sake of the environmentThe batteries used by the remote control ofthe ignition key of your vehicle may containperchlorate. This may involve special han-dling instructions. Take into account the le-gal provisions regarding the handling anddisposal of these batteries. We recommend

ordering this service from a SEAT dealer ora specialised company.

Synchronise the vehicle key

If the button is pressed frequently outsideof the vehicle range, it is possible that the ve-hicle can no longer be locked or unlocked us-ing the key. In this case, the key must be re-synchronised as described below:

● Unfold the vehicle key blade ››› page 71.● Press the button on the vehicle key. Forthis, it must remain with the vehicle.● Open the vehicle within one minute usingthe key shaft.● Turn on the ignition using the vehicle key.The key has been synchronised.

Central locking

Introduction

Central locking functions correctly when allthe doors and the rear lid are correctly shut. Ifthe driver door is open, the vehicle cannot belocked with the key.

The battery of an unlocked vehicle parked fora long period (e.g. in a private garage) mayrun down and fail to start the motor.

WARNINGThe incorrect use of the central lockingsystem may cause serious injuries.● The central locking system will lock alldoors. A vehicle locked from the inside canprevent any non-authorised individual fromopening the doors and accessing the vehi-cle. Nevertheless, in case of emergency oraccident, locked doors will complicate ac-cess to the vehicle interior to help the pas-sengers.● Never leave children or disabled peoplealone in the vehicle. The central lockingbutton can be used to lock all the doorsfrom within. Therefore, passengers will belocked inside the vehicle. Individuals lockedin the vehicle can be exposed to very highor very low temperatures.● Depending on the time of the year, tem-peratures inside a locked and closed vehi-cle can be extremely high or extremely lowresulting in serious injuries and illness oreven death, particularly for young children.● Never leave individuals locked in a closedand locked vehicle. In case of emergency,they may not be able to exit the vehicle bythemselves or get help.

73

Operation

Description

Central locking allows all doors, the rear lidand the tank flap to be centrally locked andunlocked:

● From outside, using the vehicle key››› page 74.● From inside, by pushing the central lockingbutton ››› page 75.

The central locking system can be activatedor deactivated at a specialised workshop.

In case of a vehicle key fault or central lock-ing system fault, all doors can be locked orunlocked manually.

Self-locking system to prevent involuntaryunlockingIt is an anti-theft system and prevents the un-intentional unlocking of the vehicle. If the ve-hicle is unlocked and none of the doors (in-cluding the boot) are opened within 30 sec-onds, it re-locks automatically.

Turn signalsThe turn signals will flash twice when the ve-hicle is unlocked and once when the vehicleis locked.

If it does not flash, this indicates that one ofthe doors, the rear lid or the bonnet is notclosed correctly.

Accidental lock-outThe central locking system prevents you frombeing locked out of the vehicle in the follow-ing situations:

● If the driver door is open, the vehicle cannotbe locked with the central locking switch››› page 75.

Lock the vehicle with the remote control key,when all the doors and the rear lid have beenclosed. This prevents the accidental lockingof the vehicle.

Note● Never leave any valuable items in the ve-hicle unattended. Even a locked vehicle isnot a safe.● If the LED on the driver door sill lights upfor about 30 seconds when the vehicle islocked, the central locking system is notworking properly. You should have the faultrepaired at a SEAT Official Service or spe-cialised workshop.

Unlock and lock from the outside

Fig. 67 Remote control key: keys.

Fig. 68 Driver-side door handle with lock cyl-inder.

Unlock and lock using the remote control● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 67 button.● Locking the vehicle without the “Safe” se-curity system: push the button again andhold for 2 seconds.● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 67 button.

74

Opening and closing

● Unlocking the rear lid: hold down the button for at least 1 second.

Attention: depending on the central lockingfunction set by a specialised workshop, to un-lock all the doors and the rear lid it will benecessary to press the button twice.

Unlock and lock in the driver's door lockcylinder● Lock the doors and rear lid: insert the keyinto the lock cylinder and turn it clockwise.● Unlock the doors and rear lid: insert the keyinto the lock cylinder and turn it anticlock-wise.

The vehicle will be locked again automatical-ly if you do not open one of the doors or therear lid within 30 seconds after unlocking thecar. This function prevents the vehicle fromremaining unlocked if the unlocking button ispressed by mistake. This does not apply if youpress the button for at least one second.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Safe“security system”* on page 76.

NoteDo not use the remote control key until thevehicle is visible.

Unlocking and locking from the in-side

Fig. 69 At the driver's door: central lockingbuttons.

● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 69 button.● Unlock: press the ››› Fig. 69 button.

Please note the following when using thecentral locking switch to lock your vehicle:

● The “Safe” security system will not activate● It is not possible to open the doors or therear lid from the outside (for safety reasons,e.g. when stopped at traffic lights).● You can open the doors individually fromthe inside by pulling the inside door handle. Ifnecessary, pull the door release lever twice.● In the event of an accident in which the air-bags inflate, doors locked from the inside willbe automatically unlocked to facilitate ac-cess and assistance.

WARNING● The central locking switch also workswith the ignition switched off, except whenthe “safe” system is activated.● The central locking switch does not oper-ate if the vehicle is locked from the outsideand the security system is switched on.● Locked doors could delay assistance inan emergency. Do not leave anyone, espe-cially children, in the vehicle.

Safe “security system”*

When the vehicle is locked, the “Safe” securi-ty system puts the door handles out of opera-tion and makes it difficult for unauthorizedpeople to enter. The doors cannot be openedfrom inside ››› .

Depending on the vehicle, when switching theignition off, a warning may be displayed onthe instrument panel display stating that the“Safe” security system is activated.

Lock the vehicle and activate the “Safe”security system.● Press the locking button once on the ve-hicle key. »

75

Operation

Lock the vehicle without activating the“Safe” system.● Press the locking button on the vehiclekey twice.

When the “Safe” security system is disa-bled, the following needs to be taken intoaccount:● The vehicle can be opened and unlockedfrom the inside using an inside door handle.

“Safe” statusOn the driver door, there is warning lamp visi-ble from outside the vehicle through the win-dow which shows the “Safe” system status.

We will know that “Safe” system is activatedby the flashing warning lamp.

● “Safe” activated: the warning lamp flashesfor about 2 seconds at short intervals; then,more slowly.● “Safe” deactivated: the warning lampflashes for about 2 seconds and stops. After30 seconds, the LED flashes again.● Locking system fault: the lamp flashes forabout 2 seconds at short intervals. Subse-quently, the light will remain switched on forabout 30 seconds.

WARNINGDo not leave anyone (especially children)in the vehicle if it is locked from the outside

and the “Safe” security system* is activa-ted, as the doors and windows cannot thenbe opened from the inside. Locked doorscould delay assistance in an emergency.

Doors

Introduction

The doors and rear lid can be locked man-ually and partially opened, for example if thekey or the central locking is damaged.

WARNINGIf a door is not correctly closed, it couldopen unexpectedly when driving and causeserious injuries.● Always stop immediately and close thedoor.● When closing, ensure that the door hasclosed correctly. A closed door should beflush with the corresponding parts of thebodywork.● Open and close doors only when nobodyis in the way of the door.

WARNINGA door held open by its retainer could beblown closed by the wind or close if the ve-hicle is on a hill, causing injury.

● When opening and closing doors, alwaysuse the door handle.

Locking the front passenger doormanually

Fig. 70 On the front part of the passengerdoor: emergency locking, hidden behind a rub-ber gasket.

Fig. 71 Emergency locking of the vehicle usingthe vehicle key

76

Opening and closing

The passenger door can be manually locked.

● Open the door.● Remove the rubber cap to the front of thedoor. The seal is marked with a lock ››› Fig. 70.● Unfold the key shaft if necessary››› page 71.● Insert the blade horizontally into the open-ing and move the coloured lever forward››› Fig. 71.● Replace the rubber cap and close the door.● Check if the door is locked.● Have the vehicle checked by a specialisedworkshop.

NoteThe doors can be opened and unlocked in-dividually from the inside by pulling thedoor handle. To open, pull the inner doorrelease lever twice ››› page 73.

Child-proof lock

Fig. 72 Childproof lock on the left hand sidedoor.

The childproof lock prevents the rear doorsfrom being opened from the inside. This sys-tem prevents minors from opening a door ac-cidentally while the vehicle is running.

This function is independent of the vehicleelectronic opening and locking systems. Itonly affects rear doors. It can only be activa-ted and deactivated manually, as describedbelow:

Activating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door in

which you wish to activate the childprooflock.

– With the door open, turn the slot with thevehicle key clockwise for the left doors››› Fig. 72 and anticlockwise for the rightdoors.

Deactivating the childproof lock– Unlock the vehicle and open the door

whose childproof lock you want to deacti-vate.

– With the door open, turn the slot with thevehicle key anticlockwise for the left doors››› Fig. 72 and clockwise for the right doors.

Once the childproof lock is activated, thedoor can only be opened from the outside.

Rear lid

Introduction

WARNINGCareless and unsuitable locking, openingand closing of the rear lid can cause acci-dents and serious injury.● The rear lid must not be opened when thereverse or rear fog lights are lit. This maydamage the tail lights.● Do not close the rear lid by pushing itdown with your hand on the rear window.The glass could smash. Risk of injury!● Ensure the rear lid is locked after closingit. If not, it may open unexpectedly whiledriving.● Closing the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear could cause serious »

77

Operation

injury to you and to third parties. Make surethat no one is in the path of the rear lid.● Never drive with the rear lid open or half-closed, exhaust gases may penetrate intothe interior of the vehicle. Danger of poi-soning!● Never leave the vehicle unattended or al-low children to play inside or next to it, es-pecially if the rear lid is open. Childrencould enter the luggage compartment,close the rear lid and become trapped. Alocked vehicle can reach extremely highand low temperatures, depending on thetime of year, thus causing serious injuries,illness or even death.

CAUTIONBefore opening or closing the rear lid, makesure that there is enough space to open orclose it, e.g. when pulling a trailer or in agarage.

Note● Before closing the rear lid, make sure thatthe key has not been left inside the luggagecompartment.● At outside temperatures of less than 0°C(+32°F), the pressurised gas struts cannotalways automatically lift the rear lid. In thiscase, open the rear lid manually.

Open the rear lid

Fig. 73 On the vehicle key: button to unlockand open the boot hatch.

If bicycles are attached to a rack on the boothatch, for example, in some cases, it may notopen automatically ››› in Introduction onpage 77.

Opening with central locking● Press the button on the vehicle key››› Fig. 73 for about a second to unlock therear lid.● OR: Press the button on the vehicle keyuntil the rear lid opens automatically severalcentimetres.● Open the rear lid using the handle.

Opening with the key without remote con-trol● Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinderof the driver door and turn the key in an anti-clockwise direction ››› page 73.● Open the rear lid using the handle.

Closing the rear lid

Fig. 74 Rear lid open: space for pulling.

Closing the rear lid● Grip the cavity of the inner lining of the rearlid ››› Fig. 74 (arrow).● Push the rear lid downwards until it locks in-to place in the lock.● Ensure that it is correctly closed by pullingon it firmly.

78

Opening and closing

Locking the rear lid with central locking*If you unlock the vehicle without opening anydoors or the rear lid, it will lock again auto-matically after about 30 seconds. This func-tion prevents the vehicle from remaining un-locked if the unlocking button is pressed bymistake.

Locking is only possible when the rear lid iscorrectly and fully closed.

● The rear lid is also locked by a central lock-ing.● If the vehicle rear lid is locked or unlockedusing the button of the vehicle key, when itis closed again it will lock automatically.● A closed but not locked rear lid will lock au-tomatically at a speed above about 9 km/h(6 mph).

Locking the rear lid with the vehicle me-chanical keyLocking is only possible when the rear lid iscorrectly and fully closed.

● Insert the vehicle key into the lock cylinderof the driver door and turn the key in a clock-wise direction ››› page 73.

Emergency unlocking of the rear lid

Fig. 75 From the trunk: emergency unlockingof the rear lid.

● If necessary, fold the rear seat bench back-rest forward ››› page 93.● Remove equipment to access the inside ofthe rear lid.● Unfold the key shaft ››› page 71.● Insert the key blade into the opening of therear lid ››› Fig. 75 and press the unlocking lev-er in the direction of the arrow to unlock therear lid.

Window controls

Electrically opening and closingthe windows

Fig. 76 Detail of the driver door: controls forthe windows.

● Opening the window: press the button .● Closing the window: pull the button .

Buttons on the driver doorWindow on the front left doorWindow on the front right door

Always close the windows fully if you park thevehicle or leave it unattended ››› .

WARNINGIncorrect use of the electric windows canresult in injury. »

1

2

79

Operation

● Never close the rear lid without observingand ensuring it is clear, to do otherwisecould cause serious injury to you and thirdparties. Make sure that no one is in the pathof a window.● If the ignition is switched on, the electricequipment could be activated with risk ofinjury, for example, in the electric windows.● The doors can be locked using the re-mote control key. This could become anobstacle for assistance in an emergencysituation.● Therefore always take the key with youwhen you leave the vehicle.● The electric windows will work until theignition has been switched off and one ofthe front doors has been opened.● If necessary, use the safety switch to dis-able the rear electric windows. Make surethat they have been disabled.● For safety reasons, you should only usethe remote control open and close func-tions within about 2 metres of the vehicle.To avoid injuries, always keep an eye on thewindows when pressing the button to closethem. The windows stop moving as soon asthe button is released.

Side opening rear windows

Fig. 77 Lever to open and close the rear win-dow

Opening● Pull the unlocking lever in the direction ofarrow A and press it out, until the lever en-gages.

Closing● Pull the unlocking lever in the direction ofarrow B and press the lever in until it engag-es.

Lights

Vehicle lighting

Control lamps

It lights up

Rear fog light switched on ››› page 82.

It lights up

Left or right turn signal.The control lamp flashes twice as fast when a turnsignal is faulty.

Hazard warning lights on ››› page 84.

It lights up

Main beam on or flasher on ››› page 82.


WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Con-trol and warning lamps on page 70.

80

Lights

Light switch

Fig. 78 Instrument panel: light panel.

● Turn the switch to the desired position››› Fig. 78.

Sym-bol

Ignition switch-ed off

Ignition isswitched on

Fog lights, dippedbeam and sidelights off.

Light off or day-time driving lighton.

The “Cominghome” and “Leavinghome” guide lightsmay be switchedon.

Automatic controlof dipped beamand daytime run-ning light.

Side light on.

Dipped beam head-light off

Dipped beamswitched on.

The driver is personally responsible for thecorrect use and adjustment of the lights in allsituations.

Automatic dipped beam control *The automatic dipped beam control is merelyintended as an aid and is not able to recog-nise all driving situations.

When the light switch is in position , thevehicle lights and the instrument panel andswitch lighting switch on automatically in thefollowing situations ››› :

● The photo sensor detects darkness, for ex-ample, when driving through a tunnel. Theyswitch off when adequate lighting is detec-ted.● The rain sensor detects rain and activatesthe wipers. They switch off when the wipershave not been activated for a few minutes.

Daytime running lightsThe daytime driving light consists of individu-al lights in the front headlamps.

The daytime running lights consist of LEDs. Ifan LED light fails, go to an authorised work-shop for its replacement.

When the daytime driving light is switched on,only the individual lights come on ››› .

The daytime running lights turn on every timethe ignition is switched on, if the switch is in

position or , according to the level of ex-terior lighting.

When the light switch is in position , a lightsensor automatically switches dipped beamon and off (including the control and instru-ment lighting) or the daytime running lightsdepending on the level of exterior lighting.

Audible warnings to advise the driver thatthe lights have not been switched offIf the key is not in the ignition and the driverdoor is open, an audible warning signal isheard in the following cases: this will remindyou to turn the light off.

● When the parking light is on ››› page 82.● When the light switch is in position or .

WARNINGIf the road is not well lit and other roadusers cannot see the vehicle well enoughor at all, accidents may occur.● The automatic dipped beam control( ) only switches on the dipped beamwhen there are changes in light conditionsbut not, for example, when it is foggy.

WARNINGThe side lights or daytime running lightsare not bright enough to illuminate the roadahead and to ensure that other road usersare able to see you. »

81

Operation

● Always use your dipped beam headlights if it is raining or if visibility is poor.● Never drive with daytime lights if the roadis not well lit due to weather or lightingconditions.● On vehicles with rear lights with bulbs,when activating the daytime running lightthe rear lights are not switched on. A vehi-cle which does not have the rear lights onmay not be visible to other drivers in thedarkness, in the case of heavy rain or inconditions of poor visibility.

WARNINGIf the headlights are set too high and notused correctly, there is a risk of dazzling ordistracting other road users. This could re-sult in a serious accident.● Always make sure that the headlights arecorrectly adjusted.

Note● The legal requirements regarding the useof vehicle lights in each country must beobserved.● The dipped beam headlights will onlywork with the ignition on. The side lightscome on automatically when the ignition isturned off.

Fog lights

Fig. 79 Instrument console: light panel.

The warning lamps or also show, on thelight switch or instrument panel, when thefront fog lights are on.

● Turning on the front fog lights* : pull thelight switch out to its first click position››› Fig. 79 1 , from positions , or .● Turning on the rear fog light : pull thelight switch fully out 2 from position , or. This control has only one position in ve-hicles without fog lights.● To switch off the fog lights, press the lightswitch or turn it to position .

NoteThe rear fog light can dazzle drivers behindyou. You should use the rear fog light onlywhen visibility is very poor.

Turn signal lever and main beamheadlight

Fig. 80 Turn signal and main beam lever.

More the lever to the required position:

Right turn light or right-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Left turn light or left-hand parking light(ignition switched off).Main beam on: control lamp lit up onthe instrument panel.Light flash: on with the lever pushed. Con-trol lamp lit up.

Push the lever all the way down to turn off thecorresponding function.

1

2

3

4

82

Lights

Convenience turn signalsWhen the ignition is switched on, move thelever as far as possible upwards or down-wards and release the lever. The turn signalwill flash three times.

The convenience indicators can be deactiva-ted at a Specialised workshop.

Parking light on both sides● Switch the ignition off.● Place the light switch in position .● Lock the vehicle from the outside.

In doing so, only the side lights of both head-lights light up, and additionally the tail lightswill do so partially.

WARNINGImproper or lack of use of the turn signals,or forgetting to deactivate them can con-fuse other road users. This could result in aserious accident.● Always give warning when you are goingto change lane, overtake or when turning,activating the turn signal in good time.● As soon as you have finished changinglane, overtaking or turning, switch the turnsignal off.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the headlights may causeaccidents and serious injury, as the mainbeam may distract or dazzle other drivers.

Note● If the convenience turn signals are oper-ating (three flashes) and the other conven-ience turn signals are switched on, the ac-tive part stops flashing and only flashesonce in the new part selected.● The turn signal only works when the igni-tion is switched on. The hazard warninglights also work when the ignition is switch-ed off.● The main beam headlights can only beswitched on if the dipped beam headlightsare already on.● In cold or damp weather conditions, theheadlights, tail lights and turn signals maymist up inside temporarily. This is normaland in no way effects the useful life of thevehicle lighting system.

Function “Coming home” and“Leaving home”

The “Coming home” and “Leaving home”function lights up the vehicle’s immediateproximity when getting into and out of it in thedark. When switched on, the front position

and dipped beam lights, tail lights and li-cense plate light come on.

The “Leaving Home” is controlled by a photo-sensor.

In the vehicle settings menu of the infotain-ment system you can adjust the duration ofthe light switch-off delay, and activate anddeactivate the function.

Activating the “Coming Home” function● Switch the ignition off.● Activate the headlight flashers for approxi-mately 1 second.

When the driver door is opened, the “ComingHome” lighting comes on. The delay inswitching off the headlights is counted fromwhen the last door or boot hatch is closed.

The “Coming Home” lighting turns off inthe following cases:● Automatically, once the headlight turn offdelay has elapsed.● Automatically, when a vehicle door or therear lid is still open 30 seconds after startingthe engine.● When the rotary light switch is turned to po-sition ››› page 81.● With the ignition is switched on. »

83

Operation

Activating the “Leaving Home” function● Unlock the vehicle using the remote control.● The “Leaving Home” function is only activa-ted when the light switch is in position and the light sensor detects darkness.

The “Leaving Home” lighting switches offin the following cases:● Automatically, when the “Leaving Home”delay period ends (default 30 sec).● When the vehicle is locked using the remotecontrol.● When the light switch is turned to position .● With the ignition is switched on.

NoteTo activate the “Coming Home” and “Leav-ing Home” function, the rotary light switchmust be in position and the light sensormust detect darkness.

Hazard warning lights

Fig. 81 Dashboard: switch for hazard warninglights.

The hazard warning lights are used to drawthe attention of other road users to your vehi-cle in emergencies.

If your vehicle breaks down:

1. Park your vehicle at a safe distance frommoving traffic.

2. Press the button to switch on the hazardwarning lights ››› .

3. Switch the ignition off.

4. Apply the handbrake.

5. Move the selector lever to position P.

6. Use the warning triangle to draw the at-tention of other road users to your vehicle.

7. Always take the vehicle key with you whenyou leave the vehicle.

All turn signals flash simultaneously when thehazard warning lights are switched on. Thetwo turn signal turn signal lamps and theturn signal lamp in the switch will flash atthe same time. The simultaneous hazardwarning lights also work when the ignition isswitched off.

WARNINGThe risk of an accident increases if your ve-hicle breaks down. Always use the hazardwarning lights and a warning triangle todraw the attention of other road users toyour stationary vehicle.

Note● The battery will run down if the hazardwarning lights are left on for a long time,even if the ignition is switched off.● The use of the hazard warning lights de-scribed here is subject to the relevant stat-utory requirements.

84

Lights

Headlight range control

Fig. 82 Next to the steering wheel: regulatorheadlight range control.

The headlight range control ››› Fig. 82adapts according to the value of the lightbeam of the headlight to the level of load ofthe vehicle. This offers the driver optimum vis-ibility and the headlights do not dazzle on-coming drivers ››› .

The headlights can only be adjusted whenthe dipped beam is switched on.

To adjust, turn the control ››› Fig. 82:

Value Vehicle load statusa)

Two front occupants, luggage compart-ment empty

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment empty

Value Vehicle load statusa)

All seats occupied, luggage compart-ment full.

Driver only, luggage compartment full

a) If the vehicle load does not correspond to thoseshown in the table, it is possible to select intermediarypositions.

WARNINGHeavy objects in the vehicle may meanthat the headlights dazzle and distract oth-er drivers. This could result in a serious ac-cident.● Adjust the light beam to the vehicle loadstatus so that it does not blind other driv-ers.

Driving abroad

In those countries where vehicles drive on theother side of the road to the home country,the asymmetric dipped beam may dazzledrivers of oncoming vehicles.

For this reason, stickers may be needed tocover the headlights when driving abroad.For further information, please refer to a spe-cialised workshop. SEAT recommends visitinga technical service.

NoteThe use of stickers to cover headlights isonly permitted over a short period. To mod-ify the direction of the headlamps morepermanently, please take the vehicle to aspecialised workshop. SEAT recommendstaking your car in for technical service.

Interior lights

Lighting of the instrument panel,displays and switches

When the side lights or dipped beam head-lights are switched on, the lighting for instru-ments and controls lights up at a constantbrightness.

85

Operation

Interior and reading lights

Fig. 83 Detail of headliner: front interior light-ing.

Knob Function

Switching off the reading light.

Turning the interior lights on or off.

Door contact connection.The interior lights come on automati-cally when you unlock the vehicle,open a door or remove the key fromthe ignition.The light goes out a few seconds afterclosing all the doors, when locking thevehicle or connecting the ignition.

/ Turning the reading light on and off

Luggage compartment lightingThe light is activated when the rear lid isopen, even when the ignition and lights are

turned off. For this reason, ensure that therear lid is always closed.

NoteIf not all the vehicle doors are closed, theinterior lights will be switched off after ap-prox. 10 minutes, providing the ignition keyhas been removed and the courtesy lightposition selected. This prevents the batteryfrom discharging.

Visibility

Wipers and rear window wip-er system

Window washer lever

Fig. 84 Operating the windscreen wiper andrear wiper.


0 Windscreen wipers off.

1

Wiper intervals.Use control ››› Fig. 84 A to set the in-terval (vehicles without rain sensor), orthe sensitivity of the rain sensor››› page 88.

2 Slow wipe.

3 Continuous wipe.

86

Visibility


4 Short wipe. Brief press, short clean.Hold the lever down for more time to in-crease the wipe frequency.

5

Windscreen washer. The windscreenwasher function is activated by push-ing the lever towards the steeringwheel, and the wipers operate simulta-neously.

6 Interval wipe for rear window. The wip-er will wipe the window approximatelyevery six seconds.

7 The rear window wash function is acti-vated by pressing the lever, and therear wiper starts simultaneously.

WARNINGIn cold conditions you should not use thewash/wipe system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the heatingand ventilation system. The windscreenwasher fluid could otherwise freeze on thewindscreen and obscure your view of theroad.

CAUTIONIf the ignition is switched off with the wind-screen wipers active, they complete theirwipe before returning to the rest position.When switching the ignition back on, thewindscreen wiper will continue to operateat the same wiping level. Ice, snow and oth-

er obstacles on the windscreen may dam-age the wiper and the windscreen wipermotor.● If necessary, remove snow and ice fromthe windscreen wipers before starting yourjourney.● Carefully lift the frozen windscreen wip-ers from the glass. SEAT recommends a de-icer spray for this operation.● Do not switch on the windscreen wipers ifthe windscreen is dry. Cleaning with thewindscreen wipers while dry can causedamage.● In icy conditions, always check that thewiper blades are not frozen to the glass be-fore using the wipers. In cold weather, itmay help to leave the vehicle parked withthe wipers in service position ››› page 44.

Note● The windscreen and window wipers onlyfunction when the ignition is switched onand the bonnet or rear lid, respectively, areclosed.● The interval wipe speed varies accordingto the vehicle speed. The faster the vehicleis moving, the more often the windscreen iscleaned.● The rear wiper is automatically switchedon when the windscreen wiper is on and thecar is in reverse gear.

Wiper functions

Windscreen wipers performance in differ-ent situations● If the vehicle is stopped, the activated posi-tion temporarily moves to the previous posi-tion.● When wiping at intervals, the intervals varyaccording to the speed. The higher the vehi-cle speed the shorter the intervals.

NoteThe wiper will try to wipe away any obsta-cles that are on the windscreen. The wiperwill stop moving if the obstacle blocks itspath. Remove the obstacle and switch thewiper back on again.

87

Operation

Rain sensor*

Fig. 85 Windscreen wipers lever: adjust therain sensor A .

Fig. 86 Rain sensor sensitive surface

The rain sensor controls the frequency of thewindscreen wiper intervals, depending on theamount of rain ››› . The sensitivity of the rainsensor can be adjusted manually. Manualwipe ››› page 86.

Press the lever to the desired position››› Fig. 85:

Rain sensor off.Rain sensor on; automatic wipe if neces-sary.Setting sensitivity level of rain sensor– Set control to the right: high sensitivity.– Set control to the left: low sensitivity.

When the ignition is switched off and thenback on, the rain sensor stays on and startsoperating again when the windscreen wipersare in position 1 and the vehicle is travellingat more than 16 km/h (10 mph).

Modified behaviour of the rain sensorThe possible causes of anomalies and erro-neous interpretations in the sensitive surfacearea ››› Fig. 86 of the rain sensor are, amongothers:

● Damaged wipers: a film of water on thedamaged blades may lengthen the activa-tion time, reduce the washing intervals or re-sult in a fast and continuous wipe.● Insects: insects on the sensor may triggerthe windscreen wiper.● Salt on the road: in winter, salt spread onthe roads may cause an extra long wipewhen the windscreen is almost dry.

0

1

A

● Dirt: dry dust, wax, coating on glass (Lotuseffect) or traces of detergent (car wash) mayreduce the effectiveness of the rain sensor ormake it react more slowly, later or not at all.● Windscreen crack: the impact of a stonewill trigger a single wipe cycle with the rainsensor on. Next the rain sensor detects the re-duction in the sensitive surface area andadapts accordingly. The behaviour of thesensor will vary with the size of the damagecaused by the stone.

WARNINGThe rain sensor may not detect enough rainto switch on the wipers.● If necessary, switch on the wipers man-ually when water on the windscreen ob-structs visibility.

Note● Regularly clean the sensitive surface ofthe rain sensor and check for possibledamage to the blades ››› Fig. 86 (arrow).● To remove wax and coatings, we recom-mend a window cleaner containing alco-hol.● Do not put stickers on the windscreen infront of the rain sensor*. This may causesensor disruption or faults.

88

Visibility

Mirrors

Interior rear view mirror

Fig. 87 Manual anti-dazzle function for rear vi-sion mirror

Manual anti-dazzle function for interiorrear vision mirror● Basic position: point the lever at the bottomof the mirror forwards.● To darken the mirror, pull the lever back››› Fig. 87.

Adjust the exterior rear view mir-rors

Fig. 88 On the front doors: button to adjust themechanical exterior rear vision mirror

Fig. 89 At the driver's door: control to adjustthe electric exterior rear view mirrors.

The exterior rear view mirrors are adjusted bymoving the adjustment control ››› Fig. 88 orthe rotary control* ››› Fig. 89.

By moving the control to the desired po-sition, adjust the rear view mirrors on theleft side (L) and on the right side (R) inthe desired direction.Depending on the equipment fitted onthe vehicle, the mirrors may be heatedaccording to the outside temperature.

Manually folding the exterior mirrorsFolding in the exterior mirrors and returningthem to their original position is possiblethrough a mechanical system. Carefully foldthe exterior rear vision mirror casing towardsthe side window or pull it away from the win-dow until it clicks into place.

WARNINGConvex or wide-angle* exterior mirrorsgive a larger field of vision. However, theymake objects look smaller and furtheraway than they really are. If you use thesemirrors to estimate the distance to vehiclesbehind you when changing lane, you couldmisjudge the distance. Risk of accident!

WARNINGFold and unfold the exterior mirror, takingcare to avoid injuries.● Only fold or unfold the exterior mirrorwhen there is no-one in the way of the mir-ror. »

L/R

89

Operation

● When moving the mirror, take care not totrap fingers between the mirror and themirror bracket.

CAUTIONBefore washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash, please make sure to retract theexterior mirrors to prevent them from beingdamaged.

NoteIf the electrical adjustment should fail tooperate, both of the mirrors can be adjus-ted by hand by lightly pressing the edge ofthe mirror glass.

Sun protection

Sun blinds

Fig. 90 Sun visor on the driver side.

Options for adjusting driver and front pas-senger sun visors● Lower the sun visor towards the wind-screen.● The sun visor can be pulled out of itsmounting and turned towards the door.● Swing the sun visor towards the door, longi-tudinally backwards.

Vanity mirror*There may be a vanity mirror in the folded sunvisor on the passenger side and a cardholderin the driver sun visor.

WARNINGFolded sun blinds can reduce visibility.● Always store sun blinds and visors in theirhousing when not in use.

Insulated glass windscreen

Fig. 91 Windscreen with reflective infrared andmetal coating and small window (red surface)

The heat-insulating windscreens include a re-flective infrared coating. For the operation ofelectronic components of the accessoriesshop, on the upper part of the interior rearview mirror there is an uncoated surface(communication window) ››› Fig. 91.

CAUTIONWhen the uncoated surface is covered orhas a sticker on the interior or exterior, mal-functions in the electronic components

90

Seats and head restraints

may occur. Never cover the uncoated sur-face on the interior or exterior.


Adjusting seats

Manual adjustment of the frontseats

Fig. 92 Front seats: manual seat adjustment.

Forwards/backwards: pull the lever andmove the seat. The seat must engagewhen the lever is released!Raise/lower: pull the lever up or pushdown (several times if necessary) from itshome position.Reclining the backrest: press the leverand adjust the backrest inclination at thesame time. The seat backrest must be en-gaged.

1

2

3

WARNINGIncorrect seat adjustment may lead to ac-cidents and severe injuries.● Only adjust the seats when the vehicle isstationary, as the seats could move unex-pectedly while the vehicle is in motion andyou could lose control of the vehicle. Fur-thermore, an incorrect position is adoptedwhen adjusting the seat.● Adjust the height, position and inclinationof the front seats only when their move-ment area is empty.● Make sure there are no objects in thatarea.● Make sure that the movement and lock-ing areas of the seats are clean.

Headrest

Introduction

The possibilities for the adjustment and disas-sembly of the headrests are described below.Always make sure that the seats are correctlyadjusted ››› page 11.

All seats are equipped with a head restraint.

Correct adjustment of head restraintAdjust the head restraint so that its upperedge is at the same level as the top of your »

91

Operation

head and under no circumstances below eyelevel. Keep the back of your head always asclose to the head restraint as possible.

Adjusting the head restraint for short peo-pleLower the head restraint completely, even ifyour head is below its upper edge. In the low-est position, there may be a small distancebetween the head restraint and the backrest.

Adjusting the head restraint for tall peoplePush the head restraint up as far as it will go.

WARNINGIf travelling with the head restraints re-moved or improperly adjusted, the risk ofsevere or fatal injuries in the event of acci-dents and sudden braking or manoeuvresincreases.● Always travel with the head restraint cor-rectly installed and adjusted.● To decrease the risk of cervical injuries inthe event of an accident, adjust the headrestraint correctly based on your height,always making sure that its upper edge isat the same height as the top of the head,but never below eye level. Keep the back ofyour head always as close to the head re-straint as possible and centred.● Never adjust the head restraint while thevehicle is in motion.

● Under no circumstances should the rearpassengers travel while the head restraintsare in the non-use position.

CAUTIONWhen assembling and disassembling thehead restraints, do not let them meet thetop lining of the vehicle, the back rest of thefront seat or other parts of the vehicles. Ifnot, this could damage the vehicle.

Adjust the headrests

Fig. 93 Rear headrest: adjusting the headrest.

Adjusting the height of the head restraints● Move the headrest up or down in the direc-tion of the corresponding arrow. Press button››› Fig. 93 1 to lower them ››› in Introduc-tion on page 92.

● The head restraint must lock correctly inone position.

Removing and fitting the headrests

Removing the rear head restraintsTo remove the head restraint, the corre-sponding backrest must be partially foldedforward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 93.● Move the head restraint upwards until it ar-rives to the top.● Press button ››› Fig. 93 1 and fully removethe headrest.● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 93.

Fitting the rear head restraintsTo mount the external head restraints, thecorresponding backrest must be partially fol-ded forward.

● Unlock the backrest ››› page 93.● Insert the head restraint bars into theguides until they perceptibly engage. Itshould not be possible to remove the headrestraint from the backrest.

92


● Move the backrest until it engages properly››› in Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest on page 93.

WARNINGRemove the rear headrests only when it isnecessary to fit a child seat. After removinga child seat, refit the headrest immediately.

Seat functions

Folding down and raising the rearseat backrest

Fig. 94 Back seat: unlock button A ; red mark-ing B

The rear seat backrest can be folded forwardto extend the luggage compartment.

Folding the rear seat backrest forwards● Push the head restraint down as far as it willgo or remove it if necessary ››› page 11 andstore it in a safe place.● Pull the unlock switch ››› Fig. 94 A for-wards whilst simultaneously lifting the rearseat backrest.● The rear seat backrest is not engagedwhen the red marking of the button B is visi-ble.● If the rear seat backrest is folded, people(including children) are not permitted to trav-el in the rear folded seats.

Folding up the rear seat backrest● Lift back the backrest of the rear seat andpush it firmly into the lock until it clicks se-curely into place ››› .● The red marking on the unlock button Bmust not be seen.● Make sure that the backrest of the rear seatis securely locked in position so that the seatbelts can provide proper protection in therear seats.● If necessary, reinstall and readjust the headrestraints ››› page 92.

WARNINGFolding and lifting the backrests of the rearseats carelessly without paying attentioncould cause serious injury.

● Never fold or lift the seats while driving.● Do no trap or damage seat belts whenraising the seat backrest.● Keep hands, fingers, feet and other limbsaway from the range of the rear seatbackrests when folding and lifting them.● All seat backrests must engage correctlyfor the seat belts on the rear seats to workproperly. When the backrest of an occu-pied seat is not correctly locked in place,the passenger can be thrust forward withthe rear seat backrest in case of suddenbraking, sudden manoeuvres or an acci-dent.● A red signal on the button B warns thatthe backrest is not engaged. Always checkto make sure that the red mark is not visiblewhen the backrest of the rear seat is in theupright position.● No seat must be occupied if the backrestof the rear seat is folded or not correctlyengaged.

CAUTIONBefore folding the rear seat backrest, ad-just the front seats so that neither the headrestraint or backrest hit them when folded.If necessary, remove the head restraints››› page 92 and store them safely.

93

Operation

Transport and practicalequipment

Transporting objects

Positioning the luggage and cargo

It is possible to transport cargo and luggagein the vehicle and on the roof ››› page 97.When doing so, please consider all legal pro-visions.

Placing luggage inside the vehicle safely● Distribute the load in the vehicle as evenlyas possible.● Always place equipment and heavy ob-jects in the boot ››› .● Position heavy items in the boot as far for-ward as possible.● Take into account the maximum authorisedweight per axle, as well as the maximum au-thorised weight of the vehicle ››› page 214.● Secure the objects to the fastening rings ofthe boot using appropriate chains or belts››› page 96.● Also place small objects safely.● Adapt tyre pressure to the load. Take intoaccount the pressure sticker of the tyres››› page 191.

● In vehicles equipped with tyre control sys-tem, adjust to the new load status if necessa-ry ››› page 195.

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident. Partic-ularly if the airbag hits them when deploy-ing and they are thrown across the inside ofthe vehicle. Please observe the followingrules to minimise the risk of injury:● Place all objects inside the vehicle safe-ly.● Secure all objects, little and large.● Place the objects in the cabin in such away that they can never reach the airbagdeployment areas while the vehicle is inmotion.● Keep the storage compartments closedat all times while the vehicle is in motion.● Place the objects in such a way that theynever force any occupant of the vehicle tosit in an incorrect position.● When transporting objects that take up aseat, never let anyone use that seat.● Never leave hard, sharp or heavy objectsloose in open storage compartment of thevehicle, on the cover behind the rear seator on the instrument panel.● Remove all hard, sharp or heavy objectsfrom the fabrics and bags inside the cabinand store them safely.

WARNINGThe transport of heavy object changes ve-hicle handling and increases braking dis-tance. Heavy objects that are not properlyplaced or secured may cause loss of con-trol of the vehicle and thus severe injuries.● Never put too much load in the vehicle.Both the carrying capacity as well as thedistribution of the load in the vehicle haveeffects on the driving behaviour and brak-ing ability.● When transporting heavy objects, thedriving behaviour of the vehicle varies dueto the displacement of the centre of gravi-ty.● Always distribute the load in the vehicleas evenly and horizontally as possible.● Always place heavy objects in the bootbefore the rear axle and as far away from itas possible.● Objects in the luggage compartmentthat are unsecured could move suddenlyand modify the handling of the vehicle.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.● Accelerate with particular care and cau-tion.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Brake earlier than usual.

94

Transport and practical equipment

WARNING● Never leave your vehicle unattended, es-pecially when the rear lid is open. Childrencould climb into the luggage compartment,closing the door behind them; they will betrapped and run the risk of death.● Close and lock all the doors and the rearlid when you leave the vehicle. Before youlock the vehicle, make sure that there areno adults or children in the vehicle.

CAUTIONElectrical wires or, depending on the fea-tures, the antenna embedded into the rearwindows could be damaged, even irrepara-bly, if they are in contact with objects.

NoteStraps for securing the load to the fasten-ing rings are commercially available fromaccessory shops.

Luggage compartment

Luggage compartment shelf

Fig. 95 In the boot: removing and installing theshelf.

Removing● Detach the cord loops ››› Fig. 95 B fromtheir hooks A .● Unclip the shelf from the side supports Cby pulling it up and removing the shelf.

Fitting● Insert the shelf horizontally to make the“horseshoe” coincide with the axis of sup-ports C and press down until it engages.● Attach the securing straps B onto the rearlid.

WARNINGAnimals, loose or unsecured or objects car-ried on the rear shelf can cause serious in-jury in case of sudden manoeuvring orbraking or in case of an accident.● Do not leave hard, sharp or heavy ob-jects or in bags on the rear shelf.● Never transport animals on the rear shelf.

CAUTION● Before closing the rear lid, ensure thatthe rear shelf is correctly fitted.● An overloaded luggage compartmentcould mean that the rear shelf is not cor-rectly seated and it may be bent or dam-aged.● If the luggage compartment is overloa-ded, remove the tray.

NoteEnsure that, when placing items of clothingon the luggage compartment cover, rearvisibility is not reduced.

95

Operation

Adjustable luggage compartmentfloor

Fig. 96 Variable luggage compartment floor: Raise the adjustable floor; adjustablefloor raised.

Fig. 97 Variable luggage compartment floor: Enlarge the luggage compartment down-wards; enlarge the luggage compartmentforward.

Raise and lower the luggage compart-ment floor● To raise the floor, lift the lever ››› Fig. 96

1 in the direction of the arrow and pull onthe floor fully upwards ››› Fig. 96 .● To lower it, guide the floor downward.

Extend the luggage compartment down-ward● Lift the luggage compartment floor andpush it down on the guide ››› Fig. 97 (ar-rows).

● Place the variable floor over the floor lining.● If necessary, fold the backrest of the rearseat forward ››› page 93.

Extending the luggage compartment for-ward● Disassemble the luggage compartmenttray ››› page 95.● Disassemble the rear headrests››› page 92.● Fold the backrest of the rear seat forward››› page 93.● If necessary, place the luggage compart-ment floor at a lower position ››› Fig. 97 .

The luggage compartment is enlarged for-ward ››› Fig. 97 .

CAUTIONDo not let the luggage compartment floorfall when closing it. Always carefully guideit downward in a controlled manner. Other-wise, the lining and the floor of the luggagecompartment could be damaged.

Fastening rings*

There are fastening rings on the front andrear of the boot to secure loose objects andluggage with fastening belts and cords.

96


WARNINGIf unsuitable or damaged belts or retainingstraps are used, they could break in theevent of braking or an accident. Objectscould then be launched across the passen-ger compartment and cause serious or fa-tal injuries.● Always use belts or straps that are suita-ble and in good condition.● Tighten the belts and straps in a crosslayout over the load placed on the bootfloor and secure them to the fastening ringssafely.● Never exceed the maximum tensile loadof the fastening rings when securing ob-jects.● Make sure that, particularly for flat ob-jects, the upper edge of the load is higherthan the fastening rings.● Depending on the features, take into ac-count the instruction panels on the boot onhow to place the load.● Never secure a child seat to the fasteningrings.

Note● The maximum tensile load that the fas-tening rings can support is approx. 3.5 kN.● Belts, straps and securing systems for theappropriate load can be obtained fromspecialised dealerships. SEAT recom-mends visiting a SEAT dealership for this.

Hooks for bags

Fig. 98 In the boot: retaining hooks.

There may be hooks in the upper left andright part of the luggage compartment.

WARNINGNever use these hooks to secure objects. Incase of sudden braking or an accident,they could rupture.

CAUTIONThe hooks can support a maximum of 2.5 kgeach.

Roof carrier*

Introduction

The vehicle roof has been designed to opti-mise aerodynamics. For this reason, crossbars or conventional roof carrier systemscannot be secured to the roof water drains.

As the roof water drains are integrated in theroof to reduce air resistance, only SEAT-ap-proved cross bars and roof carrier systemscan be used.

Cases in which cross bars and the roofcarrier system should be disassembled.● When they are not used.● When the vehicle is washed in a car wash.● When the vehicle height exceeds the maxi-mum height, for example, in some garages.

WARNING● Always secure the load properly usingbelts or retaining straps that are suitableand in a good condition.● Bulky, heavy, long or flat loads have anegative effect on aerodynamics, the cen-tre of gravity and driving performance.● Avoid sudden braking and manoeuvres.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions. »

97

Operation

CAUTION● Remove the cross bars and the roof carri-er system before entering a car wash.● Vehicle height is increased by the instal-lation of cross bars or a roof carrier systemand the load secured on them. For this pur-pose, check that your vehicle's height doesnot surpass the headspace limit, for exam-ple, for underpasses or for entering garagedoors.● Any cross bars, roof carrier systems orloads secured to them must not interferewith the roof aerial or block the path of therear lid.● On opening the rear lid make sure that itdoes not knock into the roof load.

For the sake of the environmentWhen crossbars and a roof carrier systemare installed, the increased air resistancemeans that the vehicle uses more energy.

Securing the crossbars and theroof carrier system

Fig. 99 Attachment points for the roof railingsfor the roof carrier system.

The crossbars are the basis of a series ofspecial roof carrier systems. For safety rea-sons, special fixtures must be used to safelytransport luggage, bicycles, skis, surf boardsor boats on the roof. Suitable accessoriescan be acquired at SEAT dealerships.

Always secure the crossbars and the roofcarrier system properly. Always take the as-sembly instructions that come with the cross-bars and the roof carrier system in questioninto account.

The holes or marks indicating the fittingpoints for base supports are in the lower halfof the roof struts and can only be seen withthe door open ››› Fig. 99.

WARNINGIncorrect attachment and use of the cross-bars and the roof carrier system may causethe whole system to detach from the roofand cause an accident and injuries.● Always take the manufacturer assemblyinstructions into account.● Check threaded joints and attachmentstravelling and if necessary tighten them af-ter you have travelled a short distance.When making long trips, check the threa-ded joints whenever you stop for a rest.● Do not modify or repair the crossbars orroof carrier system.

NoteAlways read the assembly instructions thatcome with the crossbars and the roof carri-er system carefully and keep them in thevehicle.

Loading the roof carrier system

The load can only be secured if the crossbarsand the roof carrier system are properly in-stalled ››› .

Maximum authorised cargo on the roofThe maximum permissible roof load is 50 kg.This figure comes from the combined weight

98


of the roof carrier, the cross bars and the loaditself on the roof ››› .

Always check the weight of the roof carriersystem, the cross bars and the weight of theload to be transported and weigh them ifnecessary. Never exceed the maximum au-thorised roof load.

If you are using cross bars and a roof carrierwith a lower weight rating, you will not beable to carry the maximum authorised roofload. In this case, do not exceed the maxi-mum weight limit for the roof carrier which islisted in the fitting instructions.

Distributing a loadDistribute loads uniformly and secure themcorrectly ››› .

Check attachmentsOnce the cross bars and roof carrier systemhave been installed, check the bolted con-nections and attachments after a short jour-ney and subsequently with a certain frequen-cy.

WARNING● Never exceed the maximum authorisedload on the roof and on the axles or the ve-hicle's maximum authorised weight.● Never exceed the load capacity of thecross bars and the roof carrier system,

even if the maximum authorised roof loadhas not been reached.● Secure heavy items as far forward aspossible and distribute the vehicle loaduniformly.

WARNINGIf the load is loose or not secured, it couldfall from the roof carrier system or causeaccidents and injuries.● Always use belts or retaining straps thatare suitable and in a good condition.

Object holder

Introduction

Use the storage compartments only for smallor light items.

WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell could diffi-cult the use of the pedals. This may causeloss of control of the vehicle and increasesthe risk of severe injuries.● Make sure that nothing prevents you fromusing the pedals at any time.● Always secure the mat in the footwell.● Never place other mats or other type ofcovers on the factory-fitted mat.

● Ensure that no objects can fall into thedriver's footwell while the vehicle is in mo-tion.● When the vehicle is stationary, removethe objects in the footwell.

WARNINGIf you leave lighters inside the vehicle, theymight be damaged or lit inadvertently. Thiscould lead to severe burns and damage tothe vehicle.● Before moving a seat, make sure thereare no lighters in the moving part area ofthe vehicle.● Before closing a storage compartment,make sure there are no lighters in the clos-ing area.● Never leave a lighter inside a storagecompartment or any other surface of thevehicle as it could ignite due to the hightemperatures on such surfaces, particular-ly during the summer.

CAUTION● Do not store heat- or cold-sensitive ob-jects, food or medicines in the cabin. Heatand cold could damage them or renderthem useless.● Objects made from transparent materi-als left inside the vehicle, such as glasses,magnifying glasses or transparent suction »

99

Operation

pads stuck to the windows can concentratesunlight and damage the vehicle.

Glove compartment

Fig. 100 On the passenger side: glove com-partment open

Glasses caseSupport for a notepadPen holderCoin holder

Opening and closing the glove compart-ment● Opening: Pull on the handle and open theglove compartment.● Closing: Press the glove compartment up-wards.

1

2

3

4

WARNINGIf the glove compartment is left open, therisk of causing severe injuries in the eventof an accident, sudden braking or manoeu-vring increases.● Always keep the glove compartmentclosed while the vehicle is in motion.

Bag support*

Fig. 101 Storage on front passenger side: fold-ing hook.

On the glove compartment lever there is afolding hook ››› Fig. 101 for hanging smallpieces of luggage, such as bags, etc.

CAUTION● The maximum weight for the hook is 1.5kg.

● With the hook folded forward, this auto-matically folds away when opening theglove compartment.● We recommend you remove any piecesof luggage hanging from the hook beforeopening the glove compartment cover.

Compartment in front centre con-sole

Fig. 102 In the front part of the centre console:storage compartment.

The object holder ››› Fig. 102 can be used tostore drinks ››› page 102, or for the ashtray*,or for storing small objects.

NoteA 12 volt electrical socket ››› page 102 canbe found in the storage compartment.

100


Other object holders

Fig. 103 The centre pillars contain garmenthooks.

You will find more object holders, compart-ments and supports in other parts of the vehi-cle:

● Hooks for clothing on the centre pillars››› Fig. 103 (arrow).● On the trims of the front doors.● Rear shelf for light items of clothing*.● Bag hook in the luggage compartment››› page 97.

Drink holder

Introduction

Bottle holderThe storage compartments of the driver andpassenger doors contain a bottle holder.

WARNINGIncorrect use of the bottle holders maycause injuries.● Never put hot drinks in the drink holders.In the event of sudden braking or an acci-dent while driving, hot beverages in thebottle holders might spill and cause burns.● Ensure that no bottles or other objectsare dropped in the driver footwell whiledriving, as they could get under the pedalsand obstruct their working.● Never place glasses, food or other heavyobjects drink holders. These heavy objectsmay be thrown across the cabin in theevent of an accident and cause serious in-juries.

WARNINGClosed bottles may explode inside the ve-hicle due to cold or heat.● Never leave closed bottles in the vehicleif the temperature inside is very high or verylow.

CAUTIONDo not leave open cans in the drink holderswhen the vehicle is in motion. If the drink isspilled (e.g. due to sudden braking) it maydamage the vehicle and its electrical sys-tem.

NoteThe inside elements of the drink holderscan be extracted for cleaning.

101

Operation

Drinks holder of the centre console

Fig. 104 In the front part of the centre console:drink holder.

Fig. 105 In the rear part of the centre console:

There are drink holders in the front and rearparts of the centre console.

Securing the drink container in the frontdrink holderFold the drink holder ››› Fig. 104 forward.

Place the drink container in the drink holderso that it is securely surrounded.

Power socket

Power socket and USB connection*

Fig. 106 Front centre console: 12-volt poweroutlet on the storage compartment and USB in-terface.

Electrical equipment can be connected tothe socket in the vehicle.

All connected appliances should be in per-fect working order without any faults.

Maximum power consumption

Power socket Maximum power con-sumption

12 Volts 120 Watts

The maximum capacity of the socket mustnot be exceeded. The power consumption isindicated on the rating plate of each appli-ance.

Where 2 or more appliances are connectedat the same time, the total rating of all theconnected devices must never exceed 190Watts ››› .

12 volt power socketThe 12 volt socket is found in the storagecompartment at the front of the centre con-sole ››› Fig. 106 and only works when the ig-nition is switched on.

With the ignition switched on, the drive sys-tem stopped and the electrical appliancesswitched on, the vehicle's 12-volt battery isdischarged. Therefore, electrical devicesconnected to the socket should only be usedwhen the drive system is operating.

To prevent voltage fluctuations from causingdamage, turn off the electrical device con-nected to the 12-volt socket before connect-ing and disconnecting the ignition, as well asbefore starting the drive system.

WARNINGImproper use of the socket or electrical de-vices could lead to a fire and cause seriousinjuries.● Never leave children unsupervised in thevehicle. The socket and equipment

102


connected to it can be used when the igni-tion is switched on.● Should a connected electrical deviceoverheat, switch it off and unplug it imme-diately.

CAUTION● Take into account the operating instruc-tions of the devices to be connected!● Never exceed the maximum power ratingas this could damage the vehicle's generalelectrical system.● To avoid damaging the vehicle’s electri-cal system, never connect accessoriessupplying power such as solar panels orbattery chargers for charging the 12-voltbattery to the 12-volt power socket.● Only use accessories with approvedelectromagnetic compatibility accordingto current regulations.● To avoid damage due to voltage fluctua-tions, switch off all devices connected tothe 12 V power sockets before switching theignition on or off and before starting thedrive system.● Never connect an appliance to the 12 voltpower socket that consumes more than thepower indicated in watts. Exceeding themaximum power absorption could damagethe vehicle's electrical system.

Note● Unshielded equipment can cause inter-ference on the radio equipment and the ve-hicle's electrical system.● Interference can occur on the radio's AMwaveband if electrical appliances are usednear the aerial.

Smartphone support

Portable smartphone support

Fig. 107 Assembling the universal support andthe holding arm.

Fig. 108 On the centre console: close thecompartment where the infotainment system ishoused.

Removing the smartphone● Grip the smartphone firmly with one hand.● Press the unlock button ››› Fig. 108 5 untilthe upper arm of the universal support is re-leased.● Remove the smart phone and, as the casemay be, unplug any cables.

Inserting a smart phone● If necessary, install the smartphone hous-ing ››› .● Connect the smartphone.● Place the smartphone on the bottommountings. To adjust the lower fittings, pressthe button ››› Fig. 108 4 »

103

Operation

● Press the top arm of the universal holderuntil the smartphone is securely held in place.

Disassembling the housing● If necessary, remove the smartphone.● Hold the universal support ››› Fig. 107 3and press the unlock button ››› Fig. 107 4 .● Push the universal holder to the right (anti-clockwise) and remove it.● Hold the support arm ››› Fig. 108 1 andpress the unlock button ››› Fig. 108 4 in thedirection of the arrow.● Remove the holder from the instrumentpanel upwards.

Install the housing● Insert the universal support ››› Fig. 107 3 inthe fasteners 2 of the support arm 1 .● Move the universal holder to the side in thelocking direction 4 until it engages audi-bly ››› .● Place the support arm ››› Fig. 108 1 on theretaining plate ››› Fig. 108 3 from above andpress it down until you hear that it has engag-ed ››› .

WARNINGIf a smartphone is not secured or is incor-rectly secured in the vehicle, it could beflung though the interior during a suddendriving or braking manoeuvre or in the

event of an accident, and could cause inju-ries.● The infotainment system holder must beproperly secured in the corresponding gapin the instrument panel.● The infotainment system must always beproperly secured in its holder or storedsafely in the vehicle.

CAUTIONIf tilt and angle of visibility are not properlyadjusted the smart phone could be dam-aged.● When adjusting the smartphone, move itwith care and never beyond its limits.

CAUTIONAt very high or very low temperatures thesmartphone might not operate properly, orthe actual device could get damaged.● Take your smart phone with you whenyou get out of the vehicle to protect it fromvery high or very low temperatures, andfrom intense solar radiation.

CAUTIONHumidity can damage the electrical con-tacts for the smartphone on the instrumentpanel.● Do not wet the smartphone’s housingwhen cleaning it. Use only a dry cloth.

NoteSEAT recommends that you always takeyour smart phone with you when you getout of the vehicle to avoid possible thefts.

104

Air conditioning

Air conditioning

Heating, ventilation andcooling

Introduction

The Climatronic cools and dehumidifies theair. Its optimum performance is achieved withthe windows closed.

To switch a specific function on, press the ap-propriate button. Press the button again toswitch off the function.

The LED on each control lights up to indicatethat the respective function of a control hasbeen switched on.

Dust and pollen filterThe dust and pollen filter with its activatedcharcoal cartridge serves as a barrieragainst impurities in the air taken into the ve-hicle interior.

The dust and pollen filter must be changedregularly so that air conditioner performanceis not adversely affected.

If the filter loses efficiency prematurely due touse in areas with very high levels of air pollu-tion, the filter must be changed more fre-quently than stated in the Service Schedule.

WARNINGReduced visibility through the windows in-creases the risk of serious accidents.● Always ensure that all windows are freeof ice and snow, and that they are not fog-ged, so as to maintain good visibility of ev-erything outside.● Only drive when you have good visibility.● Always ensure that you use the air condi-tioner and heated rear window to maintaingood visibility.● Never leave the air recirculation on for along period of time. If the cooling system isswitched off and air recirculation modeswitched on, the windows can mist oververy quickly, considerably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

WARNINGStuffy or used air will increase fatigue andreduce driver concentration possibly re-sulting in a serious accident.● Never leave the fresh air fan turned off oruse the air recirculation for long periods oftime; the air in the vehicle interior will notbe refreshed.

CAUTION● To replace the pollen filter, always visit aservice centre.

● Switch the air conditioner off if you thinkit may be broken. This will avoid additionaldamage. Have the air conditioner checkedby a specialised workshop.● Repairs to the air conditioner require spe-cialist knowledge and special tools. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT Official Serv-ice.

Note● When the cooling system is turned off, aircoming from the outside will not be dried.To prevent fogging of the windows, SEATrecommends leaving the cooling system(compressor) turned on. To do this, pressthe button. The button lamp shouldlight up.● The maximum heat output required to de-frost windows as quickly as possible is onlyavailable when the engine has reached itsnormal running temperature.● Keep the air intake slots in front of thewindscreen free of snow, ice and leaves toensure heating and cooling are not im-paired, and to prevent the windows frommisting over.● The air from the vents flows through thevehicle interior and is extracted by slots inthe luggage compartment designed for thispurpose. Therefore, you should avoid ob-structing these slots with any kind of ob-ject. »

105

Operation

● Do not smoke while air recirculationmode is on, as smoke drawn into the airconditioning system leaves residue on theevaporator, producing a permanent un-pleasant odour.

● It is advisable to turn on the air condition-ing at least once a month, to lubricate thesystem gaskets and prevent leaks. If a de-crease in the cooling capacity is detected,

a Technical Service should be consulted tocheck the system.● When the engine is under extreme strain,switch off the compressor for a moment.

Controls of the Climatronic*

Fig. 109 In the centre console: Climatronic controlpanel.

Automatic mode Automatic adjustment of temperature, fan,and air distribution. Automatic mode is disa-bled when the ventilation is modified manual-ly.

Cooling mode Press the button to switch on or off the cool-ing system.

Temperature 1 / 2

Press buttons 1 or 2 . The selected temper-ature is shown on the display of the climatecontrol panel.

Blower The power of the fan is automatically adjus-ted.

Press the buttons to manually adjust the fan.

Air distribution / / The airflow adjusts automatically for comfort.It can also be manually distributed to the de-sired zone by pressing the correspondingbutton:

The airflow is directed towards the chestThe airflow is directed towards the foot-well.The airflow is directed at the windscreen.

106

Air conditioning

Defrost/demist function The air drawn in from outside the vehicle is di-rected at the windscreen and air recirculationis automatically switched off. To defrost thewindscreen more quickly, the air is dehumidi-fied at temperatures over approximately+3°C (+38°F) and the fan runs at maximumoutput.

Windscreen heating Press the button to connect and disconnectthe windscreen heating with the engine run-ning.

Heated rear window This only works when the engine is runningand switches off automatically after a maxi-mum of 10 minutes.

It should be switched off as soon as the glassis demisted. Lower electricity consumptionhas a positive effect on energy consumption.

To avoid possible damage to the battery, anautomatic temporary disconnection of thisfunction is possible, coming back on whennormal operating conditions are re-establish-ed.

Air recirculation ››› page 108

Seat heating ››› page 108

Switching offPress the lower button several times .

Instructions for use of the air condi-tioning

The interior cooling system only works whenthe engine is running and fan is switched on.

Economic use of the air conditioningWhen the air conditioning is switched on, thecompressor consumes engine power and hasan influence on energy consumption.

The air conditioner operates most effectivelywith the windows closed. However, if the pas-senger compartment has become excessive-ly hot due to being exposed to the sun, it willcool down more quickly by opening the win-dows for a moment.

The cooling system cannot be activatedIf the air conditioning system cannot beswitched on, this may be caused by the fol-lowing:

● The engine is not running.● The fan is switched off.

● The air conditioner fuse has blown.● The outside temperature is lower than ap-proximately +3°C (+38°F).● The air conditioner compressor has beentemporarily switched off because the enginecoolant temperature is too high.● Another fault in the vehicle. Have the airconditioner checked by a specialised work-shop.

Special characteristicsIf the humidity and temperature outside thevehicle are high, condensation can drip offthe evaporator in the cooling system andform a pool underneath the vehicle. This isnormal and does not indicate a leak!

NoteAfter starting the engine, any residual hu-midity in the air conditioner could mist overthe windscreen. Switch on the defrost func-tion as soon as possible to clear the wind-screen of condensation.

Air diffusers

To ensure proper heating, cooling and venti-lation in the vehicle interior, the air vents mustremain open.

● With the fins of the diffusers you can openand close the diffusers, as well as adjust the »

107

Operation

direction in which you want the air to comeout. To get the best possible air flow towardsthe windows, open the corresponding diffuserand turn it to the de-icing/demisting position,where it will lock.

There are other additional, non-adjustable airvents in the instrument panel, in the footwellsand in the rear area of the passenger com-partment.

NoteFood, medicine and other heat or cold sen-sitive objects should never be placed infront of the air outlets as they may be dam-aged or made unsuitable for use by the air.

Air recirculation

Air recirculation mode prevents the ambientair from entering the interior.

When the outside temperature is very high,selecting manual air recirculation mode for ashort period refreshes the vehicle interiormore quickly.

For safety reasons, air recirculation mode isswitched off when the button is pressedor the air distributor is turned to .

Switching the manual air recirculationmode on and off● Press the button to connect or discon-nect manual air recirculation.

WARNINGObserve the safety warnings ››› in Intro-duction on page 105.● If the cooling system is switched off andair recirculation mode switched on, thewindows can mist over very quickly, con-siderably limiting visibility.● Switch air recirculation mode off when itis not required.

CAUTIONDo not smoke when air recirculation isswitched on in vehicles with an air condi-tioner. The smoke taken in could lie on thecooling system vaporiser and on the acti-vated charcoal cartridge of the dust andpollen filter, leading to a permanently un-pleasant smell.

NoteWhen reversing, and while the windscreenwipers are running, air recirculation is acti-vated to prevent exhaust gases or unpleas-ant odours from entering the passengercompartment.

NoteIf the temperature regulator is turned to thecoldest setting (blue point), the air recircu-lation function and the button are auto-matically activated.● If the function is not deactivated bypressing the button, it will deactivate afterapproximately 20 minutes.

Seat heating*

With the engine on, the seat cushion and theseat backrest can be heated electrically.

Control seat heating● Press buttons or on the control panelto turn on the seat heating as high as possi-ble.● Press buttons o repeatedly to adjust itto the required level.● To turn off the seat heating, press button or repeatedly until no LEDs are lit.

When the seat heating is at the maximum lev-el, after approx. 15 minutes it is automaticallyadjusted to the first level.

Cases in which the heat seating shouldnot be switched onDo not switch the seat heating on if any of thefollowing conditions are met:

108

Air conditioning

● The seat is not occupied.● The seat has a cover.● A child seat has been installed on the seat.● The seat cushion is wet or damp.● The outdoor or indoor temperature is great-er than +25°C (77°F).

WARNINGPeople who cannot perceive pain or tem-perature because of medications, paralysisor chronic diseases (e.g. diabetes) or havea limited perception of these, may sufferburns to the back, buttocks or legs whenusing seat heating.● People with limited pain and temperaturethresholds must never use seat heating.● If an abnormality in the device's temper-ature control is detected, have it checkedby a specialist workshop.

WARNINGIf the fabric of the cushion is wet, this canadversely affect the operation of the seatheating, increasing the risk of burns.● Make sure the seat cushion is dry prior tousing the seat heater.● Do not sit on the seat with clothing that iswet or damp.● Do not leave clothing that is wet or dampon the seat.● Do not spill liquid on the seat.

CAUTION● To avoid damaging the heating elementsof the seat heaters, please do not kneel onthe seat or apply sharp pressure to a singlepoint on the seat cushion or backrest.● Liquids, sharps objects and insulatingmaterials (e.g. covers or child seats) candamage the seat heating.● In the event of smells, switch off the seatheating immediately and have it inspectedby a specialised workshop.

For the sake of the environmentThe seat heating should remain on onlywhen needed. Otherwise, it is unnecessaryenergy consumption.

Stationary air conditioning

Introduction

With the stationary air conditioning you cancool, ventilate and heat the passenger com-partment while the vehicle is parked. In win-ter, you can also demist the windscreen andleave it free of ice and snow (if the layer isthin). The stationary air conditioning receivesthe necessary energy from the vehicle’s high-voltage battery or from the electrical networkthrough a power socket.

With the ignition off, you can manually con-nect and disconnect the stationary air condi-tioning with the corresponding application in-stalled on a mobile phone. On the Internetyou can check out information about the ap-plication, its availability and the necessaryrequirements for its use, as well as on com-patible terminals.

CAUTIONNever place food, medicines or other tem-perature-sensitive objects close to the airvents. Food, medicines and other objectssensitive to heat or cold may be damagedor made unsuitable for use by the air com-ing from the vents.

NoteIf the stationary air conditioning is usedwithout the charging cable plugged in,power is consumed from the high-voltagebattery. At extreme temperatures, it is pos-sible that the heating or cooling power ofthe stationary air conditioning is insuffi-cient to reach the set temperature.

Managing the stationary air condi-tioning

The stationary air conditioning can beswitched on and off manually (heating, venti-lation or immediate cooling) or by means of a »

109

Operation

few pre-programmed departure times. Thestationary air conditioning is managedthrough an application installed on a mobilephone.

Managing the stationary air conditioning● Automatically by programming and acti-vating a departure time.● Manually with the corresponding applica-tion installed on a mobile phone and the igni-tion off.

Managing the stationary air conditioning● Press the button on the air conditioningcontrol panel.● Automatically at the scheduled departuretime or after the programmed operating timehas elapsed.● Automatically when the charge level of thehigh-voltage battery drops too low››› page 163.● Manually with the corresponding applica-tion installed on a mobile phone.

Air conditioning operating time

The operating time may vary depending onthe type of control and the status of the high-voltage battery (whether it is charging ornot).

In the event of manual control● Charging connector plugged in. 15 minutes● Charging connector not plugged in. 10 mi-nutes

In the event of a scheduled departure time● Charging connector plugged in. 30 minutesof pre-run time● Charging connector plugged in. 15 minutesof post-run time● Charging connector not plugged in. 15 mi-nutes of pre-run time● Charging connector not plugged in. 5 mi-nutes of post-run time

Operation without the charging connectorplugged inThe operation of the stationary air condition-ing must be activated with the mobile phoneif the charging connector is not plugged in.This setting is memorised in the vehicle.

The stationary air conditioning will not starteven if it has been programmed if the optionthat allows air conditioning without thecharging connector being plugged in has notbeen activated.

When the charging connector is not pluggedin, the stationary air conditioning receives thenecessary electrical power from the high-voltage battery.

Operation with the charging connectorplugged inWhen the charging connector is not pluggedin, the stationary air conditioning receives thenecessary electrical power from the high-voltage battery. The operating possibilities ofthe stationary air conditioning depend on thetype of charging process:

● Charging with alternating voltage (charg-ing with AC): The vehicle can only be charg-ed or heated. If a departure time has beenprogrammed, the high-voltage battery ischarged first and the passenger compart-ment is then heated or cooled. The chargingprocess is prolonged if the stationary air con-ditioning is manually connected with the cor-responding application installed on the mo-bile phone.● Charging with direct current (charging withDC): The vehicle can only be heated/cooledduring the charging process. The chargingstation may be disconnected as soon as thehigh-voltage battery is fully charged. Thepassenger compartment will only be heat-ed/cooled if the air conditioning option with-out external power is activated.

If a departure time has been programmedthrough the corresponding application, thevehicle will calculate the previous time thatthe stationary air conditioning needs. It canbe a maximum of 30 minutes.

110

Air conditioning

Programming a departure timeWhat is programmed is the desired tempera-ture in the passenger compartment for theplanned departure time. Starting from the de-sired temperature, the vehicle calculates thetime necessary to reach it and, therefore, thetime at which the stationary air conditioninghas to be connected. It is possible to sched-ule up to three departure times.

Maximum cooling or heating powerThe maximum cooling or heating power canbe adjusted by the corresponding applica-tion installed on a mobile phone.

● Maximum cooling power: set the tempera-ture below +18 °C (+64 °F).● Maximum cooling power: set the tempera-ture below +28 °C (+82 °F).

When the maximum cooling or heating poweris set, the temperature is adjusted. Therefore,depending on the outside temperature, theopposite function may briefly turn on.

Thus, for example, if the stationary air condi-tioning has been set to the maximum coolingpower, the heating may be switched on if theoutside temperature is too low. The red sil-houette of a vehicle will be shown on the dis-play while the function opposite to the adjus-ted one is active.

So, if the stationary air conditioning has beenset to the maximum heating power, the cool-

ing system may be switched on if the outsidetemperature is too high. The blue silhouette ofa vehicle will be shown on the display whilethe function opposite to the adjusted one isactive.

Note● If the charge level of the high-voltagebattery drops excessively, the stationaryair conditioning switches off automaticallyor cannot be switched on.● Noises will be heard while the stationaryair conditioning is running.● The longer or the more often the station-ary air conditioning is used without exter-nal power, the more the high-voltage bat-tery will be discharged.

111

Infotainment System

Infotainment System

Introduction

Safety warnings

Safety instructions relating to theInfotainment system

Only operate the infotainment system and itsvarious functions when the traffic situationreally permits this.

WARNING● Before starting the trip, you should famili-arise yourself with the different infotain-ment system functions.● High audio volume may represent a dan-ger to you and to others. Hearing may beimpaired if the volume is too high, even forshort periods of time.● Changes to the Infotainment system set-tings should be made when the car is stop-ped, or by a passenger.

WARNINGCurrent traffic requires maximum attentionfrom public road users. Distracting the driv-er in any way can lead to an accident andcause injuries. Operating the Infotainment

system can distract your attention from thetraffic.● Always drive carefully and responsibly.● Select volume settings that allow you tohear sounds from outside the vehicle at alltimes (e.g. emergency services sirens andhorns).

WARNINGThe volume level may suddenly changewhen you switch audio source or connect anew audio source.● Lower the basic volume before connect-ing or switching audio sources.

WARNINGThe driving recommendations and trafficindications shown on the navigation systemmay differ from the current traffic situation.● Traffic signs and traffic regulations havepriority over the recommendations and dis-plays provided by the navigation system.

WARNINGConnecting, inserting or removing a datamedium while driving can distract your at-tention from the traffic and cause an acci-dent.

WARNINGPlace the connecting cables of externalequipment so that they do not interferewith the driver’s mobility.

WARNINGExternal devices that are loose or not prop-erly secured could move around the pas-senger compartment during a sharp ma-noeuvre or accident.● Avoid placing external devices on thedoors, windscreen, steering wheel, instru-ment panel, the backs of the seats, on topof or near the area marked “AIRBAG” or be-tween these areas and the occupants.They could cause serious injury in an acci-dent, especially when the airbags inflate.

WARNINGThe armrest* must always remain closedduring the journey as it could restrict thedriver’s movements.

WARNINGOpening the CD or DVD player can lead toinjuries from invisible laser radiation.● Have CD players repaired only by aqualified workshop.

112

Introduction

CAUTIONThe Infotainment system can be damagedby the incorrect insertion of a data storagedevice or the insertion of an incompatibledata storage device.● When inserting a data storage device,make sure it is correctly positioned.● Applying force may irreparably damagethe memory card slot locking mechanism.● Only use compatible memory cards.● When inserting and removing CDs, al-ways hold them at right angles to the frontof the CD drive without tilting so as not toscratch them.● If a CD is inserted while another is al-ready in the unit or being ejected, the CDdrive may be damaged. Always wait untilthe data medium is completely ejected.

CAUTIONForeign objects stuck to a CD, or if it is notround, may damage the player.● Only clean, standard 12-cm CDs shouldbe used.– Do not affix stickers or other items to

the data medium. Stickers may peel offand damage the drive.

– Do not use printable data media. Prin-ted labels and coverings may peel offand damage the CD drive.

– Do not insert 8-cm “single” CDs or ir-regularly shaped CDs.

– Do not insert DVD-Plus discs, DualDiscs or Flip Discs, as these are thickerthan normal CDs.

CAUTIONThe vehicle loudspeakers may be dam-aged if the volume is too high or the soundis distorted.

NoteFor the proper functioning of the Infotain-ment system it is important that the dateand time set in the vehicle are correct.

113

Infotainment System

Overview of the unit

You&Mii Colour Connection

Fig. 110 Overview of the controls

Volume. Off and on ››› page 116,››› page 116Slot for SD cards ››› page 127ScreenAUX-IN multimedia socket ››› page 129Settings button (search and selection)››› page 116Radio mode (change of band frequency)››› page 120Media mode (audio sources)››› page 125Function buttons ››› page 116Telephone mode ››› page 130

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

Selecting the main menu ››› page 114

Main menus● To access the main menu, press button .● To select a function, rotate the setting But-ton 5 until it is highlighted and press the setbutton.

10

114

Introduction

Radio ››› page 120

RADIO main menu ››› page 120RDS ››› page 120TP function ››› page 121Changing frequency band ››› page 122Change station ››› page 122Presetting stations ››› page 123Choosing memorised stations ››› page 123Digital radio mode ››› page 123

Media ››› page 125

Media sources and audio files ››› page 125Playback order ››› page 126Selecting a Media source ››› page 126SD card ››› page 127USB port ››› page 128Bluetooth ››› page 128AUX-IN socket ››› page 129Track information ››› page 130Changing the playback mode ››› page 130

Telephone ››› page 130

Connection and operation ››› page 130Functions of the phone ››› page 131Favourites ››› page 132Call by telephone ››› page 132Settings of a connected phone ››› page 132

Drive Mii App* ››› page 133

Connection and operation ››› page 133

Sound

Sound and volume settings ››› page 117

Settings

System and function settings ››› page 117

115

Infotainment System

General instructions for use

Additional instructions

Depending on the vehicle, notifications of thefactory-fitted driving assistance systems areshown on the display. The notifications closeautomatically when they are no longer use-ful.

All notifications are only displayed after com-pletely resetting the radio system.

Note● Pushing the buttons gently is enough touse the equipment.● Due to country-specific legislation, cer-tain functions may not be available whenthe vehicle is travelling above a certainspeed.● Using a mobile telephone inside the vehi-cle may cause noise in the speakers.● On some vehicles with ParkPilot, the vol-ume of the active audio source is automati-cally lowered when reverse gear is selec-ted.

Rotary push buttons, equipmentand function buttons

Overview● Rotary push buttons.● Equipment buttons named (physical but-tons).● Function buttons (virtual buttons).

Rotary push buttonsThe left-hand rotary push button is knownas volume control or the on/off button.

The right-hand rotary push button is knownas the settings button.

Equipment buttons and function buttonsThe named buttons of the equipment areknown as “equipment buttons” and areshown with a button symbol inside a rectan-gle, for instance, equipment button .

Unnamed equipment buttons are located be-low the display. These equipment buttons areknown as “function buttons” as their purposedepends on the active function mode.

The function assigned to a function button isexplained on the bottom of the display,above the corresponding button.

Switching on and off

● To manually switch the system on and off,briefly press the rotary push button .

When the unit is switched on the systemstarts up. The last active audio source will beplayed with the set volume, as long as thisdoes not exceed the maximum, predefined“switch-on” volume ( Volume ).

Depending on the equipment and country,when switching off the engine or removingthe key from the ignition, the system switchesoff automatically. If the system is switched onagain without switching on the ignition, it willswitch off automatically after approximately30 minutes (switch-off delay).

Energy managementIf the charge of the battery goes below theminimum onboard charge with the ignitionswitched off and the system active, an audi-ble warning will be emitted and the LOW BAT-TERY message will be displayed. If this hap-pens, you should turn off the equipment.

Anti-theft passwordThe password of the anti-theft coding systemis stored in the system after entering it for thefirst time (radio convenience coding). If youhave to enter the anti-theft password man-ually, for instance, because the system has

116

Introduction

been installed in a different vehicle, please goto an authorised SEAT dealer.

If only the battery was disconnected, switchon the ignition before turning the system onagain.

Change basic volume

Increase the volume: turn the volume con-trol clockwise.

Decrease the volume: turn the volume con-trol anticlockwise.

Changes in basic volume are indicated by a“volume bar” on the display, which appearsbriefly.

It is possible to preset certain volume settingsand adjustments.

Mute system sound● Turn the volume control anti-clockwiseuntil it displays .● OR: press the volume control briefly tomute or unmute the system.

While the sound of the system is muted(MUTE), the playback Media source stops.

NoteIf the basic volume has been considerablyincreased to play a certain audio source,

lower the volume again before switching toanother audio source.

System and function settings (SET-UP)

Displaying menus settings and changingsettings● Press the button .● Select the desired adjustment range usingthe adjustment button and confirm by press-ing lightly.● Select the submenu using the setting but-ton.● Select the desired adjustment using thesetting button.● Confirm the changes by lightly pressing thesetting button.● Press the device button , function but-ton to close the SETUP menu.

While changing the volume settings, the au-dio source being played will be heard withthe settings you choose.

Available adjustment menus displayThe settings that can be selected varies de-pending on the country and the equipment inquestion, and on the vehicle's equipment.

Menu option: submenus with repercussion

Radio Settings: Settings are made here that af-fect Radio mode.

Arrow keys: Set the behaviour of the arrow keys and for changing stations in Radio mode

››› page 120.

Preset list: The arrow keys are used toswitch between all of the saved stations in the se-lected frequency band.

Station List: The arrow keys are used toswitch between all of the available stations.

Traffic programme (TP): Traffic station an-nouncements ››› page 121.

Radio text: Radio text display

Delete memories: Deleting memorised stations.

Delete all: Delete all stored stations.

Selecting a special memory only deletes somestations. Memories that contain a station are visi-bly highlighted, identified with a frequency andhave a rubbish bin symbol at the end of the line.

FM station lista):

Alphabetically: In alphabetical order.

Group: Sorted by groups.

Advanced FM settings:

RDS regional:b): In areas without RDS cover-age, services requiring RDS may be deactivated(e.g. automatic station tracking) ››› page 120. »

117

Infotainment System


Automatic: Automatic change to a regionalRDS programme.

Fixed: Stations that support RDS are selectedmanually.

Automatic frequency control (AF): Au-tomatic station tracking ››› page 120.

If the function is active, while driving it is alwayschanged to the frequency of the tuned radiostation, which at that time is better tuned. Thishappens even if a tuned regional broadcast isinterrupted.

If the function is disabled, the frequencychange is not performed. The tuned frequencyremains active until reception is interrupted.

Advanced DAB settings:

DAB traffic announcements: If there arealerts of a traffic station available, they areplayed directly in the active Radio DAB mode.Traffic announcements of an FM traffic informa-tion station are ignored. If this function is disabled,or if the current DAB ensemble does not offer a TPservice, the traffic announcements of an FM traf-fic station are played directly in the active RadioDAB mode ››› page 121.

Other DAB announcements: DAB announce-ments (news, sports information, weather, warn-ings, etc.) are played while the DAB Radio mode isactive.


DAB - DAB station tracking: Automaticstation tracking in Radio DAB mode. If the tunedDAB station broadcasts on another channel whenyou change location, it automatically switches tothat channel (factory setting).

DAB - FM automatic switching: Switch-ing to the FM frequency band is permitted for au-tomatic station tracking ››› page 119.

Media settings: Here you can set the Mediamode settings.

Mix / Rep. incl. subfolders: It states thatrandom play and repeat play may include possibleexisting subfolders. The setting only affects theplayback of MP3/WMA files.

Selecting Bluetooth device: Selection ofthe Bluetooth device to be used for playback or fortelephony.

Application connection: The settings of thismenu option are only available when a device is con-nected.

Phone settings: Settings for pairing with a Blue-tooth® compatible smartphone.

Sound settings:

Volume:

Maximum switch-on volume: Here you canset the volume that must be adjusted when theequipment is turned on. For adjusting use the +and - buttons or the setting button.


Warnings: Here you can set the volume of trafficstation announcements (TP). For adjusting usethe + and - buttons or the setting button.

Speed-dependent adjustment: The speed-dependent volume increase function automati-cally adjusts the volume based on the speed ofthe vehicle ››› page 119.

AUX Volume: To adapt the input volume of anexternal audio source (AUX) to the playbackvolume of the other audio sources.

BT Audio: To adapt the input volume of an ex-ternal audio source (Bluetooth®) to the play-back volume of the other audio sources.

Balance - Fader: To adjust the sound distribu-tion.

Bass - Mid - High: To adjust the sound prop-erties.

System Settings:

Display:

Switch off screen (in 10 seconds):The screen turns off automatically when no oper-ation is performed during the set time. As soon asone of the device buttons, function buttons or ro-tary controls is activated, the display will be ac-tive again and will show the last active dialogue.

Brightness: Screen brightness selection fromMaximum brightness to Maximum dark-ness.

118

Introduction


Show clock in standby mode: When thedevice is turned off, the current time is shown onthe display.

Colour: Here you can select marking colours forthe screen.

Language: Here you can manually set the desiredlanguage for the user interface. Alternatively, youcan let the instrument panel language be automati-cally selected.

Bluetooth:

Bluetooth: Press to deactivate Bluetooth®. Allexisting connections are disconnected.

Visibility: Turn Bluetooth® visibility on andoff.

Visible: Bluetooth® visibility is activated.

Not visible: Bluetooth® visibility is deacti-vated. Bluetooth® visibility must be active forpairing a Bluetooth® device with the infotain-ment system.

Forename: Display or change the name of thedevice. This name will be shown to other Blue-tooth® devices in your Bluetooth® settings.

Paired devices: Viewing paired devices. Dis-connection and connection of Bluetooth® devicesand individual Bluetooth® profiles.

Searching for a device: Search for visibleBluetooth® devices that are within range of the in-fotainment system. The maximum range is ap-prox. 10 meters.


BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP): If an external au-dio source is to be connected to the infotainmentsystem via Bluetooth®, this function must be ac-tive ››› page 128.

Application connection Data transfer active Registry

Remove source safely: With this option youcan safely remove an inserted SD card or a connec-ted USB device.

Factory settings: You can restore the factorysettings of Radio, Media, Sound and Systemseparately or together.

System information: Status of technical dataof the device.

Copyright: Data of the software used.

a) Valid only for the FM frequency band.b) This function depends on the country and unit inquestion.

Operation of speed-dependent volume in-creaseThe speed-dependent volume increase func-tion automatically adjusts the volume basedon the speed of the vehicle.

The volume increase can be adjusted in lev-els from 1 to 7.

If the selected level is low, the volume only in-creases slightly when the speed increases, ifon the contrary it is high, the volume increa-ses considerably. On 0 the speed-dependentvolume increase is disconnected.

DAB-FM LINK operationIf the DAB station being listened to can nolonger be tuned in (e.g., there is no DAB cov-erage), the device will try to find and tune thesame station on the FM frequency band.

To allow automatic station tracking on all fre-quencies, the DAB station and the FM stationneed to broadcast the station identification,or to signal through DAB which FM stationcorresponds to the same DAB station.

When the corresponding FM station has beenfound, (FM) is displayed behind the name ofthe station. If the corresponding DAB stationbecomes available again, it returns to DABmode after a while.

If the signal is too weak and the DAB station inquestion cannot be found again in the FMband, the radio sound is muted.

119

Infotainment System

Operating modes

Radio

Introduction

The radio system is supplied in different ver-sions depending on the country and the fea-tures of the vehicle. Some systems also havea DAB radio receiver. The control overviewcontains the possible versions of the system››› page 114.

Note● Bear in mind that being in undergroundparking lots, in tunnels, in areas with tallbuildings or mountains can interfere withradio signals.● Foil or metal-coated stickers attached tothe windows may affect reception on vehi-cles with a window aerial.

RADIO main menu

Fig. 111 RADIO Main Menu: select frequencyband.

Fig. 112 RADIO main menu: Indication of pre-set buttons.

● Press equipment button so start theRadio mode.

After switching to Radio mode, the availablefrequency bands (FM, AM1) and DAB1)) will beshown on the bottom of the display. Press the

equipment button gain to display morefunctions for the radio receiver.

The following options are available:● Search next station.● Access a previously saved station.● Switching the TP function on and off● Save current station ››› page 123.

The current station is shown in the middle ofthe display. If the station allows for RDS andthe connection is good, instead of the fre-quency, the name of the station will beshown, e.g. RADIO 21.

RDS and automatic station tracking

RDS is a radio data service that enables todisplay station names, automatic stationtracking and TP function (traffic informationstation ››› page 121).

With automatic station tracking, while drivingthe equipment will switch to the frequency ofthe radio station you are listening to that cur-rently tunes better. If the tuning is bad, thevolume of the equipment may be briefly sup-pressed while checking the alternative fre-quencies (AF).

1) This depends on the country and unit in ques-tion.

120

Operating modes

RDS is not available in all places or on all ra-dio stations.

Depending on the country and the equip-ment, RDS and switching to alternative fre-quencies (AF) can be deactivated in the sys-tem settings ››› page 117.

TP function (traffic information sta-tion)

Fig. 113 TP function activated.

The TP function is an RDS radio data service››› page 120. If your equipment is fitted withDAB ››› page 123, you can also use the TPfunction without having RDS ››› page 121.

Using the TP function to track traffic informa-tion is only possible if a station providing traf-fic information can be tuned.

If the tracking of a traffic station is active (in-dication: TP ››› Fig. 113) traffic announce-ments are played directly in Audio mode.

Tracking of traffic stations is not possible inthe AM frequency band1).

Some stations without their own traffic infor-mation support the TP function by broad-casting traffic information from other stations(EON). Traffic announcements of the corre-sponding traffic station are played directlyduring the active audio mode.

Switching the TP function on and off● Press the TP function button.

If the TP function is activated in areas wherethere is no support for TP, the followingwarning will appear on the screen: NO TP.

● Press the TP function button again to de-activate the TP function again.

TP function activeWhile the traffic station tracking is active andready for operation, in the FM mode the TP››› Fig. 113 function button is displayed.

In Radio mode the station being listened tomust support the TP function, or there mustbe a DAB or EON station available that sup-

ports the TP function. If neither of the require-ments are met, it is not possible to track thetraffic station.

If the traffic station being listened to can nolonger be tuned, you will have to start a man-ual search using the arrow buttons and ››› page 120.

If you search for a station using the arrow but-tons, the NO TP indication appears if the sta-tion currently tuned is not compatible with TP.

In Media mode or while the equipment vol-ume has been suppressed (mute), a trafficstation is automatically tuned in the back-ground, as long as the station has a good sig-nal. Depending on the situation, this opera-tion may take some time.

Incoming traffic announcement (INFO)In Audio mode, traffic announcements areplayed directly when they are received.

● If necessary, the radio gives way to the traf-fic station (EON) while the announcement isplaying.● Media mode is interrupted and the volumeis set as adjusted.● The volume of the traffic announcementscan be modified with the volume control . »


121

Infotainment System

This setting will also apply for subsequent an-nouncements.● A pop-up message appears that allowsyou to cancel the traffic announcement(Cancel) or deactivate the TP function (De-activate).

Changing frequency band

The frequency band selected (FM, AM1) orDAB1 )) is shown on the top left.

● Briefly press the equipment button when in Radio mode to show the FM , AM 1 )

and DAB 1 ) ››› Fig. 111 function buttons.● Press one of the function buttons FM , AMor DAB to change the frequency band.● OR: Press the equipment button a fewtimes to cycle through the different lowerfunction buttons.

Change station

Fig. 114 Go to the next available station withthe arrow buttons.

Fig. 115 Changing the stations with the arrowbuttons is only possible for saved stations.

● Press the or arrow button on the sys-tem or the display.

Based on the mode selected for the searchmode (Arrow buttons:) you can cyclethrough either available or saved stations.

Manually tune a station frequency● To select the desired frequency band››› page 120.● Press the function button of the frequencyband .● Rotate the setting button until the desiredfrequency is shown on the display(e.g. 89.9 MHz).● OR: Press one of both buttons with doublearrow ››› Fig. 117 until the desired frequency isshown on the display.


122

Operating modes

Memorise stations on the presetbuttons

Fig. 116 Station on the FM frequency bandstored in preset button 6.

Fig. 117 Additional radio functions.

Stations that are already saved are overwrit-ten if another station is stored in the samepreset button.

Assigning different preset buttons manual-ly● Select the frequency band ››› page 122.● Select station ››› page 122.

● Change to preset buttons. To do this, pressbutton ››› Fig. 118● Press and hold the desired preset buttonuntil an audible signal is heard.● The current station (RADIO 21) will be savedin this preset button.

You can update the station list by pressingand holding the equipment button or bymeans of the function button ››› Fig. 117.

Choosing memorised stations

Fig. 118 Radio mode notification: change ofstation using the arrow buttons.

Fig. 119 Saved stations.

● Select the frequency band on which thestation is saved.● Press the function button.● Press the preset button in which the stationis saved briefly.

Depending on the settings, you can cyclethrough the stations of a frequency band withthe arrow buttons and (Arrow but-tons:).

The stored stations can only be played if theycan be received at the current location.

Digital radio mode*

Introduction

Some systems also have a DAB radio receiv-er. »

123

Infotainment System

The DAB radio tuner supports the DAB, DAB +and DMB audio transmission standards.

The digital radio in Europe is transmittedthrough band III frequencies (from 174 MHz to240 MHz) and of band L (from 1,452 MHz to1,492 MHz).

The frequencies of both bands are called“channels” and have an abbreviation (e.g. 12A).

In a channel, several available DAB stationsare grouped together in an “ensemble”.

DAB radio is not currently available every-where. DAB radio mode displays in theareas without DAB coverage. In the systemand function settings, it is possible to enablechanging to an FM station for this case››› page 117. In the system and function set-tings, other settings can be configured forstation tracking and for the reproduction ofDAB announcements.

NoteStations are responsible for the informationthey transmit.

Operation

Fig. 120 RADIO main menu: Selecting memorylevel and frequency band.

Fig. 121 RADIO main menu: Indication of pre-set buttons.

Starting the DAB radio mode● Press the button .● Press the DAB ››› Fig. 120 function buttonto open DAB Radio mode.

After switching to DAB Radio mode, the avail-able frequency bands (FM, AM1) and DAB1 ))will be shown on the bottom of the display››› Fig. 120. After about 5 seconds the “presetkeys” are displayed instead ››› Fig. 121.

The centre line of the screen displays the lastDAB radio (RADIO 21) tuned and it is played,if it can still be tuned in the current location.The ensemble currently selected (DAB 5) isshown on the top line of the screen››› Fig. 121.

Changing the DAB and Autostore radiostationThis is operated in the same way as descri-bed for FM and AM Radio mode1 )

››› page 120.

Manually changing the DAB frequencyband channels● Turn the adjustment knob.

The selected channel is displayed in the cen-tre of the screen. If the selected channelbroadcasts a DAB ensemble, its name will bedisplayed at the top of the screen and thefirst DAB station of that ensemble will beplayed.


124

Operating modes

Starting the station update

Fig. 122 Additional DAB functions

Fig. 123 Active station update.

During the station update, the equipmentsearches for the available station ensemblesin the place where it is located.

● In the preset button view, press the functionbutton ››› Fig. 121 to display the additionalfunctions available ››› Fig. 122.● Press the function button ››› Fig. 122, themessage that the station update is active isdisplayed on the top bar of the screen››› Fig. 123.

● The station update may take a few sec-onds. The station update ends when the indi-cation disappears.

During radio update the sound of the radio issuppressed.

Media

Introduction

“Media sources” are audio sources contain-ing audio files on various different data stor-age devices (e.g. CD, external MP3 players).These audio files can be played with theircorresponding applications or the radio's au-dio inputs.

Note● Do not use memory card adapters.● SEAT assumes no liability for any deterio-ration or loss of files on data storage devi-ces.

Requirements for Media sourcesand audio files

Limitations and indicationsDirt, high temperatures and mechanicaldamage can cause data media to fail. Con-

sider the indications provided by the manu-facturer of the data media.

Consider copyright legislation!

The configuration of data media or of theequipment or programmes used for recordingmay cause some titles (tracks) or data mediato be unreadable. On the Internet, for exam-ple, you can find information regarding thebest way to create audio files or data media(compression rate, ID3 tag, etc.).

Complex folder structures can slow down da-ta reading.

Playlists only establish a certain playbackorder. The files are not saved in them. Play-lists cannot be played if the files on the datamedia are not saved to the path to which theplaylist refers.

125

Infotainment System

Playback order of files and folders

Fig. 124 Example of the structure of a datamedia with MP3 files.

The audio files stored on data media areoften arranged by file folders and playlists to establish a certain playback order.

Depending on their name on the data media,tracks, folders and playlists are ordered nu-merically and alphabetically, respectively.

Subfolders are treated as folders and num-bered according to the order in which theyare found in the data media.

The illustration ››› Fig. 124 shows an exampleof a conventional MP3 data media, contain-ing tracks , folders and subfolders .

The tracks and folders of this data media aredisplayed and played in the following order:

Track 1 and 2 in the root directory(ROOT) of the data media.Tracks 3 and 4 in the first F1 folder ofthe data media root directory (indica-tion: 01).Track 5 in the first F1.1 subfolder of fold-er F1 (indication: 02).Track 6 in the first F1.1.1 subfolder offolder F1.1 (indication: 03).Track 7 in the second F1.2 subfolder offolder F1 (indication: 04).Track 8 and 9 in the second F2 folder(indication: 05).

Playlists are played in the same order asthe folders.

NoteThe playback sequence can be modifiedby selecting the playback mode (MIX)››› page 130.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

Selecting a Media source

Fig. 125 Select a Media source

Press the equipment button to switch tothe Media mode.

When switching to the Media mode, the bot-tom of the display shows the available Mediasources for a few seconds. The Media sourcethat is currently playing is highlighted .

Open the Media selection menu manuallyand select a Media source● In the Media mode, press the equip-ment button to display the Media selectionmenu again.● Enable the Media source you want bypressing the corresponding function button.● OR: Press the equipment button againto cycle through the available Media sources.

126

Operating modes

Function button: Media source

SD card in the slot for SD cards››› page 127.

* Audio or MP3 CD in the internal CD play-er.

USB data storage in the USB socket››› page 128. You can see the location ofthe connection in ››› page 102.

* Smartphone paired through Bluetooth››› page 128

External audio source connected to theAUX-IN multimedia socket ››› page 129.

When a Media source that has already beenplayed is selected again, playback is re-sumed from the point at which it ended (ex-cept for: AUX ››› page 129).

Play SD card

Fig. 126 SD card playback: List of tracks.

● Insert the SD card first with the cut cornerfacing up and the title on the left in the slot forSD cards.● Press the button .

Playback continues with the last Mediasource selected. To play the SD card press .

In the folder view, browse with the functionbutton and the settings button. Press toaccess a higher golder level and rotate thesettings switch to select the desired folder.

To switch to the previous or next track, presseither or .

Hold one of the arrow buttons to fast-forwardor rewind the track.

During playback, the following function but-tons are available on the bottom of the dis-play. Active function buttons are highlighted.

Function button: Meaninga)

Playlist notification. Here you can also se-lect a title directly with the settings button››› Fig. 126.

Previous track or rewind.

Play. It can also be pressed to stop theplayback. In this case, the symbolchanges to

Next title or fast-forward

Random play.

Function button: Meaninga)

To repeat a folder or track. The symbolindicates that the current track is on re-peat.

a) Valid for Media sources: SD card, USB socket andBluetooth audio

In the list of playlists (button ) the followingoptions are available:

Function button: Meaning

To change the main folder of the SD card.

To access a higher folder level. In the folderlist, you can select a different audio sourcewith ››› page 126.

Play. It can also be pressed to stop theplayback.

Random play.

To repeat a folder or track. The symbolindicates that the current track is on re-peat.

Ejecting the SD cardConnected data storage devices must beprepared before their disconnection in orderto remove them without damaging it.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen press System settings.● Select Remove source safely and thenSD Card. After correctly ejecting the data »

127

Infotainment System

storage device from the system, the functionbutton becomes inactive (grey colour).● Now you can remove the SD card.

External data storage connected toUSB port

Depending on the country and device, theremight be one or several USB ports in thevehicle.

The location of the USB ports depends onthe vehicle in question .

Audio files on an external data storage deviceconnected to the USB port can be playedand controlled via the Infotainment system.

Where this manual refers to external datastorage devices, this means USB mass stor-age devices containing supported audio files,such as MP3 players, iPods™ and USB sticks.

Only compatible audio files are displayed.Other files are ignored.

The rest of operations to use the external da-ta device storage (changing tracks, selectingtracks and enabling playback modes) arecarried out similarly to other audio sources(e.g. “Playback from SD card” ››› page 127.

Instructions and restrictionsThe number of USB ports and their com-patibility with Apple™ devices as well as withother media players depends on the features.

The USB port supplies the usual USB volt-age of 5 volts for a USB connection.

Due to the large number of different datastorage devices and various iPod™ andiPhone™ generations available, it is not possi-ble to guarantee fault-free operation of allfunctions described here.

Take into account all other instructions andlimitations regarding requirements for mediasources.

DisconnectingConnected data storage devices must beprepared before their disconnection in orderto remove them.

● Press the Infotainment button andthen press System settings .● Select Remove source safely and thenSD Card . After correctly ejecting the data

storage device from the system, the functionbutton becomes inactive (grey colour).● Now the data storage device can be dis-connected.

Playing via Bluetooth®*

Connection of a safe audio source throughBluetoothBluetooth® Audio mode allows you to listen toaudio files being played on a Bluetooth® au-dio source (e.g., a mobile telephone) connec-ted via Bluetooth® (audio playback by Blue-tooth®) over the vehicle speakers.

Requirements● The Bluetooth® audio source must supportthe A2DP Bluetooth® profile.● In the Bluetooth Settings menu the BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be on.

Starting Bluetooth® audio transmission● Activate Bluetooth® visibility on the externalBluetooth® audio source (e.g., mobile tele-phone).● Lower the base volume on the Infotainmentsystem.● Press the button .● Press the function button to select Blue-tooth® as a media source.● Start searching for the desired Bluetooth®

device.● Please refer to the instructions on the Info-tainment system display and on the Blue-tooth® audio source regarding the rest of theprocedure.

128

Operating modes

You may still need to manually start playbackon the Bluetooth® source. When playback onthe Bluetooth® audio source is stopped, theInfotainment system remains in Bluetooth®

Audio mode.

Controlling playbackThe extent to which the Bluetooth® audiosource can be controlled via the Infotainmentsystem depends on the connected Blue-tooth® audio source.

With media players that support the AVRCPBluetooth® profile, playback on the Blue-tooth® audio source can be automaticallystarted or stopped when the unit is switchedto Bluetooth® Audio mode or to a different au-dio source. In addition, it is possible to view orchange the track via the Infotainment system.

WARNINGDo not perform the pairing and connectionprocess while driving. This may cause anaccident!

Note● Due to the large number of possible Blue-tooth® audio sources, it is not possible toguarantee fault-free operation of all de-scribed functions for all these sources.● To operate the media and phone with theBluetooth® device connected, please read

the electronic Instructions Manual of themanufacturer.● Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices.You can request information about compat-ible Bluetooth® products at a SEAT Author-ised Service or online.

External audio source connected tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket

Depending on the version of the vehicle, thereis an AUX-IN connection on the front of the ra-dio ››› page 114, in the glove compartment onthe passenger side, on the centre console oron the armrest between the front seats.

The AUX-IN multimedia connection can onlybe used with a 3.5 mm jack.

A connected external audio source is playedover the vehicle speakers and cannot becontrolled via the radio system controls.

The AUX-IN multimedia connection must beactivated in the system settings so it can bedisplayed on the Media selection menu››› page 126.

Connecting an external audio source tothe AUX-IN multimedia socket● Lower the base volume on radio.● Connect the external audio source to theAUX-IN multimedia socket.

● Start playback on the external audiosource.● In the Media mode, press the equip-ment button to display the Media source se-lection menu again ››› page 126.● Press the function button.

The output volume of a connected externalaudio source should be adjusted to the vol-ume of the other audio sources.

Adjust the playback volumeIf you need to increase the playback volumefor the external audio source, first lower thebase volume on the radio system.

If the sound from the external audio source istoo low, increase the output volume on theexternal audio source, if possible. If this is notenough, adjust the input volume in the sys-tem settings to Level 2 or Level 3.

If the sound from the connected external au-dio source is too loud or distorted, lower theoutput volume on the external audio source,if possible. If this is not enough, change theinput volume to Level 2 or Level 1.

Note● When the playback from the external au-dio source ends or the connection to theAUX-IN socket is interrupted, the radio goesback to the AUX menu. »

129

Infotainment System

● Interference noise may be heard if the ex-ternal audio source is powered from the 12-volt power socket of the vehicle.● Please read and observe the manufac-turer's instruction manual for the externalaudio source.

Track information display

In the case of audio files that contain addi-tional title information (ID3 tag in MP3 files)the different stored title data can be dis-played ››› Fig. 126.

Changing the playback mode

Fig. 127 SD card playback: Possible playbackmodes.

Consider the playback order of files and fold-ers ››› page 126.

Selecting playback modes● Press the function button to start the corre-sponding playback mode. The function but-ton appears underlined.

Random play: The tracks are played inrandom order. Random playback remains ac-tive for the corresponding Media source untilit is deactivated from that source.

Repeat: The tracks of the playlist are re-peated.

● Press the function button again to endthe active playback mode in the track beingplayed.● Press the function button again to onlyrepeat the track being played. After pressingonce more, the repeat function is deactiva-ted.

Telephone

Connection and operation

Requirements for phone management:Your mobile phone is connected to the Info-tainment System through Bluetooth®.

Connection between the mobile phoneand the Infotainment System● Please observe the information on thepage 128, Playing via Bluetooth®*.● Press the button .● On the Bluetooth® menu of your mobilephone, search the name displayed on dis-play.● If necessary, take into account the››› page 128 notifications.● To complete the pairing process, respondto the requests of both devices.

Changing the volumeMedia and phone call playback from a con-nected mobile phone will be conductedthrough the speaker of the vehicle.

If voice control is enabled on the mobilephone connected, voice communication willalso take place through the vehicle speaker.

The playback volume can be modified withthe volume control .

Moreover, the volume of navigation an-nouncements can be adjusted in the Soundsettings menu.

If the volume of the system is muted (notifica-tion: ), media sources that are playing onthe connected Smartphone are also interrup-ted.

130

Operating modes

WARNINGGeneral, mandatory, legal and country-specific instructions and laws for the use ofmobile phones inside the vehicle must al-ways be considered.

Note● To operate the media and phone withyour mobile phone plugged in, please readthe electronic Instructions Manual of themanufacturer.● Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices.You can request information about compat-ible Bluetooth® products at a SEAT Author-ised Service or online.

Functions of the phone

Fig. 128 Phone disconnected.

Fig. 129 Dial a number with the menu button.

Once the phone is connected correctly, youcan manage the calling functions of yourpaired mobile phone through the infotain-ment system ››› Fig. 128.

Dial number:Press the function button ››› Fig. 128 toshow the dialling display ››› Fig. 129. Hereyou can choose a number with the rightswitch and confirm it by pressing. If the num-ber is complete, the call can be madethrough the headset ››› Fig. 129.

Moreover, the following options are availablehere:

● : calls the emergency number1).● : connects to a SEAT fault service1 ).● : connects to the SEAT information hot-line1 ).

●: starts call to your voice mail. For thispurpose, your mailbox number will be reques-ted the first time you select it.

Phonebook:Press the function button ››› Fig. 128 toshow the directory. The phonebook containsall the contacts of your mobile phone, whichyou can select one by one with the rightswitch and establish a connection by press-ing it, or either access a list with availablenumbers first. For this purpose, during the firstconnection, you have to confirm the transferof your mobile phone contacts. With the starbutton you can save a contact as a fast-dialnumber.

Call log:Press the function button ››› Fig. 128 toshow the call log. All the calls from your mo-bile phone will be shown here once you haveconfirmed the transfer of your contacts fromyour phone.

● All: shows all calls in chronological order.● : only shows missed calls.● : only shows received calls.● : only shows outgoing calls.

The function button bookmarks an entry. »

1) Not available in all countries.131

Infotainment System

Voice mail:Press the function button ››› Fig. 128 to lis-ten to the voice mail. For this purpose, yourmailbox number will be requested the firsttime you select it.

Emergency call:1)

Press the function button ››› Fig. 128 tomake an emergency call.

Favourites

Fig. 130 Fast-dial

Fast-dial:Press the function button ››› Fig. 128 tochange the favourites view setting››› Fig. 130. Select an empty slot of your fast-dial list to access the phonebook, where youcan choose a contact as a fast-dial number.

Select a used slot to dial its correspondingphone number.

Call by telephone

Fig. 131 Ongoing call.

Incoming call:If you receive a call, you have three options:

● accepting the call with the function but-ton.● muting the ringtone with the functionbutton.● rejecting the call with the function but-ton.

Active call:If you accept the incoming call, you havethese possibilities during the call ››› Fig. 131:

● Press the function button to emit DTMFtones (e.g. to operate an answering ma-chine).● Press the function button to pause thephone call.● Press the function button to mute the mi-crophone.● Press to end the call.

Settings of a connected phone

Use the equipment button to access thephone's settings: The following options areavailable:

Hands-free: If there is an ongoing call, you cancontinue the call on the mobile phone or transfer itback to the Infotainment System.

Phone selection: Cycle through the phones rec-ognised by the Infotainment System or search fornew devices.

User profile: Change the settings of the phonecurrently connected:

Manage your fast-dial numbers (e.g. delete one).

Set or change voice mail numbers.

Sort your phonebook.

Download your contacts again.

1) Not available in all countries.132

Operating modes

Activate/deactivate mobile phone notificationswhen turning off the engine.

Select a ringtone (only if the phone is not emittingany sounds).

Bluetooth®: Here you can change the connectionsettings of the telephone. For instance, you can de-lete known devices.

Note● A device connected through Bluetooth®,if it supports this profile, will always beused for calls and audio through Blue-tooth®.● To operate the media and phone withyour mobile phone plugged in, please readthe electronic Instructions Manual of themanufacturer.

Drive Mii App*

Introduction

Fig. 132 Application connection main menu.

The connected smartphone offers the follow-ing options:

Navigation over the smartphone withnavigation announcements on the radio.ECOTRAINER display.Driving data notifications.Notifications from the odometer, etc.Search in all fields.

You can also use the telephone function ofyour connected smartphone over the radiousing the right switch.

1

2

3

4

5

NoteTo operate the telephone and multimediaaspects and for navigation with the con-nected smartphone, read the instructionsmanual of the manufacturer.

Connection and operation

Requirement: Your smartphone is connectedto the radio through USB ››› page 128 and theSEAT application to connect the smartphoneto the radio is installed on your smartphone1).

Place the smartphone in its socket and turn iton. Removal and installation of the equip-ment and the socket are described in››› page 103.

Connection between smartphone and ra-dio● Press the button to open the mainmenu.● Afterwards, select and enable the Connec-tion of the application function withthe settings button.

Once the connection is established, you canmanage radio music playback with the »

1) For more information about the application re-garding installation and use, take into accountthe information provided with the vehicle.

133

Infotainment System

smartphone. You can start the navigation onthe smartphone and listen to the navigationannouncements on the audio system of thevehicle.

Instructions for navigationAcoustic navigation announcements will beplayed on the speakers of the vehicle. Re-garding this, take into account the instruc-tions in Adjusting the volume ››› page 134.

You can manage this from the connectedsmartphone ››› page 134.

Changing the volumeMultimedia playback, navigation announce-ments and phone calls emitted by the con-nected smartphone will be played on thespeakers of the vehicle.

The volume of the traffic announcement canbe modified with the volume control .

You can also adjust the volume of the naviga-tion announcements on the Sound settingsmenu.

When the volume of the system is muted (no-tification: ), playback of multimedia sour-ces played on the connected smartphone isalso interrupted.

Note● For more information about the installa-tion and use of the application, see the in-formation provided with the vehicle.● To operate the media and phone and tonavigate with your Smartphone plugged in,please read the electronic InstructionsManual of the manufacturer.● A device connected through Bluetooth®,if it supports this profile, will always beused for calls and audio through Blue-tooth®. and connection for applications.● Only use compatible Bluetooth® devices.You can request information about compat-ible Bluetooth® products at a SEAT Author-ised Service or online.

Connectivity

Cybersecurity

Introduction

Control units with integrated eSIM card, inter-faces and connections for multimedia and di-agnosis are connectivity componentsthrough which data and information can beexchanged between the vehicle and externaldevices or the Internet ››› . The connectivitycomponents mainly include the following:

● Connection socket for diagnosis● Control units with integrated eSIM card● Telephone interface● Media Control● App-Connect● WLAN access point (hotspot)● Bluetooth connection● USB connection● AUX-IN multimedia socket● Slot for SD cards● Slot for SIM cards

The connectivity components are key pointsin cybersecurity. The connectivity compo-nents in particular, but also other controlunits, are fitted with locking mechanisms that

134

Connectivity

minimise the risk of unauthorised third partiesaccessing the vehicle’s systems.

Software and locking mechanisms mountedon the vehicle are being developed continu-ously. As in the case of computers or mobilephone device operating systems, softwareand locking mechanisms mounted on the ve-hicle can also be updated non-periodically.

In general, software updates improve the se-curity, stability and speed of execution of ve-hicle systems that have already been manu-factured.

You can actively contribute to reducing therisk of unauthorized third parties accessingthe vehicle systems and their functions:

● Do not use data storage devices, Bluetoothdevices or mobile phone devices that containmanipulated data or malicious software inthe vehicle.● Only get vehicle repair and maintenancework done at specialised workshops. SEATrecommends visiting a SEAT dealership forthis.

WARNINGComputers, data storage devices and mo-bile phone devices that connect to the In-ternet or that are used on public or privatenetworks can be infected by manipulateddata and malicious software.

● In addition to taking the generally knownprecautionary measures when using the In-ternet, you should protect your computer,your data storage devices and your mobilephone with an appropriate antivirus pro-gram and regularly update your login de-tails.

WARNINGThe risk of unauthorized third parties ac-cessing the vehicle's functions and controlunits through malicious software or an In-ternet attack cannot be ruled out despitethe locking mechanisms fitted to the vehi-cle. If malicious software is introduced intothe vehicle, it can influence, deactivate orcontrol the control units and vehicle func-tions and cause serious accidents and fatalinjuries.● Malicious software can also access dataand information stored in control units, theinfotainment system, connected data stor-age devices and paired mobile phone devi-ces.● If the vehicle operates differently thanusual or reacts or behaves strangely, re-duce the speed immediately (wheneverpossible) in a controlled manner and go tothe nearest specialized workshop withoutdelay or request the help of specializedpersonnel, e.g. to tow the vehicle.

SEAT CONNECT

Introduction

SEAT CONNECT groups together differentSEAT CONNECT service portfolios that offeradditional functions for your vehicle, e.g. Re-mote Access. These services can be execu-ted, for example, from home with a computeror away from home with a mobile phone de-vice (smartphone or tablet).

The vehicle and the computer or mobilephone are connected to each other by an In-ternet connection.

SEAT CONNECT is equipment that is notavailable in all countries, which is made up ofseveral portfolios. It has to be activated on-line before it can be used and it is subject to acountry-dependent time use limitation.

Both the SEAT CONNECT service portfoliosoffered by SEAT and individual services canbe modified, cancelled, deactivated, reacti-vated, renamed and extended, even withoutprior notification.

On the website https://my.seat you can cre-ate a user account, consult descriptions ofSEAT CONNECT services and find out moreabout them.

The availability of SEAT CONNECT servicescan vary depending on the model and equip-ment. »

135

Infotainment System

Activation of SEAT CONNECTSEAT CONNECT can be activated athttps://my.seat or, in some vehicles, directlyin the infotainment system:

● First step: create a user account.● Second step: add your vehicle to the useraccount.● Third step: activate SEAT CONNECT.

Description of servicesBefore running SEAT CONNECT services,read and take into account the correspond-ing services description. Descriptions are up-dated non-periodically and are available on-line.

● Always use the most up-to-date version ofthe corresponding service description.

WARNINGIn areas with insufficient mobile phone andGPS coverage, neither emergency calls orphone calls can be made, and data cannotbe transmitted.● Change location if possible.

CAUTIONThe vehicle may be damaged by factorsoutside SEAT’s control. These may be spe-cifically:● Insufficient network coverage

● Misuse of mobile terminals● Data loss during transmission● Unsuitable or defective third party appli-cations● Malicious software on data storage devi-ces, computers, tablets or mobile phones

Legal provisions

Fig. 133 Marking for vehicles that send track-ing information.

When contracting SEAT CONNECTION serv-ices for your vehicle, you are obliged as acontractor, for the purposes of the data pro-tection law, to inform any driver of the vehiclethat it can transmit or receive data online.This also applies if the vehicle is sold or lent.

Not taking into account this obligation to in-form, can infringe certain rights of the occu-pants.

GPS tracking: consult all occupantsSome SEAT CONNECT services need vehicledata to determine at any given time whetherthe vehicle is being used or moving within de-fined speed ranges, where it has been parkedor if it is being used in an established geo-graphical area. This information is displayedin the MySEAT web portal and in the SEATCONNECT app.

Therefore, before moving off, ask all the vehi-cle occupants if they agree with the activa-ted services. If they do not, deactivate theservice in question (if possible) or do not al-low the occupants to use the vehicle. If youdo not take this into account, you may in-fringe upon certain rights of the occupants.

GPS tracking: markingIf the vehicle has a factory assembled controlunit that transmits the its current geographi-cal position and speed, the vehicle usuallyhas this marking ››› Fig. 133 (e.g., on theroof console). The absence of this marking››› Fig. 133 in the vehicle does not guaranteethat the control unit does not transmit the ve-hicle’s current geographical position andspeed.

Personal dataSEAT collects, processes and uses the user'spersonal data within the framework of the

136

Connectivity

law. On the SEAT website you can consult thecurrent data confidentiality statement.

Deactivate SEAT CONNECT serv-ices

Fig. 134 Sticker subsequently affixed to thevehicle that indicates that the SEAT CONNECTservices have been permanently disconnec-ted.

To permanently deactivate the SEAT CON-NECT functionality, go to a specialized work-shop and request the deactivation of thecontrol unit called “Emergency call modulecontrol unit and communication unit”.

Once the “Emergency call module controlunit and communication unit” has been de-activated, the workshop in question generallyaffixes the sticker ››› Fig. 134 to the vehicle,e.g. to the roof console. The sticker indicatesthat “Remote Access” services do not work.

If you sell the vehicle or lend it for a long peri-od of time, warn the buyer or the user that theservices and the control unit are deactivated.

Faults

Even if the prerequisites for the use of SEATCONNECT services are met, there may befactors beyond the control of SEAT that inter-fere with the execution of such services orprevent them. These may be specifically:

● Maintenance, repair, deactivation, softwareupdate and technical expansion of telecom-munication equipment, satellites, servers anddata banks.● Change of the mobile telephony standardfor the transmission of mobile data by the tel-ecommunications service provider, for exam-ple, from UMTS to EDGE or GPRS.● Disconnection of an existing mobile phonestandard by the telecommunications serviceprovider.● Interference, disturbance or interruption inthe reception of the mobile phone and GPSsignal due to aspects such as high-speeddriving, solar storms, meteorological influen-ces, topography, blocking equipment and theintensive use of mobile phones in the radiocells in question.● When in areas with zero or insufficient mo-bile telephony or GPS coverage. Also, for ex-

ample, in tunnels, confined areas betweenvery tall buildings, garages, underpasses,mountains and valleys.● External information from third party sup-plies available with limitations, incomplete orincorrect, e.g. representations of maps.● Countries and regions where SEAT CON-NECT is not offered.

137

Driving

Driving

Drive system and driving

Driving indications

Electric drive system functions.

Delivery of power from the electric engineThe maximum torque of the electric engine isavailable immediately after pressing the ac-celerator pedal.

Brake energy recuperation (charging)When braking the vehicle, electric power isgenerated through the electric engine andstored in the high-voltage battery››› page 139. This also occurs to a lesser ex-tent when the vehicle moves by inertia ordrives downhill in the deceleration phase.

As the charge level of the high-voltage bat-tery increases, the recuperation reduces and,thus, the effect of the engine brake. When thehigh-voltage battery is fully charged, no en-ergy recuperation takes place and the effectof the engine brake is not available ››› .

The energy recuperation can be displayedon the instrument panel display or in the ap-plication installed on the smartphone.

Slow travel functionThe slow travel function consists of drivingslowly, at about 5 km/h (3 mph), forward orreverse without pressing the accelerator ped-al.

The slow travel function is activated automat-ically:

● When the drive system is connected andthe selector lever is placed in the D/B posi-tion or the reverse gear is engaged R.● Each time the selector lever is changed toposition D/B or R.● When the vehicle is travelling less than 10km/h (6 mph) and the driver's door is opened.● When the vehicle is stopped and the brakepedal is pressed, the driver's door opens orthe driver unbuckles the seat belt.

The slow travel function is deactivated if,when the driver's door is closed and the seatbelt is in place:

● The vehicle is travelling at more than 10km/h (6 mph).● The selector lever is in position P or N.● If, after connecting the drive system, the ve-hicle was once in motion.

WARNINGAny accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.

● When the drive system is connected andthe selector lever is in the D/B position orreverse gear is engaged, the vehicle mustbe stopped by pressing the brake pedal.Even when the drive system is switched off,it is possible that the power transmission isnot interrupted completely and the vehiclecontinues to “move slowly”.● Never leave the vehicle with the selectorlever in the N or D/B position. The vehiclewill roll downhill regardless of whether thedrive system is connected or not.

WARNINGAs the level of charge of the high-voltagebattery increases, the effect of the enginebrake caused by the recuperation of thebrake energy is reduced and may even becompletely cancelled out.● Slow down before starting a long dis-tance with a steep descent.● During a long distance with a steep de-scent, reduce the speed with the vehiclebrake.

138


Brake energy recuperation

Fig. 135 On the selector lever: connect thebrake energy recuperation.

Fig. 136 On the instrument panel display: indi-cation of recuperation levels.

The brake energy recuperation can generatea braking effect. This braking effect dependson the selected driving programme and thelevel of charge of the high-voltage battery.

When braking the vehicle and when the vehi-cle moves by inertia or travels downhill in thedeceleration phase, electric power is gener-ated by the electric engine and stored in thehigh-voltage battery. The electric enginethen operates as an alternator and producesa engine brake effect. This process is calledbrake energy recuperation.

The status of the recuperation is indicated inthe power display of the instrument panel››› page 61. When recuperation is active, theneedle goes to the green area of the display.The current recuperation level is displayed onthe instrument panel display ››› Fig. 136.

Given the case, in the application installed onthe smartphone you can view a statistic ofthe energy recuperated over the last 30 mi-nutes. Check the electronic instruction man-ual of the application for this.

The effect of the engine brake is more or lessintense depending on the level of recupera-tion. If the recuperation is very intense, thebrake light of the vehicle may also be switch-ed on. As the charge level of the high-voltagebattery increases, the recuperation reducesand, thus, the effect of the engine brake.When the high-voltage battery is fully charg-ed, no energy recuperation takes place andthe effect of the engine brake is not available.When the vehicle detects that road condi-tions do not allow safe contact between thewheels and the road, the energy recupera-

tion is automatically reduced and, therefore,the effect of the engine brake ››› .

Select a recuperation levelThere are a total of 4 brake energy recupera-tion levels. You can switch between recupera-tion levels 1 to 3 by pressing the selector leverslightly sideways towards ››› Fig. 135 + and

- :

● Push the selector lever slightly to the left toincrease one recuperation level.● Push the selector lever slightly to the rightto decrease one recuperation level.● Push the selector lever to the right for a fewseconds to disconnect the recuperation.

To increase to recuperation level 4, push theselector lever slightly to position B.. Pushing itagain gently in the direction of the arrow , itis changed back to position D and the last re-cuperation level that was selected is activa-ted.

Recuperation level ››› Fig. 136 and mean-ing:

0 The vehicle moves by inertia. Recupera-tion only takes place when braking.

1 Slight recuperation, recuperation level 1

2 Medium recuperation, recuperation lev-el 2 »

139

Driving

Recuperation level ››› Fig. 136 and mean-ing:

3 Intense recuperation, recuperation level3

4 Very intense recuperation, recuperationlevel 4

WARNINGA medium, intense or very intense recuper-ation of brake energy can cause loss oftraction and the vehicle skidding, especial-ly on slippery roads. This could cause lossof control of the vehicle, accidents and se-rious injury.● Never use a medium, intense or very in-tense brake energy recuperation if the con-ditions of visibility, weather, road and traf-fic do not allow it, or if it endangers otherusers on the road due to the accelerationof the vehicle and the driving style.

WARNINGAs the charge level of the high-voltage bat-tery increases, the effect of the enginebrake caused by the recuperation of thebrake energy is reduced and may even becompletely cancelled out. This puts muchgreater demand on the vehicle’s brakes.● When charging the high-voltage batteryin high-altitude locations (e.g. on top of amountain pass), never fully charge it. In thisway, when descending the mountain the

engine braking effect through recuperationwill be enabled.● Slow down before starting a long dis-tance with a steep descent.● During a long distance with a steep de-scent, reduce the speed with the vehiclebrake.

Connecting and disconnect-ing the drive system

Control lamps

It lights up yellow

Failure in the engine management.Go immediately to a specialised workshop and re-quest the electric drive system be checked.



Ignition lock

Fig. 137 Ignition key positions.

When there is no vehicle key in the ignitionlock, the steering column lock may be activa-ted.

Positions of the vehicle key ››› Fig. 137Ignition off. The key can be removed.Ignition is switched on. The steering lockmay be released.Press the brake pedal if the control lamp lights up green. Connection of thedrive system. When the drive system isconnected, release the key. When re-leased, the key returns to position››› Fig. 137 2

Warning that the ignition is connectedWhen the ignition is connected and the driv-er's door is open, the warning message may light on the instrument panel

1

2

3

140


display. Additionally, a warning acoustic sig-nal may sound.

The purpose of the warning is to remember toswitch off the ignition before leaving the vehi-cle.

WARNINGIf the vehicle keys are used negligently orwithout proper attention, accidents and se-rious injuries can occur.● Never leave any key inside the vehiclewhen exiting. The key can connect the drivesystem and certain electrical equipmentcan be operated, such as electric windows,which can cause serious injuries.● When locking the vehicle, never leaveany child or anyone who may need help in-side. They could be trapped in the car in anemergency and will not be able to getthemselves to safety. Thus, for example,depending on the season, a closed vehiclecan reach very high or very low tempera-tures that can cause serious injuries and ill-nesses or even death, especially in thecase of young children.● Never remove the key from the ignitionlock when the vehicle is moving. The steer-ing column lock could suddenly becomelocked and it would be impossible to steerthe vehicle.● The bit of the vehicle key must be com-pletely unfolded and locked.

● Do not fix objects that exceed 100 g in to-tal to the vehicle key.

Note● If the vehicle key remains for a long timein position 2 of the ignition lock with theelectric drive system disconnected, the 12-volt battery will discharge.● The key can only be removed from the ig-nition lock if the selector lever is in positionP. If necessary, press the lock key on theselector lever and release it again.● The key can only be removed from the ig-nition lock if the selector lever is in positionP. If necessary, press the lock key on theselector lever and release it again.

Connecting the drive system

When the electric drive system is connected,the electric engine is connected and the ve-hicle is ready to move.

Requirements for connecting the drivesystemThe drive system can be connected when thefollowing conditions are met:

● The level of charge of the high-voltage bat-tery is sufficient.● There is no charging cable plugged in.

● The temperature of the high-voltage bat-tery is within the operating range.

Connecting the drive system● Connect the ignition ››› page 140.● Press the brake pedal and keep it pressed.If the brake pedal is not pressed, the controllamp comes on in green and the instru-ment panel displays the message The brakepedal is not pressed.● Set the selector lever to the N position orengage the parking lock.● Keep turning the key in the ignition lockwithout stepping on the accelerator. Keep thekey in this position until the control lamp comes on. When the control lamp comeon in the instrument panel display, releasethe key. The needle of the power indicatorgoes from to .● If the control lamp does not turn on,interrupt the process and repeat it.● When you start to move, release the hand-brake.

Noises before starting to moveWhen you connect the drive system you mayhear a “click”. This is quite normal, and nocause for concern. »

141

Driving

Indication that the drive system is connec-tedThe electric engine does not generate no-ticeable noises neither when connecting thedrive system nor when it is running. Therefore,it is not possible to recognise whether thedrive system is running based on the enginenoises. Instead, you can recognised that thedrive system is connected by the followingcharacteristics:

● The needle of the power display located onthe instrument panel is position in ››› page 61.● The lighting of the needles of the instru-ment panel is on, regardless of whether theexterior lighting of the vehicle is on.● The control lamp is on in the instru-ment panel display.● An acoustic signal sounds.

Connecting and disconnecting the drivesystem at very low outside temperaturesIf the outside temperature is very low (ap-proximately -27 °C (-16 °F) and lower), thehigh-voltage battery may freeze and notwork. Then it is not possible to connect thedrive system.

Once the temperature of the high-voltagebattery has risen sufficiently, the drive systemcan be reconnected.

To ensure that the drive system can be con-nected at very low outside temperatures,SEAT recommends leaving the vehicleparked in a place that is protected fromweather conditions.

Starting to move with the electric drivesystem● Connect the drive system. When doing so,press the brake pedal and keep it pressed.● Set the selector lever to the D/B position orengage the reverse gear ››› page 145.● Release the handbrake and brake pedal››› page 157.● Press the accelerator pedal.

WARNINGNever leave the vehicle with the drive sys-tem connected. The vehicle could suddenlystart moving or something unusual couldhappen that could cause damage, fire orserious injury.● Always switch off the ignition beforeleaving the vehicle.● When leaving the vehicle parked or get-ting out of it, always check that the selec-tor lever is in the P position and that thehandbrake is applied and tightened.● When leaving the vehicle, always makesure that all the doors, the windows, therear lid and the bonnet are completelyclosed and locked.

NoteIf the outside temperature is very low and,therefore, the high-voltage battery is verycold, the electrical driving and autonomymay be limited.

Disconnecting the drive system

Perform the following operations only in theorder indicated:● Stop the vehicle.● Park the vehicle ››› page 159● Switch the ignition off.● Bear in mind the indications on the instru-ment panel ››› page 61.

WARNINGNever leave the vehicle with the drive sys-tem connected. The vehicle could suddenlystart moving or something unusual couldhappen that could cause damage, fire orserious injury.● Always switch off the ignition beforeleaving the vehicle.● When leaving the vehicle parked or get-ting out of it, always check that the selec-tor lever is in the P position and that thehandbrake is applied and tightened.● When leaving the vehicle, always makesure that all the doors, the windows, the

142


rear lid and the bonnet are completelyclosed and locked.

WARNINGNever disconnect the drive system whenthe vehicle is in motion. This could causeloss of control of the vehicle, accidents andserious injury.● Airbags and belt tensioners do not work.● The brake servo does not work when theelectric drive system is disconnected. Tostop the vehicle, the brake pedal must bepressed harder.● The power steering does not work withthe electric drive system disconnected andmore strength is needed to turn the steer-ing wheel.● If the key is removed from the ignitionlock, the steering lock could block and itwould not be possible to control the vehi-cle.

WARNINGThe components of the high-voltage sys-tem become extremely hot and couldcause fire and serious injury.● Never park the vehicle in a manner thatany component of the high-voltage systemcomes in contact with highly flammablematerials that may be found under the ve-hicle, e.g. brush, litter, dry grass, etc.

● Never use additional protection for vehi-cle underside of the vehicle or anti-corro-sive products for thermal insulation ele-mennts.

Note● The key can only be removed from the ig-nition lock with the selector lever in posi-tion P.● After disconnecting the electric drivesystem it is possible that the radiator fancontinues to work in the engine compart-ment for a few more minutes, even with theignition switched off or the key outside theignition lock. The radiator fan is automati-cally switched off.

Leaving the vehicle with the drivesystem switched on

If, after stopping the vehicle, the driver leavesthe vehicle with the drive system connectedand a gear range selected, the systemswitches off automatically.

This protects the vehicle against unauthor-ised use.

Warning when leaving the vehicleWhen the driver's door is opened or the seatbelt is unbuckled, a warning signal soundsand the message The vehicle may still

move will appear on the instrument panel dis-play. This is intended to remind the driver todisconnect the ignition before leaving the ve-hicle.

Automatic disconnection of the drive sys-tem.In certain situations, the drive system of thevehicle is automatically switched off. In addi-tion, a warning message may appear in theinstrument panel. The drive system will switchoff when the following conditions are met:

● The vehicle is stopped.● The selector lever is in D/B position.● The slow travel function is not active.● The driver unbuckles his seat belt, opensthe door and removes his foot from the brakepedal.

Automatic connection of the drive systemThe drive system may automatically recon-nect within 30 seconds. To do this, the driver'sdoor must be closed and the seat belt mustbe buckled, as well as meeting one of the fol-lowing conditions:

● The handbrake is on or the selector lever isin position P.● Or , the brake pedal is pressed if the vehicleis moving. »

143

Driving

A short sequence of acoustic signals indi-cates that the drive system has been recon-nected.

If 30 seconds elapse without the drive systembeing reconnected, the drive system can bereconnected manually as described in››› page 141. In this case, bear in mind themessages shown on the instrument paneldisplay.

WARNINGIf the vehicle is left unattended with thedrive system connected, accidents and se-rious injuries can occur.● Never leave the vehicle unattended withthe drive system connected.● Always switch off the ignition and placethe selector lever in position P before leav-ing the vehicle.● When parking or getting out of the vehi-cle, always check that the selector lever isin the P position and that the handbrake isapplied and tightened.● When leaving the vehicle, always makesure that all the doors, the windows, therear lid and the bonnet are completelyclosed and locked.

Electronic immobilizer

The electronic immobiliser helps to preventthe drive system from being connected with

an unauthorised key and, consequently, thevehicle being put in motion.

The vehicle key has a built-in chip. When avalid key is inserted into the ignition lock, thechip automatically deactivates the electronicimmobiliser.

The electronic immobiliser will be activatedagain automatically as soon as you pull thekey out of the ignition lock.

For this reason, the vehicle's drive system canonly be connected with a properly codedOriginal SEAT key. This type of keys can bepurchased from a SEAT dealer.

NoteThe correct operation of the vehicle is onlyguaranteed with the original SEAT keys.

Problems and solutions

Cannot remove the vehicle key from theignition lockAn unauthorised key has been inserted intothe ignition lock.

To remove the key, proceed as follows:

● Press the lock key on the selector lever andrelease it again.● Remove the key from the ignition switch.

The drive system cannot be connectedIf an unauthorised vehicle key is used or thereis a fault in the system, an indication appearson the instrument panel display.

● Use an authorised key.● If the fault continues, seek specialist assis-tance.

The vehicle has stopped because thehigh-voltage battery has dischargedThe relevant text message will appear in theinstrument panel display.

If the vehicle has stopped because the high-voltage battery has discharged, there is thepossibility of reconnecting the electric drivesystem to travel a few meters and be able toremove the vehicle from the flow of traffic orfrom a level crossing, etc.

● Switch the ignition off.● Reconnect the drive system.● Press the accelerator pedal to start moving.

This process can be repeated a second time,although the distance that can be travelledand the power is reduced considerably.

If the vehicle can no longer move, seek theassistance of specialised personnel.

Charge the high-voltage battery››› page 165.

144


Gear selection

Control lamps

It lights up red

There is a fault in the electrical system.If the message Error is shown on the instrumentpanel display: Electr. Syst. Stop the ve-hicle! Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it ispossible and safe, park it outdoors and disconnectthe drive system. Seek specialist assistance.

and They light up red

The electrical system has overheated.If the message Electrical system overhea-ted is shown on the instrument panel display.Stop! Manual! Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it ispossible and safe, park it outdoors and disconnectthe drive system. Do not pour coolant! Seek spe-cialist assistance.

and

They light up yellow

Brake energy recuperation is not possible.If the message Error is shown on the instrumentpanel display: Recuperation. Check themanual.There is a failure in the brake energy recuperation.Autonomy may be limited. Contact a specialisedworkshop.

and

They light up yellow

Limited braking capacity.If the message Error is shown on the instrumentpanel display: Limited braking capacity.The braking system does not work or has a fault.Contact a specialised workshop.

It lights up green

The engine does not start.The brake pedal is not pressed when changing theposition of the selector lever from N. To change theposition of the selector lever, press the brake pedal.

Flashes green

The lock button prevents starting to move.The vehicle is prevented from moving forwards. Theselector lever locking button is not engaged.



Gear selector lever

Fig. 138 Gear selector lever

The vehicle has a forward gear D/B and a re-verse gear R.

The selector lever has a lock. To change theselector lever from position P or N to anotherposition, switch on the ignition, press thebrake pedal and press the lock button of thelever button in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 138.

– Parking lockThe drive wheels are locked mechanically.Select this position only when the vehicle isstopped.

– Reverse gearThe reverse gear is engaged. Select this posi-tion only when the vehicle is stopped. »

145

Driving

- NeutralThe electric drive system is in the neutral po-sition. No movement is transmitted to thewheels and the braking effect of the electricengine does not occur.

– Permanent forward drive positionThe electric drive system is in the normal pro-gramme (brake energy recuperation levels0-3).

– Very intense brake energy recupera-tionVery intense brake energy recuperation is de-celeration phases (brake energy recupera-tion level 4).

– Change between D and BChanged between D and B by pushing theselector lever gently backwards from positionD/B ››› Fig. 138. The selector lever always re-turns to D/B position. Pushing it gently backagain, it changes back to D.

Selector lever lockIn positions P and N, the selector lever lockprevents the position selector lever from be-ing changed by mistake and, as a conse-quence, stops the vehicle from moving with-out being desired.

To release the selector lever lock, press thebrake pedal and keep it pressed with the igni-

tion switched on. At the same time, press thelock button on the selector lever.

If the selector lever is quickly changed fromposition moving past N (i.e. from reverse gearto D/B), the lever does not lock. This allows,for example to remove a vehicle that has be-come stuck by “swinging it”. If the selectorlever remains for more than approx. 1 secondin position N without having the brake pedalpressed or travelling at a speed below about5 km/h (3 mph), the lever locks.

In rare cases it may happen that the selectorlever lock does not engage. In this case, thetraction is cancelled to prevent the vehiclefrom moving accidentally. To engage the se-lector lever lock, proceed as follows:

● Press the brake pedal and release it again.● OR: place the lever in the P or N positionand then select a gear.

WARNINGIf the selector lever is placed in an inappro-priate position, vehicle control could belost and an accident and serious injurycould result.● Never accelerate when changing the po-sition lever.● Never engage reverse gear or parkinglock while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNINGAny accidental movement of the vehiclecould result in serious injury.● As a driver, never leave your seat whenthe drive system is connected and a gear isengaged. If you have to leave the vehiclewith the electric drive system connected,always engage the handbrake and alwaysplace the selector lever in position P.● Never leave the vehicle with the selectorlever in the N, R or D/B positions. The vehi-cle could be set in motion depending onthe inclination of the road.● When the drive system is connected andthe selector lever is D/B o R position, thevehicle must be stopped by pressing thebrake pedal.● Never engage reverse gear while the ve-hicle is in motion.

CAUTION● If the vehicle is stopped but the hand-brake is not engaged and the brake pedalis released with the selector lever in posi-tion P, the vehicle can move a few centime-tres forward or backward.● Never allow the vehicle to move with thelever in the N position, especially when thedrive system is disconnected.

146


NoteIf the selector lever is left for a long time ina position other than P with the ignition off,the 12-volt battery may discharge.

Driving with an automatic gearbox

Driving down slopesThe steeper the slope, the higher the selectedbrake energy recuperation level will have tobe. A high recuperation level increases thebraking effect of the electric engine. Never letthe vehicle roll downhill with the selector lev-er in the neutral position N.

● You should reduce speed accordingly.● Set the selector lever to the B position.

Stop and start moving uphillWhen the vehicle stops uphill with the forwardgear engaged, this will have to be avoidedwhenever you go backwards by pressing thebrake pedal or engaging the handbrake. Donot release the brake pedal or handbrake un-til you start moving.

Kick-downThe kick-down function enables maximumacceleration by pressing the acceleratorpedal fully with the selector lever in the D/Bposition. In the Eco and Eco+ driving profiles,

the limitation of the maximum possible speedis cancelled when the kick-down function isused.

The vehicle does not move even though agear range is selectedIf the vehicle does not move in the desired di-rection, the system may not have engagedthe gear range correctly.

● Press the brake pedal and select the gearrange again.● If the vehicle still does not move in the de-sired direction, there is a fault in the system.Request the help of specialised personneland have the system checked.

WARNINGRapid acceleration can cause loss of trac-tion and the vehicle skidding, especially onslippery roads. This could cause loss ofcontrol of the vehicle, accidents and seri-ous injury.● Never press down hard or suddenly onthe acclerator pedal (kick-down) if theconditions of visibility, weather, road andtraffic do not allow it, or if it endangers oth-er users on the road due to the accelera-tion of the vehicle and the driving style.● Always adapt the driving style to trafficconditions.● When the ASR is disconnected, the drivewheels may skid, especially if the road is

wet, slippery or dirty. This can cause thevehicle to be neither steered nor control-led.

WARNINGNever move the selector lever from positionP if the handbrake is not engaged. Other-wise, if the vehicle is on a slope, it couldstart moving unexpectedly and cause anaccident and serious injuries.

CAUTION● When stopping uphill with a selectedgear range, do not step on the acceleratorto prevent the vehicle from moving back-ward. Press the brake pedal to avoid un-necessarily overloading the electric drivesystem.● If the vehicle moves with the ignition andelectric drive system disconnected or withthe 12-volt battery discharged or without a12-volt battery and the selector lever in theN position for a prolonged period of time orat a high speed, the electric drive systemwill suffer damages. The vehicle can onlybe towed if certain conditions are met››› page 48.

147

Driving

Hill driving assistant

How it works

The hill start assistant helps start moving up-hill while keeping the vehicle actively stop-ped.

The hill start assistant is automaticallyconnected if the following conditions aremet simultaneously:● The vehicle is stopped facing a hill by step-ping on the brake pedal until the vehiclestarts moving.● The engine rotates correctly.● The gear range D is selected or the reversegear is engaged.

To start moving, remove your foot from thebrake pedal and accelerate immediately.When starting to moving, the brake is re-leased progressively.

The hill start assistant is immediately dis-connected:● If any of the conditions mentioned aboveceases to be met.● If the driver door is opened.● If the electric drive system is disconnected.● If there is any failure in the electric drivesystem.

● The selector lever is in N position.

WARNING● If the vehicle does not start moving im-mediately after releasing the brake pedal,it could roll backwards under certain cir-cumstances. In this case, immediatelypress the brake pedal or engage the hand-brake.● If the engine stops, immediately press thebrake pedal or engage the handbrake.● If, when driving uphill in heavy traffic, youwant to prevent the vehicle from rollingbackwards when you start moving, beforemoving press the brake pedal for a few sec-onds.

Steering

Information relating to vehiclesteering

Electro-mechanical power steering assiststhe driver when steering.

Electro-mechanical power steering adaptselectronically to the speed of the car, torqueand turning angle. The electromechanicalsteering only work with the drive system con-nected.

If the power steering does not work properlyor does not work at all, you will have to use

much more strength than usual to turn thesteering wheel.

Mechanical locking of the steeringTo make it hard to steal the vehicle, alwayslock the steering system before leaving it.

The steering column is locked by removingthe key from the ignition lock with the vehiclestopped. Turn the steering wheel slightly untilthe steering lock has engaged.

To release the steering lock, turn the steeringwheel slightly to reduce the pressure. Insertthe key in the ignition lock. Hold the steeringwheel in this position and switch on the igni-tion.

WARNINGIf the power steering does not work, youhave to use much more strength to turn thesteering wheel and this can hinder the con-trol of the vehicle.● The power steering only works with thedrive system connected.● Never allow the vehicle to move when thedrive system is disconnected.● Never remove the key from the ignitionlock when the vehicle is moving. The steer-ing lock could suddenly become blockedand it would be impossible to steer the ve-hicle.

148


CAUTIONIf the vehicle needs to be towed, leave theignition on so that the steering wheel is notblocked and the turn signals, the horn andthe windscreen wiper work.

Control lamp

It lights up red

Stop driving! The electromechanical steering isfaulty.Have the steering checked immediately at a special-ised workshop.

It lights up yellow

The operation of the electromechanical steering islimited.Have the steering checked immediately at a special-ised workshop. If the warning lamp does not come onagain after restarting the engine and driving a shortdistance, it is not necessary to check the steering.

The 12-volt battery was disconnected and reconnec-ted. Drive a short distance at 15-20 km/h (9-12 mph).



Driving profiles

Introduction

By means of the driving profiles, the drivercan adapt different characteristics of the ve-hicle systems to the current driving situationand to an economic driving style. Among thesystems that can be adapted are, for exam-ple, engine management and air condition-ing.

The degree of influence of the vehicle config-uration on the different driving profiles de-pends on the vehicle’s equipment.

You can change the driving profile both withthe vehicle stopped and while in motion ››› .After selecting a driving profile, the vehicle,except the engine, is immediately configuredaccording to the new profile. When trafficpermits, briefly remove your foot from the ac-celerator so that the selected driving profile isalso activated for the engine.

WARNINGAdjusting the driving profile while drivingcan distract attention from traffic andcause accidents.● Always drive as carefully and responsiblyas possible.

Adjusting a driving profile

Fig. 139 At the bottom of the centre console:button for selecting the driving profile.

Selecting a driving profile● Switch the ignition on.● To change the driving profile, press the driv-ing profile select button0 ››› Fig. 139 severaltimes.

When changing the driving profile, a messageis is displayed on the instrument panel dis-play for a few seconds. »

149

Driving

When or profiles are selected, thecorresponding inscription remains on in theselection button of the driving profile››› Fig. 139.

Characteristics of driving profilesThis driving profile is always adjusted

when the drive system is connected. Allthe power of the electric engine is avail-able. The Climatronic works in normalmode. When the Normal profile is selec-ted, the Driving Mode Normal mes-sage appears on the instrument paneldisplay.In the ECO driving profile, the power of

the electric engine is limited to favourlower energy consumption. The maxi-mum speed is reduced. The Climatronicswitches to Eco mode, optimal for lowconsumption, in which the fan and thedefrosting/demisting functions are stillavailable. When the ECO profile is selec-ted, the Driving Mode Eco messageappears on the instrument panel dis-play.

In the ECO+ driving profile, the powerof the electric engine is limited evenmore to favour even lower energy con-sumption. The maximum speed is re-duced. The heating and cooling func-tions of the Climatronic are disconnec-ted; the fan and the defrosting/demistingfunctions are still available. When the

Normal

ECO

ECO+

ECO+ profile is selected, the DrivingMode Eco+ message appears on the in-strument panel display.

WARNINGThe driving properties may change de-pending on the selected driving profile.Never allow the selection of the driving pro-file to induce you to take any risk that com-promises safety.● Adapt your speed and driving style at alltimes to suit visibility, weather, road andtraffic conditions.

NoteThe power limitation of the electric enginein the ECO and ECO + driving profiles canbe cancelled temporarily by pressing theaccelerator pedal as far as it will go (“kick-down”).

Driving tips

Running in

Running in new tyres and brake pads● Replacement of wheel rims and new tyres››› page 190.● Information about brakes ››› page 155.

Driving on flooded roads

To prevent damage to the vehicle driving onflooded roads, take the following into ac-count:

● The water should never come above thelower edge of the bodywork.● Drive at pedestrian speed.

WARNINGAfter driving through flooded zones, brak-ing effectiveness can decrease if the brakediscs or pads are damp ››› page 155.

CAUTIONDriving through flooded areas may dam-age vehicle components such as the drivesystem, transmission or electrical system.

Note● Check the depth of the water before en-tering the flooded zone.● Do not stop in the water, drive in reverse,or stop the drive system.● Vehicles travelling in the opposite direc-tion cause waves that could exceed yourvehicle's critical height.● Avoid driving through salt water (corro-sion) ››› page 199.

150

Driver assistance systems

Trips abroad

In some countries, certain safety regulationscan be in force that differ from the vehicle'stechnical characteristics. Before travellingabroad, SEAT recommends you consult atechnical service about the legal require-ments and the following points:

● Does the vehicle need technical modifica-tions for driving abroad, for example, adjust-ment of the headlamps?● Does the vehicle have all the tools, diag-nostics equipment and spare parts requiredfor inspections and repairs?● Are there any SEAT dealers in the destina-tion country?● Will it be possible to find operating fluidsthat meet SEAT specifications in the countryof destination?● Are special tyres required in the destinationcountry?

CAUTIONSEAT does not accept liability for any dam-age to the vehicle due to an inadequateservice or the non-availability of genuinespare parts.


Cruise control system(CCS)*

Control lamp

It lights up green

The Cruise Control System (GRA) is switched on andactive.

The control lamps light up when the ignition isswitched on and should turn off after approxi-mately 2 seconds. This is the time taken forthe function check.


Introduction

The cruise control system (CCS) is able tomaintain the set speed from 20 km/h (15mph).

The CSS only reduces vehicle speed byceasing to accelerate, not by actively brakingthe vehicle ››› .

Travelling down hills with the CCSIf the GRA cannot maintain a constant vehiclespeed downhill, brake and connect the brakeenergy recuperation. The GRA is temporarilydisabled by pressing the brake.

Automatic offThe GRA disconnects automatically or istemporarily interrupted:

● If the system detects a fault that could af-fect the working order of the CCS.● If you press and maintain the acceleratorpedal for a certain time, driving faster thanthe stored speed.● If the dynamic driving control systems inter-vene, ASR, ESC, etc.● If the brake pedal is pressed.● If the airbag is triggered.● If the lever is taken out of the D/B position.● If the emergency braking function in the citybrakes the vehicle.

WARNINGUse of GRA could cause accidents and se-vere injuries if it is not possible to drive at aconstant speed maintaining the safety dis-tance.● Do not use GRA in heavy traffic, if the dis-tance from the vehicle in front is insuffi-cient, on steep roads, with several bends or »

151

Driving

in slippery circumstances or on floodedroads.● Never use the CCS when driving off-roador on unpaved roads.● Adapt your speed and the distance to thevehicles ahead in line with visibility, weath-er, the condition of the road and the trafficsituation.● To avoid unexpected operation of thecruise control system, turn it off every timeyou finish using it.● It is dangerous to use a set speed which istoo high for other conditions.● If driving down a steep gradient, the GRAcannot maintain a constant speed. Thespeed can increase. In this case, reducethe speed by braking or connecting thebrake energy recuperation.

Operating the speed limiter withthe turn signal lever

Fig. 140 On the turn signal lever: controls foroperating the GRA.

Connecting● Move the control ››› Fig. 140 1 to .

If no speed has been programmed, the sys-tem will not control it.

Activating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 140 2 in area .

The current speed is stored and the cruisecontrol is activated.

Temporarily interrupting● Move the control ››› Fig. 140 1 to orstep on the brake.

The cruise control system is switched off tem-porarily. The speed is stored.

Reinstating the cruise control● Press button ››› Fig. 140 2 in area .

Cruise control is activated at the storedspeed.

Adjusting the speedWhile the GRA is set, the stored speed can beadjusted with button ››› Fig. 140 2 :

● To increase in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 140 2 in the area.● To increase the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 140 2 pressed down inthe area .● To reduce in increments of 1 km/h (1 mph)briefly press button ››› Fig. 140 2 in the area.● To decrease the speed without interruption,keep button ››› Fig. 140 2 pressed down inthe area .

The vehicle adapts the current speed by ac-celerating or stopping accelerating. The vehi-cle does not brake actively.

Switching off● Move control ››› Fig. 140 1 to .

152


The system is disconnected and the memo-rised speed is deleted.

Lane Assist*

Introduction

Fig. 141 On the windscreen: field of vision ofthe Lane Assist system camera.

The Lane Assist System helps the driver stayin their lane. This function is not suitable andis not designed to keep the vehicle automati-cally in the lane.

Using the camera located in the windscreen,the Lane Assist system detects the possiblelines dividing the lanes. When the vehicle in-voluntarily approaches a dividing line it hasdetected, the system notifies the driver with acorrective steering movement. This move-ment can be over-regulated at any time.

No warning is produced with the turn signalsactivated, given that the Lane Assist systemunderstands that a lane change is required.

System limitsUse the Lane Assist system only on large,well-maintained motorways and highways.

The system is not available under the follow-ing conditions:

● The driving speed allowed is below 55 km/h(32 mph).● The system has not detected any lanelines.● Temporarily in very sporty driving situations.

Control lamp

It lights up green

Lane Assist system active and available.

It lights up yellow

The Lane Assist system intervening with a rectifica-tion of the steering.

If the corresponding warning lamp does notlight up on the instrument cluster, this canmean that:

● The minimum speed has not been reached.

● The system does not recognise the lanelines.● Or the system is not available.

If the latter persists, go to a specialised work-shop to repair the fault.

Some control and warning lamps will light upbriefly when the ignition is switched on tocheck certain functions. They will switch offafter a few seconds.


Operating mode

Fig. 142 In the centre console: button to con-nect the lane assist system »

153

Driving

Connecting and disconnecting the laneassist systemThe lane assist system is always activatedwhen the ignition is switched on. Pressing thebutton ››› Fig. 142 enables to deacti-vate the assist system until the next time theengine is started.

The button ››› Fig. 142 is backlit if thesystem has been disconnected or has a fault.

The Lane Assist system can actively interveneas of approximately 60 km/h (35 mph) if ithas detected lane lines.

If the control lamp of the instrument paneldisplay is off, it means that the assist systemis connected but not ready to adjust steering(system in passive state) or disconnected.

When you activate a turn signal, the systemtemporarily goes into a passive state in orderto allow manual lane change.

Driver intervention promptIf the steering is not corrected manually, thesystem prompts the driver through an indica-tion on the instrument panel display andacoustic warnings to actively take the steer-ing wheel.

If no reaction is obtained from the driver, thesystem switches to a passive state.

Through an indication on the instrument pan-el display and acoustic warnings, the driver is

also prompted to drive through the centre ofthe lane if the steering correction lasts morethan reasonable.

Steering wheel vibrationThe following situations can cause vibrationin the steering wheel and require the driver totake active control of driving:

● If the system ceases to display the lanelines while assisting with steering.

Switching off the Lane Assist system in thefollowing situationsDue to the limits of the Lane Assist system,switch it off in the following situations:

● When more attention is required of the driv-er● When driving in a sporty style● In unfavourable weather conditions● On roads in poor condition● In areas of road works

WARNINGThe intelligent technology in the Lane As-sist system cannot change the limits im-posed by the laws of physics and by thevery nature of the system. Careless or un-controlled use of the Lane Assist systemmay cause accidents and injury. The sys-tem is not a replacement for driver aware-ness.

● Always adapt your speed and the dis-tance to the vehicles ahead in line with visi-bility, weather conditions, the condition ofthe road and the traffic situation.● Always keep your hands on the steeringwheel so it can be turned at any time.● The Lane Assist system does not detectall road markings. The road surfaces, roadstructures or objects in poor condition canbe incorrectly detected as road markingsunder certain circumstances by the LaneAssist system. In such situations, switch theLane Assist system off immediately.● Please observe the indications on the in-strument panel and act as is necessary.● In the following situations there may becounter-productive interventions of thesystem or it may be that the system doesnot intervene at all. In these situations, spe-cial attention is required from the driverand, where appropriate, the temporary de-activation of the lane assist warning sys-tem:– In very sporty driving situations.– In adverse weather conditions and

roads in poor condition.– When passing through areas undergo-

ing works.– Before gradient changes of grade and

river beds.● Always pay attention to the vehicle's sur-roundings.

154

Braking and parking

● When the area of vision of the camerabecomes dirty, covered or is damaged, theLane Assist system function can be affec-ted.

CAUTIONIn order to avoid influencing the operationof the system, the following points must betaken into account:● Regularly clean the area of vision of thecamera and keep it clean state, free fromsnow or ice ››› Fig. 141.● Do not cover the area of vision of thecamera.● Check that the area of vision of the wind-screen camera is not damaged.

Note● The Lane Assist system can be automati-cally disconnected if it registers a fault.● The lane departure warning system hasbeen exclusively developed for driving onpaved roads only.● If the Lane Assist system does not work asdescribed in this chapter, do not use it andcontact a specialised workshop.● If there is a fault in the system, have itchecked by a specialised workshop.

Braking and parking

Braking system

Control lamps

It lights up red

Brake fluid level is too low ››› page 184; or, failure inthe braking system. Do not carry on driving!

It lights up red

Handbrake applied ››› page 157.The warning lamp turns off when the handbrake is re-leased.

WARNING● If the brake warning lamp does not goout or if it lights up when driving, the brakefluid level in the reservoir is too lo so thereis a risk of an accident ››› page 184, Brakefluid. Stop the vehicle and do not drive on.Obtain technical assistance.● If the brake warning lamp lights up to-gether with the ABS lamp this could bedue to an ABS fault. When this functionfails, the rear wheels can lock up. Undercertain circumstances, the rear of the vehi-cle may skid, with the danger of losing con-trol. Stop and seek technical assistance.

Information about the brakes

New brake padsFor the first 200 to 300 km (100 to 200miles), new brake pads have not yet reachedtheir maximum braking capacity, and need tobe “run in” first. However, you can compen-sate for the slightly reduced braking effect byapplying more pressure on the brake pedal.Avoid overloading the brakes while runningthem in.

WearThe rate of wear on the brake pads dependsa great deal on how you drive and the condi-tions in which the vehicle is operated. This is aparticular problem in urban traffic and shortstretches, or with very sporty driving.

Depending on the speed, the braking forceand the environmental conditions (for exam-ple, the temperature, air humidity, etc.) noisesmay be produced on braking.

Wet roads or road saltIn certain situations (for example, on drivingthrough flooded areas, in severe downpoursor after washing the vehicle) the braking ac-tion could be delayed if the discs and padsare damp, or frozen in winter. In this case thebrakes should be “dried” by pressing thebrake pedal several times. »

155

Driving

At high speed and with the windscreen wipersactivated, the brake pads will briefly touchthe brake discs. This takes place, althoughunnoticeable to the driver, at regular intervalsto improve the response time of the brakeswhen they are wet.

The effectiveness of the brakes can also betemporarily reduced if the vehicle is driven forsome distance without using the brakes whenthere is a lot of salt on the road in winter. Thelayer of salt that accumulates on the discsand pads can be removed by gently apply-ing the brakes a few times.

CorrosionThere may be a tendency for corrosion toform on the discs and dirt to build up on thebrake pads if the vehicle is used infrequentlyor the brakes are not used very often.

If the brakes are not used frequently, or if rusthas formed on the disks, it is advisable toclean off the pads and disks by braking firmlya few times at a moderately high speed ››› .

Fault in the brake systemIf the brake pedal travel should ever increasesuddenly, this may mean that one of the twobrake circuits has failed. Drive immediately tothe nearest specialised workshop and havethe fault repaired. Drive there slowly and re-member that you will have to apply more

pressure on the brake pedal and allow forlonger stopping distances.

Low brake fluid levelMalfunctions can occur in the brake system ifthe brake fluid level is too low. The brake fluidlevel is monitored electronically.

Brake servoThe electromechanical brake servo increasesthe pressure that you exert when you pressthe brake pedal. It only works when the vehi-cle’s ignition or drive system is switched on.

WARNINGAny anomaly in the brake system can in-crease the braking distance, with the re-sulting risk of an accident.● New brake pads and discs must be run inand do not have the correct friction duringthe first 200 km (124 miles). This reducedbraking capacity may be offset by pressingon the brake pedal a little harder.● If you are driving on roads which havebeen salted, braking effectiveness may bedecreased.● Brakes can overheat if used excessivelyon slopes. Before driving down a long steepslope, it is advisable to reduce speed andchange down into a lower gear or range.Therefore, using the engine brake relievesthe brakes.

● Gentle continuous braking causes thebrakes to overheat and the braking dis-tance will increase. Apply and then releasethe brakes alternately.● Apply the brakes heavily to clean thebrake system only in a suitable traffic situa-tion. Do not put other road users in danger:there is risk of causing an accident.● Ensure the vehicle does not move while inneutral, when the engine is stopped. Thebraking distance is increased considerablywhen the brake servo is not active.● If the brake is subjected to high stresses,vapour bubbles may form in the brake sys-tem's pipes. This reduces the efficiency ofthe brakes.● Non-standard or damaged front spoilerscould restrict the airflow to the brakes andcause them to overheat. Before purchasingaccessories please read the relevant in-structions.

CAUTION● Never let the brakes “drag” by leavingyour foot on the pedal when it is not neces-sary to brake. This overheats the brakes, re-sulting in longer stopping distances andgreater wear.● Before driving down a long, steep gradi-ent, it is advisable to reduce speed and se-lect a lower gear. This makes use of enginebraking and relieves the brakes. If you stillhave to use the brakes, it is better to brake

156

Braking and parking

firmly at intervals than to apply the brakescontinuously.

Note● If the brake servo is out of action, for ex-ample when the car is being towed, you willhave to press the brake pedal considerablyharder than normal to make up for the lackof servo assistance.● If you wish to equip the vehicle with ac-cessories such as a front spoiler or wheelcovers, it is important that the flow of air tothe front wheels is not obstructed, other-wise the brakes can overheat.

Handbrake

Fig. 143 Handbrake between the front seats.

The handbrake should be applied firmly toprevent the vehicle from accidentally moving.

Apply the handbrake when you leave yourvehicle and when you park.

Applying the handbrake– Pull the handbrake lever up ››› Fig. 143. The

handbrake is set when the control lamp lights up.

Releasing the handbrake– Pull the lever slightly up, press the unlock

button in the direction of the arrow››› Fig. 143 and lower the lever completely››› .

Always pull the handbrake all the way up, toavoid driving off while the brake is on ››› .

WARNING● Never use the handbrake to stop the vehi-cle when it is in motion. The braking dis-tance is considerably longer, becausebraking is only applied to the rear wheels.Risk of accident!● Failure to fully lower the handbrake levercan affect the operation of the system, andcan also cause heating and wear of therear brakes.

CAUTIONAlways apply the handbrake before youleave the vehicle. In addition, engage firstor rear gear in the gradient function, or setthe selection lever to P.

Stabilisation and brake as-sistance systems

Control lamps

It lights up

Fault in the ESC or the ABS, or,disconnection causedby the system.The ESC works in combination with the ABS. If theABS fails, the lamp also lights up.

Flashes

ESC or ASR activated.

It lights up

Fault in the ASR or disconnection caused by the sys-tem.

Flashes

ASR working.

It lights up

ABS faulty or does not work.

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check. »

157

Driving


Brake assist systems

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)*The ESC helps to improve safety. It reducesthe tendency to skid and improves the stabili-ty and roadholding of the vehicle. The ESCdetects critical handling situations, such asvehicle understeer or oversteer, or wheelspinon the driving wheels. It stabilises the vehicleby braking individual wheels or by reducingthe engine torque. The warning lamp willflash on the instrument panel when the ESC isintervening .

The ESC includes the anti-lock brake system(ABS), the hydraulic brake assist (HBA), thetraction control system (ASR) and the elec-tronic differential lock (EDS)

ESC also helps stabilise the vehicle bychanging the torque.

Anti-lock brake system (ABS)ABS prevents the wheels from locking up un-der braking until the vehicle has reached avirtual standstill. You can continue to steer thevehicle even when the brakes are on full.Keep your foot on the brake pedal and do not

pump the brakes. You will feel the brake pedalpulsate while the ABS is working.

If the running gear or brake system is modi-fied, the effectiveness of the ABS could be se-verely limited.

Hydraulic Brake Assist (HBA)*The brake assist system can reduce the re-quired braking distance. The braking force isautomatically boosted if you press the brakepedal quickly in an emergency. You mustkeep pressing the brake pedal until the dan-ger has passed.

Traction control system (ASR)In the event of wheelspin, the traction controlsystem reduces the engine torque to matchthe amount of grip available. This helps thecar to start moving, accelerate or climb agradient.

Electronic differential lock (EDL)*When the EDL detects wheelspin, it brakesthe spinning wheel and directs the power tothe other driven wheel. This function is activeup to approximately 100 km/h (62 mph).

To prevent the disc brake of the braked wheelfrom overheating, the EDL cuts out automati-cally if subjected to excessive loads. The ve-hicle can still be driven. The EDL will switch onagain automatically when the brake hascooled down.

Electronic brake pressure distribution(EBV)In all vehicles, when the brakes are applied,the centre of gravity of the vehicle moves for-ward. As a consequence, there is a dangerthat the rear wheels may lock due to their lowtraction. The electronic brake pressure distri-bution controls the brake pressure for the rearwheels and ensures that this pressure is dis-tributed optimally between the front and rearaxles. Under normal circumstances it pre-vents the rear part of the vehicle from skid-ding due to excessive braking of the rearwheels. The function of the electronic brakepressure distribution is incorporated in theABS function.

Electromechanical brake servo (eBKV)With the ignition switched on, the electrome-chanical brake servo supports the force ofthe foot by increasing the pressure that thedriver exerts on the brake pedal. After discon-necting the ignition, the assistance of thebrake servo is progressively reduced. Oncestopped, immobilise the vehicle to prevent itfrom moving ››› page 159.

If the electromechanical brake servo doesnot work, the yellow control lamps and on the instrument panel display light up atthe same time. When braking with the faultyelectromechanical brake servo, vibration ofthe brake pedal may occur.

158

Braking and parking

If the electromechanical brake servo is notworking, the brake pedal must be pressedharder, as the braking distance increases dueto the lack of assistance from the servo brake.

Brake blendingThe brake energy recuperation can generatea braking effect ››› page 139. This braking ef-fect depends on the selected driving pro-gramme and the level of charge of the high-voltage battery. If the braking effect causedby the recuperation is very intense, the vehi-cle’s brake lights with turn on. The electric en-gine, when operating as an alternator, cangenerate braking torque on the front wheelsbased on the RPM and the temperature andcharge level of the high-voltage battery.

These variable parameters cause fluctuatingelectric decelerations which are hydraulical-ly compensated according to the driver’s de-sires. This function is called “brake blending”and it combines mechanical braking with theengine brake effect.

WARNINGDriving at high speed on icy, slippery wetground can result in loss of vehicle controland serious injury to the driver and passen-gers.● The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS or HBA systemsare neither in conditions to exceed the lim-its established by the laws of physics. Al-ways bear this in mind, especially on wet or

slippery roads. If you notice the systemscutting in, you should reduce your speedimmediately to suit the road and trafficconditions. Do not be encouraged to takerisks by the presence of more safety sys-tems. If you do, an accident may occur.● Please remember that the accident riskalways increases if you drive fast, espe-cially in corners or on a slippery road, or ifyou follow too close behind the vehicle infront of you. The ESC, ABS, ASR, EDS or HBAsystem cannot prevent accidents from oc-curing: risk of accidents!● Accelerate with caution on slippery sur-faces (for example, icy or snow-covered).Despite the control systems, the drivenwheels could spin, affecting the stability ofthe vehicle: risk of accident!

Note● The ABS and ASR will only operate cor-rectly if the four wheels have identicaltyres. Any differences in the rolling radiusof the tyres can cause the system to re-duce engine power when this is not desired.● The regulating processes of the systemscan causes noises when they are in opera-tion.● If the warning lamp or lights up,there could be a fault ››› page 69.● Any modifications made to the vehicle(for example, to the engine, brake system,running gear or to the combination of

wheels and tyres) may affect the operationof the ABS, ASR and EDS.

Parking

Parking the vehicle

When parking your vehicle, all legal require-ments should be observed.

Always note the following points when park-ing the vehicle:

● Park the vehicle on a suitable surface ››› .● Apply the handbrake ››› page 157.● Set the selector lever to the P position.● Connect the drive system.● Turn the steering wheel slightly to engagethe steering lock.● When leaving the vehicle, take all keys withyou.

Additionally, on steep slopes and inclinesBefore switching off the engine, rotate thesteering wheel so that if the vehicle shouldmove, it will be held by the kerb.

● On slopes, turn the front wheels so thatthey are against the edge of the kerb.● Uphill, turn the wheels towards the centre ofthe road. »

159

Driving

WARNING● Avoid parking the vehicle where the hotexhaust system could ignite inflammablematerials, such as dry grass, low bushes,spilt fuel or flammable materials.● Do not leave passengers inside a closedvehicle, they may not be able to opendoors or windows. Locked doors hinder thepossibility of a rescue.● Children should not be left alone in thevehicle. They could tamper with the hand-brake or the gears, which could cause thevehicle to move without control.● Depending on weather conditions, it maybecome extremely hot or cold inside thevehicle. This can be fatal.

Help with parking and ma-noeuvring

Parking distance warningsystem*

Introduction

The parking distance warning system assiststhe driver when parking. If the rear of the ve-hicle is approaching an obstacle, an intermit-tent audible warning is emitted. The shorterthe distance, the shorter the intervals be-tween tones. If the vehicle is too close to theobstacle, the audible warning becomes con-stant.

If you continue to approach an obstaclewhen the sound is continuous, this means thesystem can no longer measure the distance.

Sensors situated on the rear bumper transmitand receive ultrasound. Using the ultrasoundsignal (transmission, reflection from the ob-stacles and reception), this system continu-ously calculates the distance between thebumper and the obstacle.

WARNINGThe parking distance warning system can-not replace the driver's assessment of thesituation.

● The sensors have blind spots in which ob-stacles and people are not registered.● Always observe the area around the vehi-cle, as the sensors do not always detectsmall children, animals or objects.● The surface of certain objects and someclothing do not reflect the ultrasound sig-nals from the parking distance system. Thesystem cannot detect or incorrectly de-tects these objects and people wearingthese types of clothes.● External sound sources can affect theparking distance aid signals. In this case,under certain circumstances, people andobjects will not be detected.

CAUTION● The sensors may not always be able todetect objects such as trailer draw bars,thin rails, fences, posts, trees and openboots, etc. This could result in damage toyour car.● Although the parking distance warningsystem detects and warns of the presenceof an obstacle, the obstacle could disap-pear from the angle of measurement of thesensors if it is too high or low and the sys-tem would no longer show it. Therefore, itwill not warn you of these objects. Ignoringthe warnings of the parking sensor systemcould cause considerable damage to thevehicle.

160

Help with parking and manoeuvring

● The bumper sensors may become dam-aged or misaligned, for example, whenparking.● To ensure that the system works properly,the bumper sensors must be kept clean,free of ice and snow and uncovered.● When cleaning the sensors with high-pressure or steam cleaning equipment,spray the sensors briefly at a distance ofno less than 10 cm.● Different sources of noise can produceerrors in the parking distance warning sys-tem, e.g. parking distance warning systemsfrom other vehicles, inductive loops or con-struction works machines.● Retrofitting of components to the vehicle,such as a bicycle carrier, may interfere withthe function of the parking distance warn-ing system.

Parking distance warning system

Fig. 144 Parking distance warning system sen-sors on the rear bumper

The three sensors of the parking distancewarning system are located on the rearbumper ››› Fig. 144.

Switching the parking distance warningsystem on and off● Switch on: With the ignition switched on, se-lect reverse gear. A short audible warningconfirms that the parking distance warningsystem is switched on and functioning.● Switch off: Release reverse gear.

Special features of the parking distancewarning system● The parking distance warning systemsometimes registers water on the sensors asan obstacle.

● If the distance does not change, the warn-ing signal will sound less loudly after a fewseconds. If the continuous signal sounds, thevolume will remain constant.● When the vehicle moves away from the ob-stacle, the beeping sound automaticallyswitches off. When getting close again, it re-connects.● Your SEAT dealership can adjust the volumeof the warning signals.

NoteA fault in the parking distance warning sys-tem is indicated through a brief audiblewarning that is constant for about 3 sec-onds when switching it on the first time.Have the parking distance warning systemchecked as soon as possible at a special-ised workshop.

Optical parking system* (OPS)

Fig. 145 On-screen OPS display »161

Driving

An obstacle was detected in the collisionareaAn obstacle was detected in the segmentZone behind the vehicle registered

The optical parking system is an extension ofthe parking distance warning system››› page 161.

The radio screen displays the area behindthe vehicle recorded by the sensors. Any ob-stacles are displayed in relation to the vehicle››› .

Connect the indication● Activate the parking distance warning sys-tem ››› page 161. The OPS switches on auto-matically.

Manually disconnect the indication● Remove reverse gear.

Zones exploredThe approximate measurement range of thesensors is:

1.50 m0.60 m

Screen displayThe image displayed represents the super-vised zones in several segments. As the vehi-cle approaches an obstacle, it approaches

A

B

C

Rear area:Rear side area:

the displayed vehicle segment ››› Fig. 145 Aor B . Ultimately, when the second-to-lastsegment is shown, the collision area has beenreached. Stop the vehicle!

Segment colours (colour display)The distance to the obstacle behind is

approximately 31-150 cm. The audiosignal is intermittent.The distance to the obstacle behind isapproximately 0-30 cm. The audio sig-nal is continuous.

WARNINGDo not be distracted from traffic to look atthe display.

Note● SEAT recommends practising using theparking distance warning system in a traf-fic-free zone or in a car park to familiariseyourself with the system and its operation.● The display on the radio display of thearea explored by the sensors may take upto 5 seconds.

Yellow

Red

Towing bracket device

Driving with trailer

Information on driving with a trailer

The vehicle is not certified for trailer coupling.The vehicle is not factory-equipped with atowing bracket, nor is it possible to retrofit it.

WARNINGInstalling a towing bracket on the vehiclemay cause accidents and serious injurieswhile operating the vehicle.● Never install a towing bracket on the ve-hicle.● The trailer may be released from the ve-hicle when the vehicle is moving.

CAUTIONAny type of towing bracket installed on thevehicle can cause serious and costly dam-age that are not covered under the SEATguarantee.

162

High-voltage battery

Practical tips


Safety warnings relating to the high-voltage network and the high-voltage battery

Introduction

Fig. 146 Warning signs (schematic representa-tions): High-voltage components. Generalhigh-voltage warning sign. High-voltage batterywarning sign.

Fig. 147 When charging, in the engine com-partment: hot surface warning.

Overview of the high-voltage systemThe high-voltage system is made up by,among others, the following components:

● High-voltage battery● Electronic power module● Electric engine● High-voltage air conditioning compressor

● High-voltage battery charger● High-voltage battery charging socket● Orange coloured high-voltage cables andconnectors● High-voltage heater

The works that are to be carried out on thehigh-voltage system should be performed ex-clusively by a specialised workshop with duly »

163

Practical tips

qualified technical staff, trained according tothe SEAT guidelines ››› page 178 .

Handling the warning signs and stickers››› page 208.

General high-voltage warning signsThe high-voltage warning signs ››› Fig. 146 and warn of the existence of high electricalvoltage ››› . The following vehicle parts maycome with these warning signs:

● The covers and lids behind which there arehigh-voltage components under high-volt-age.● All the high-voltage components, includingthe high-voltage battery.● The lock carrier, in the engine compart-ment.

High-voltage battery warning signThe high-voltage battery comes with a signthat warns of its hazards.

Key to ››› Fig. 146 High-voltage can cause serious injuries oreven death. Never touch the batterypoles with bare fingers, tools, jewellery orother metal objects.The high-voltage battery contains haz-ardous liquid and solid substances. In theevent of gases emitting from the battery,these could cause serious burns and

1

2

blindness. When performing works onhigh-voltage battery, always use appro-priate eye protection and and protectiveclothing to avoid skin and eyes from com-ing into contact with the battery fluid. Ifthe battery fluid were to come into con-tact with skin or eyes, immediately rinsethe affected area with clean water for atleast 15 minutes and seek medical assis-tance.The high-voltage battery may burn. Nev-er expose the high-voltage battery tosources of fire, sparks or unprotectedflames. Always handle the high-voltagebattery with care to avoid damaging itand, consequently, fluid from leaking.Always keep children away from from thehigh-voltage battery.The instruction manual and the workshopinformation contain further informationand warnings to this regard.An inappropriate handling of the high-voltage battery can cause serious injuriesor death. Never remove the cover fromthe high-voltage battery and never re-move the high-voltage battery.An inappropriate handling of the high-voltage battery can cause serious injuriesor death. All maintenance works involvingthe high-voltage battery should only beperformed by duly qualified and trainedtechnical staff . Never modify the high-voltage battery in any way. When the

3

4

5

6

7

high-voltage battery is open, ensure itdoes not come into contact with water orother liquids. Liquids may cause short cir-cuits, electrical shocks and burns.

WARNINGThe vehicle’s high-voltage network and thehigh-voltage battery are hazardous andcan cause burns, other injuries and anelectrical shock with deathly consequen-ces.● Always consider that the high-voltagebattery is fully charged and that all thehigh-voltage components are powered.This may may be the case even with theelectric drive system and the ignition dis-connected.● Never touch the high-voltage cables orthe high-voltage battery and its poles, andnever touch them with jewellery or othermetal objects, especially when the cables,battery and its poles are damaged.● Never take it upon yourself to performany type of work on the high-voltage net-work, on the high-voltage cables or thehigh-voltage battery.● Never open the components or parts ofthe high-voltage network. Never performany maintenance work on these elements,nor repair or uncouple the high-voltagenetwork.● Never damage, modify or remove the or-ange coloured high-voltage cables, and

164


never uncouple them from the high-voltagenetwork.● Never open, modify or remove the coverfrom the high-voltage battery.● Only duly qualified and trained techni-cians are authorised to perform works onthe high-voltage system and on any othersystems on which these may have indirectinfluence.● To perform works close to high-voltagecomponents and cables which require theuse of sharp tools, which may deform or re-lease shavings, or sources of heat, such asworks involving welding, soldering, use ofhot air or thermal gluing, you must first en-sure the system is not powered. Only dulyqualified and trained technicians are au-thorised to leave the high-voltage systemwithout power.● When performing any work on the high-voltage system and the high-voltage bat-tery, ensure you bear in mind the SEATguidelines and standards.● Keep the vehicle key in a safe place at asafe distance from the vehicle to preventthe ignition from turning on by mistake.● The gases that are released or leakedfrom the high-voltage battery may be toxicor flammable.● Any damage caused to the vehicle or thehigh-voltage battery may lead to an imme-diate or subsequent leak of toxic gases.These gases can also cause a fire. In the

event of any damage, always open the ve-hicle windows so the gases can flow out ofthe vehicle. Do not inhale the gases.● Never touch the fluids or come into con-tact with the gases that may be releasedfrom the high-voltage battery, especially ifthe battery has been damaged.● In the event of a fire, leave the dangerarea and call the fire department. Informthe fire fighters that the vehicle is fittedwith an electric drive system.● Always inform the emergency servicethat the vehicle is fitted with a high-voltagebattery.

WARNINGIf works are performed on the high-voltagesystem and on the high-voltage compo-nents in an inappropriate manner, this maylead to faults in the operation, accidentsand injuries.● Only duly qualified and trained techni-cians are authorised to perform works onthe high-voltage system and on any othersystems on which these may have indirectinfluence.

WARNINGElectric vehicles do not make any noisewhen the vehicle is not moving and very lit-tle noise when the vehicle is moving. Henceother road users, such as pedestrians or

children, cannot hear or perceive theirpresence, or they do so with difficulty. Thismay lead to accidents and cause injuries,for example, in residential areas, when ma-noeuvring or moving in reverse gear.

CAUTIONAfter an accident or having hit an obstaclewith the vehicle underside, the high-volt-age battery must be checked by dulyqualified and trained technicians.

Charging the high-voltagebattery

Control lamps

Its lights up yellow. The chargelevel display needle is in the areamarked in red.

The high-voltage battery charge has reached the re-serve level.Charge the high-voltage battery. »

165

Practical tips

Its lights up yellow. A text mes-sage will also appear on the in-strument panel display.

The Eco or Eco+ driving profile will be active. Thepower is reduced and certain consumers are auto-matically switched off, such as the air conditioningsystem. The vehicle may already be travelling in re-serve mode.The high-voltage battery charge has reached the re-serve level. The vehicle autonomy will only be of afew kilometres.Charge the high-voltage battery immediately.

Its lights up yellow.

The power is reduced and there is very little autono-my.A text message will also appear on the instrumentpanel display.The maximum driving speed is limited to 80 km/h (50mph). The Eco+ driving profile will be activated.The high-voltage battery is discharged. There is onlysufficient autonomy for a few hundred metres. Stopthe vehicle in a safe place. Charge the high-voltagebattery immediately.

The control lamps light up together when theignition is switched on and should turn off af-ter approximately 2 seconds. This is the timetaken for the function check.


Introduction

Fig. 148 On the vehicle floor: location of thehigh-voltage battery.

The vehicle’s electric engine is operated bythe high-voltage battery, which is located onthe vehicle floor ››› Fig. 148.

The high-voltage battery can be charged im-mediately or in a deferred manner››› page 172. Always bear in mind the safetywarnings ››› .

Before charging the battery, disconnect thedrive system ››› page 142.

Charge options● Charge from a power socket or a chargingstation (“alternating voltage”) ››› page 169● Home charging station (wallbox) (“alternat-ing voltage”) ››› page 171● Fast charge at a charging station (“directcurrent”) ››› page 170

To charge the high-voltage battery using al-ternating voltage, SEAT recommend using ahome charging station (wallbox) or a charg-ing station and charge with the maximumcharge power. These charge options aremore efficient than using a power socket.

Protection against fault currentThe vehicle is fitted with a device to provideprotection against fault direct current (faultDC current). This avoids the fault DC cur-rents, which may be caused during charging,to reach the electrical installation of thehome through the charging cable and forthem to damage the operation of the differ-ential switch (in Germany, for example, thedifferential switch is A type) while charging.

Night power ratesThere are electricity suppliers that offercheaper night power rates that can be usedto charge the high-voltage battery. To takeadvantage of these periods of time, it is possi-ble to programme the preferred time forcharging the vehicle using the Energy man-agement or at the home charging station(wallbox).

High-voltage battery warrantyThe warranty covering new SEAT vehicles al-so includes the vehicle’s high-voltage battery››› page 199.

166


Batteries age based on their use and theiroperating time. It is advisable that you knowcertain details regarding the correct handlingand care of the high-voltage battery so thisremains in good condition for longer and canbe used in a reliable manner. Carefully readthe following information and take into ac-count the indications when using the vehicle.

WARNINGIf the battery is charged in an inappropriatemanner, if no consideration is given to thegeneral safety measures, power socketsand charging cables in poor condition areused or the high-voltage battery is used inan inadequate manner, this could lead toshort circuits, electrical shocks, explosions,fires, burns and serious injuries, even death.● Always respect the stipulated order ofthe operations to avoid the risk of sufferingan electrical shock or serious injuries dueto the residual energy in the charge accu-mulator! Never unplug the connector fromthe electrical network during the chargeprocess.● Only connect the charging cable to apower socket that is protected from water,humidity and other liquids.● When charging, only use power socketsthat are appropriately fitted, have beenchecked and are not damaged, as well aselectrical installations that are in perfectworking order. Duly qualified technicians

should check the power sockets and theelectrical installation on a regular basis.● Never use damaged charging connectorsor cables. Before using the charging con-nectors or cables, always check they arenot damaged.● Only use the charging cables suppliedwith the vehicle or the charging station ca-ble. In the event of needing replacement,we recommend you only use SEAT chargingcables.● Never modify or repair the electricalcomponents, especially those belonging tothe high-voltage system.● Never charge the vehicle in places wherethere is a danger of explosion. The compo-nents of the charging cable can causesparks and, therefore, may ignite flamma-ble fumes or explosives.● Never use the charging cable in combi-nation with an extension cable, a cablereel, a power strip or an adapter, such as atravel adapter or a timer.● Always protect the connectors from hu-midity, water and other liquids.● For safety reasons, never perform otherworks on the vehicle while charging.● Always complete the charging processbefore unplugging the connector from theelectrical network. Otherwise the chargingcable and the electrical installation mayalso be damaged.

● Always remove the charging cable be-fore starting the vehicle. Place the protec-tive caps and close the cover of the batterycharging socket.● Never charge several vehicles simultane-ously from the power sockets of the sameprotected electrical circuit. To charge oth-er vehicles simultaneously, use anotherelectrical circuit. Always take into consid-eration the maximum capacity of the elec-trical circuit used. Given the case, contactduly qualified personnel specialised inelectrical installations.

WARNINGIf the vehicle is driven with a very low acharge level of the high-voltage battery,the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing seri-ous damage or accidents and injuries.

CAUTIONCharging the high-voltage battery fre-quently with a high charge power couldlead to a permanent reduction in the bat-tery’s charge capacity. Charge the high-voltage battery preferably using a lowcharge capacity, i.e. a home charging sta-tion (wallbox) or a power socket that havebeen checked. »

167

Practical tips

CAUTIONLeaving the vehicle parked for a long peri-od of time with the high-voltage batterydischarged may cause irreversible damageto the battery. · Always charge the high-voltage battery immediately.

Note● The high-voltage battery can only becharged at charging stations that meet therequirements of the country in questionsand at least one of the following standards:– IEC 61851 and IEC 62196 (Europe)– GB/T 18487 and GB/T 20234 (China),

2015 version– SAE J1772 and CHAdeMO (Japan)

NoteIn the event of very low or very high tem-peratures, it may only be possible tocharge the high-voltage battery in a limitedmanner.

Electric range and charge level dis-play

Fig. 149 On the instrument panel: indicator ofthe high-voltage battery charge level with thereserve area marked in red (arrow).

Range indicationThe vehicle range can be viewed on the in-strument cluster screen ››› page 63 and onthe application available for mobile phones(SEAT CONNECT services ››› page 135). Thevalue shown is calculated and updatedbased on the driving style. Hence, the au-tonomy may vary even with the high-voltagebattery fully charged.

High-voltage battery reserve levelThe charge level display located on the in-strument panel shows the available chargeof the battery and the reserve area, markedin red (arrow) ››› Fig. 149.

When the high-voltage battery charge levelhas reached the reserve level, the controllamp lights up yellow.

In this case, the relevant message››› page 165 will appear in the instrumentpanel display. Several acoustic warnings arealso sounded.

Charge the high-voltage battery as soon aspossible to avoid the vehicle from stopping.

WARNINGIf the vehicle is driven with a very low acharge level of the high-voltage battery,the vehicle may stall in traffic, causing seri-ous damage or accidents and injuries.● Always ensure that the charge level ofthe high-voltage battery is sufficient!

WARNINGWhen the high-voltage battery charge lev-el reaches the reserve level, it is possiblethat certain driving properties may vary, i.e.the acceleration behaviour of the vehicle.● Always adapt the speed and driving styleto the conditions of visibility, weather, roadand traffic, as well as the charge level ofthe high-voltage battery.

CAUTIONThe self-discharge of the high-voltage bat-tery, for example due to the vehicle being

168


parked for several months, can cause dam-age to the battery in the event of high am-bient temperature and the battery having alow charge level.● Always ensure that the charge level ofthe high-voltage battery is sufficient!

NoteIf the outside temperature is very low and,therefore, the high-voltage battery is verycold, the autonomy may be reduced.

Charging from a power socket or acharging station (AC)

Fig. 150 Behind the cover of the batterycharging socket: charging socket (schematicrepresentation).

Fig. 151 At the bottom of the centre console:charging mode button.

Key to ››› Fig. 150Charging process displayCharging socketProtective cap

The high-voltage battery of the vehicle canbe charged using alternating voltage (AC)through the corresponding charging socket

2 .

Always bear in mind the safety warnings››› page 163 before starting the chargingprocess.

Before charging the battery, always discon-nect the drive system ››› page 142.

Connecting the charging cable● If on, remove the protective caps.

1

2

3

● First connect the charging cable to thepower supply or remove this cable from thecharging station.● Fully unwind the charging cable.● With the vehicle unlocked, press the coverof the battery charging socket, located at therear of the right side, to open it ››› Fig. 150.● Plug the charging connector into thecharging socket ››› Fig. 150 2 .

As soon as the connector is detected, thecharging process display lights up yellow››› Fig. 150 1 . The control lamp is on in theinstrument panel display.

Automatic start of the charging processIf the deferred charge is not active, the charg-ing process starts automatically. In this case,activate the charging station.

During the charging, the charging connectoris locked and cannot be removed.

During the chargingDuring the charging, the charging processdisplay ››› Fig. 150 1 flashes green. Thecontrol lamp flashes yellow on in the in-strument panel display.

The remaining charging time is shown on theinstrument panel display. »

169

Practical tips

Pausing or ending the charging processPress the charging mode button ››› Fig. 151 topause the charging process. The chargingconnector remains locked. The chargingprocess can be reactivated by pressing thecharging mode button again.

If you wish to unplug the charging connector,unlock the vehicle using the key.

If the charging ends automatically and thehigh-voltage battery is charged:● Unlock the vehicle with the ignition switch-ed off.● Remove the charging connector from thecharging socket within 30 seconds.● Unplug the charging cable from the powersupply source.● If available, replace the protective caps.● Close the cover of the battery chargingsocket until you hear it has engaged.

Charging for the first time and chargingafter not being used for a long period oftimeWhen the high-voltage battery is new or hasnot been charged for a long period of time, itis possible that the battery may not reach itsmaximum charge level until it is charged sev-eral times. This is due to technical reasonsand has nothing to do with any fault in the ve-hicle.

If you are not going to use the vehicle for along period of time, make sure you charge thehigh-voltage battery within a period of 4months at the latest.

NoteIf once the charge is completed you leavethe charging cable connected, the high-voltage battery will not discharge due tothe use of the vehicle’s electricity consum-ers.

Fast charge at a charging station(CC)

Fig. 152 Behind the cover of the battery charg-ing socket: charging socket (schematic repre-sentation).

Key to ››› Fig. 152

Charging process displayCharging socketProtective caps

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle canbe charged with direct current (DC) at acharging station.

The permanently installed charging cableshould not be more than 30 metres long. Takeinto account the general information relatingto charging the high-voltage battery and thepreparations to be carried out before charg-ing ››› page 163.

Before charging the battery, always discon-nect the drive system ››› page 142.

Connecting the charging cableFast charge is carried out through the con-nection located at the bottom of the chargingsocket.

● Remove the charging cable from thecharging station.● With the vehicle unlocked, press the coverof the battery charging socket, located onthe side panel, to open it ››› Fig. 152.● Remove the two protective caps from thecharging socket ››› Fig. 152 3 . To remove thebottom protective cap, first remove the topcap.● Plug the charging connector into thecharging socket ››› Fig. 152 2 .

1

2

3

170


As soon as the connector is detected, thecharging process display lights up yellow.The charging connector is locked. The con-trol lamp is on in the instrument panel dis-play.

Automatic start of the charging processIn this case, activate the charging station››› .

The charging process will start immediately.

During the charging, the charging connectorremains locked and cannot be removed fromthe charging socket.

During the chargingDuring the charging, the charging processdisplay ››› Fig. 152 1 flashes green. The con-trol lamp flashes yellow on in the instru-ment panel display. Do not unplug the charg-ing connector.

The remaining charging time is shown on theinstrument panel display.

Ending the charging processThe charging process can be ended bypressing the charging mode button loca-ted at the bottom of the centre console of thevehicle or directly from the charging station.Unlock the vehicle with the button on thekey or the button located on the driver’sdoor. The charging process will stop for ap-

proximately 30 seconds and the chargingconnector will unlock. Remove the chargingconnector from the charging socket:

● Remove the charging connector from thecharging socket.● Place the protective caps on the chargingsocket ››› Fig. 152 3 .● Close the cover of the battery chargingsocket until you hear it has engaged. Thecover should be flush-mounted on the body-work.

Emergency release of the charging con-nectorIf it is not possible to remove the chargingconnector after ending the charging process,perform an emergency release of the same››› page 174 and remove it.

CAUTIONTo use the charging station, bear in mindthe manufacturer’s indications and usageinstructions.

NoteThe stationary air conditioning of the vehi-cle using a charging station is only possibleduring the charging process. As an alterna-tive, activate the setting “Air conditioningwithout external power supply” in the Ener-gy management of the Infotainment sys-tem → page 83.

Fast charge at a home chargingstation (wallbox)

Fig. 153 Home charging station (wallbox).

When charging from a permanently installedhome charging station (wallbox) ››› Fig. 153using a home connection, a higher chargingpower is achieved ››› . The charge time di-minishes significantly. The device automati-cally selects the maximum amperage basedon the electrical installation of the property.

Bear in mind the procedure to be followed forcharging from a power socket or a chargingstation ››› page 169.

CAUTIONThe home charging station (wallbox) mustbe installed by duly qualified technicians.● Before using the home charging station(wallbox) for the first time, ensure the prop-erty’s electrical installation is checked. »

171

Practical tips

● Specialised technicians should check theelectrical installation on a regular basis.

NoteThe home charging station (wallbox) canbe purchased as an accessory.● Ask about home charging stations (wall-box) at a SEAT dealer.● Bear in mind the operating instructions ofthe home charging station (wallbox) beforeusing it.

Immediate charging and deferredcharging

Fig. 154 At the bottom of the centre console:charging mode button.

The charging mode button ››› Fig. 154, lo-cated at the bottom of the centre console,

enables to choose between immediate or de-ferred charging.

Immediate chargingThe charging process of the high-voltagebattery starts immediately as soon as the thecharging cable is connected. The high-volt-age battery will fully charge. During this time,the charging mode button flashes.

Press the charging mode button to pausethe charging process.

If a timer is activated with a departure time,press the charging mode button to change to“deferred charging”.

Deferred charging● Open the e-manager in the app (SEATCONNECT services).● Select a timer.● Insert the departure time, being the time atwhich the high-voltage battery must becharged.● Activate the timer by ticking the verificationbox .

If the charge level is very low, the high-volt-age battery will start charging immediatelyuntil reaching the low charge limit.

If the charging cable is plugged in, the sym-bol of the charging mode button ››› Fig. 154lights up.

Not all charging stations provide deferredcharging.

Minimum charge limit of the batteryIn all charging processes using a power sock-et, the high-voltage battery will start charg-ing immediately until reaching the low chargelimit. This avoids the battery charge levelfrom being too low.

The value can be adjusted in the e-manager of the SEAT CONNECT services.

Maximum charge limit of the batteryThe high-voltage battery will only charge un-til reaching the set value for the maximumcharge limit of the battery. This helps protectthe high-voltage battery ››› page 165.

The value can be adjusted in the e-manager of the SEAT CONNECT services.

172


Charging process display

Fig. 155 Behind the cover of the batterycharging socket: charging process display 1and information on the sticker 2 .

Fig. 156 On the inside face of the cover of thebattery charging socket: sticker with informa-tion on the charging process display.

The charging process display is a diode (LED)located next to the charging socket››› Fig. 155 1 and it indicates the charge lev-el. There is an sticker that explains the differ-ent indications ››› Fig. 156.

Key to the information sticker of the chargingprocess display ››› Fig. 156:

The green LED lights up permanently:The charging process of the high-voltagebattery is complete. The battery hasreached the maximum or set charge lev-el.The LED flashes green: The high-voltagebattery is charging.

1

2

The LED flashes green for about 1 mi-nute: Deferred charging is active (depar-ture time), but has not yet started charg-ing ››› page 172.The LED flashes yellow: The parkinglock P is not engaged.The yellow LED lights up briefly: Thecharging connector is plugged into thecharging socket and the vehicle has de-tected it.The yellow LED lights up permanently:No electrical network has been detected.Check the power supply and the electri-cal network. When using the charging ca-ble for the electrical network, the protec-tion device will display the status of thenetwork. Seek specialist assistance.The red LED lights up permanently: Ithas not been possible to lock the charg-ing connector. Remove the charging con-nector from the charging socket and plugin again. If the fault continues, seek spe-cialist assistance.The LED flashes red: There is a fault inthe charging system. Seek specialist as-sistance.

When the charging process is active, this isdisplayed on the instrument panel by meansof a control lamp, and on the remainingcharge time is also displayed ››› page 60.

3

4

5

6

173

Remaining charge time

The remaining charge time of the vehicle canbe viewed on the instrument panel displayand on the application available for mobilephones (SEAT CONNECT services).

The charge time using a charge cable forpower sockets may take over 10 hours.

The e-Manager displays a maximum chargetime of 10:30 hours, yet this time may begreater.

While the high-voltage battery is charging,the control lamp (yellow) will flash on theinstrument panel.

Practical tips

Problems and solutions

The charging process will not start or haspausedThe relevant text message will appear in theinstrument panel display.

● Use another charging source ››› page 165.● Or: unplug the charging cable of the vehi-cle and plug it back in again.● Or: the charging system may be faulty.Contact a specialised workshop.

Fast charge is not workingThe relevant text message will appear in theinstrument panel display.

It is not possible to fast charge using directcurrent.

Error in the charging system.

● Contact a specialised workshop.● As an alternative, charge the high-voltagebattery using alternating voltage (AC).

The charge time will be longer when usingthe fast charge functionThe charging current automatically reducesduring the charging process.

The high-voltage battery must be protectedagainst overheating when performing severalcontinuous charging cycles, for example,

when using the vehicle on a continuous basisand with high ambient temperatures.

Emergency release of the chargingconnector

Requirements:● The parking lock P is not engaged››› page 145.● The vehicle is unlocked ››› page 73.● The charging process has ended or haspaused ››› page 166.

If despite this, it is still impossible to unplugthe charging connector, perform an emer-gency release of the connector.

Emergency release of the charging con-nector● Press the charging mode button at thebottom of the centre console and keep itpressed. At the same time, press the centrallocking button located on the driver’s door.● Remove the connector from the chargingsocket.● Have the vehicle checked by a specialisedworkshop immediately.

If the problem continues, consult a special-ised workshop.

NotePerform the emergency release of thecharging connector only in the event of afault in the vehicle.

Charging cable

Introduction

The charging cables supplied from the facto-ry are in the luggage compartment››› page 94 and should only be transportedthere.

To charge the high-voltage battery withoutproblems and ensure a long useful life of thecharging cables, bear in mind the followinginformation and indications.

SEAT recommends to only use the chargingcables supplied from the factory.

How to maintain the charging cables in goodcondition:

● Use them with care.● Do not fold or or bend them over sharpedges.● When removing them from the vehicle andfrom the power supply source, only pull onthe connectors.

174


How to maintain the protection device andthe charging connectors in good condition:

● After using the charging cable, replace theprotective caps.● Protect them from intense solar radiation(the outside temperature should not exceed50°C (122°F)).● Do not drop them.● Do not insert them in liquid.

In the event of operating faults, SEAT recom-mends the charging cables are checked byone of its dealers.

If there is a fault in the power socket or in theelectrical installation, seek assistance from atechnician specialised in electrical installa-tions.

WARNINGNever use damaged charging connectorsor cables. Before using the charging con-nectors or cables, always check they arenot damaged.

WARNINGAlways plug the charging cable for powersockets directly into a power socket. Neveruse the charging cable in combination withan extension cable, a cable reel, a powerstrip or an adapter, such as a travel adapt-er or a timer. Otherwise this could lead toinjuries caused by fire or the charging ca-

ble or the electrical installation of theproperty could be damaged.

WARNINGNever charge the battery using unknownpower sockets or electrical installations, orthose which have not been checked by du-ly qualified technicians. Even very lowcharging currents can cause importantdamages, especially fires, when usingpower sockets or electrical installationsthat are in poor condition. In this case, seekassistance from a technician specialised inelectrical installations.

WARNINGLoose or unsecured objects can cause seri-ous injury in case of sudden manoeuvringor braking or in case of an accident.● Always store the charging cable safely.

CAUTIONA specialist in electrical installationsshould check the charging cable on a regu-lar basis. A tester adapter will be needed tocheck the charging cables.

NoteTake into consideration the maximum ca-pacity of the electrical circuit used. If thecharging cable is plugged in along withother electrical consumers into a power

socket on the same electrical circuit, thiscould cause the fuse to trip. In this case, thehigh-voltage battery will not charge. Dis-connect all other electrical consumersfrom the electrical circuit or use anothercircuit. In this case, seek assistance from atechnician specialised in electrical instal-lations.

Charging cable for charging sta-tions (AC)

Fig. 157 In the luggage compartment: charg-ing cable for charging stations (depending onthe equipment).

Depending on the equipment, the vehicle willcome with a charging cable for charging sta-tions (alternating voltage) ››› Fig. 157.

Bear in mind the procedure to be followed forcharging with alternating voltage››› page 169. »

175

Practical tips

The charging cable supplied from the factoryallows for charging with a maximum chargingcurrent of 16 amperes. It may not be possibleto charge the vehicle at some charging sta-tions which provide higher charging currents.

Bear in mind the information and indicationsof the charging station.

Charging in NorwayThere are many electrical installations in Nor-way whose technical standards differ fromthose applicable to the rest of Europe.

Only use a charging cable with a 5 x 6 mm2

››› section. Bear in mind the figure that ap-pears on the charging cable.

Before travelling to Norway, check whetheryour charging cable for charging stationsmeets the requirements mentioned above.

CAUTIONCharging the high-voltage battery with aninappropriate charging cable could causeshort circuits, serious injuries and fatalelectrical shocks.● Do not use a charging cable with a sec-tion that is too small.

NoteTo use the charging station, bear in mindthe manufacturer’s indications and usageinstructions.

Charging cable for power sockets

Fig. 158 On the charging cable for powersockets: protection device.

Key to the ››› Fig. 158:Control lamp of the power connectorControl lamp of the protection deviceControl lamp of the vehicleFailure warning lamp

The supplied charging cable is for chargingthe high-voltage battery using alternatingvoltage (AC) from a power socket››› page 169.

Also bear in mind the safety information andindications on the charging cable label.

Protection deviceDue to the electronic protection device››› Fig. 158, the charging connector does notreceive current until it is plugged into the

1

2

3

4

charging socket of the vehicle. When thecharging cable is plugged into the powersocket, the protection device automaticallyperforms a self-check. The control and warn-ing lamps then briefly light up and turn off.Then the current operating status is dis-played.

Operating displaysThe control lamps that indicate the operationturn on or flash green.

Display››› Fig. 158 Meaning

1 on Charging cable connectedto the electrical network.

1 , 2 on, 3 flash-esa)

High-voltage batterycharging.

1 , 2 and 3 onCharging process com-plete. The high-voltage bat-tery is charged.

a) The available supply voltage depends on eachcountry.

Display in the event of the charging cableheatingThe charging cable is fitted with a tempera-ture supervision system. The temperature su-pervision is activated if the charging cable istoo hot due to, for example, overheating in theluggage compartment where it is stored orexposure to intense solar radiation.

176


If it is still possible to charge, in addition to theoperating display flashing, the red warninglamp ››› Fig. 158 will also appear. The charg-ing current is automatically reduced. Thecharging current will increase again when thecharging cable has cooled down sufficiently.

In the event of the charging process havingpaused due to the protection device, the op-erating display will turn off and a green warn-ing lamp will flash. The red warning lamp willflash. Unplug the charging cable and let itcool down. If the fault occurs again, consult aspecialised workshop.

Limiting the charging currentThe charging cable limits the charging cur-rent based in the existing power supply. De-pending on the power socket of the countryin question, the maximum charging currentmay be 6, 8 or 10 A.

The management of the battery charge ena-bles to select a lower or maximum chargingcurrent.

Failure indicationsIf the warning lamp 4 flashes or is red with-out the operating display 1 , 2 or 3 re-maining on, this indicates there is a failure.The charging process will pause or cancel.Check the failure display and consult a spe-cialised workshop if necessary.

Display››› Fig. 158 Meaning

1 flashes, 4 on orflashing Failure in the power supply.

2 flashes, 4 on orflashing

Failure in the protection de-vice.

3 flashes, 4 on orflashing Failure in the vehicle.

CAUTIONSeek information regarding the appropri-ate charging cable and the maximum per-mitted charging current before travellingabroad. If possible, use the charging cablesupplied in the country in question.

NoteThe charging cables supplied in countriesother than Norway are often not appropri-ate for charging from power sockets. Nor-wegian charging cables are not fitted withcontrol lamp 1 because they use a differ-ent electrical network.

NoteIf there is another consumer connected si-multaneously to the electrical network dur-ing the charging process or if the vehicle isin the vicinity of high-voltage cables, it ispossible that the charge cannot be per-

formed from a power socket. Simultaneousconnections to the electrical network:● Connection of a charger for the 12-voltstarter battery.● Contact with a working equipment con-nected to the electrical network, i.e. an ele-vating platform.

177

Practical tips

Verification and replace-ment

Engine compartment

Safety warnings for performingworks in the engine compartment

The engine compartment of the vehicle is adangerous area. You should only performworks in the engine compartment if you havegood knowledge of the necessary operationsand the general safety measures, and if youhave adequate tools, means and operatingfluids. Works performed inadequately, couldlead to serious injuries ››› . In this case, seeka specialised workshop to perform all theworks. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

Before performing any work in the enginecompartment, always park the vehicle onlevel and firm ground, taking all necessarysafety precautions.

Only specialised workshops qualified ac-cording to the SEAT guidelines are authorisedto perform works on the high-voltage system››› .

WARNINGThe voltage of the high-voltage system andof the high-voltage battery could be fatal!

Touching damaged high-voltage cables(orange colour) and the high-voltage bat-tery could cause an electrical shock withdeathly consequences. The high-voltagesystem may be active even with the ignitiondisconnected!● Never perform any type of work on thehigh-voltage system, on the orange col-oured high-voltage cables, on the high-voltage components or on the high-voltagebattery. Only specialised workshops thatare qualified and approved for performingworks on high-voltage systems are author-ised to perform works on the high-voltagenetwork.● Never modify, damage or remove the or-ange coloured high-voltage cables, thehigh-voltage components or the high-volt-age battery, or uncouple them from thehigh-voltage system.● To perform works close to high-voltagecomponents and cables, as well as on thehigh-voltage battery, which require the useof sharp tools, which may deform or re-lease shavings, or sources of heat, such asworks involving welding, soldering, use ofhot air or thermal gluing, it is essential youfirst ensure the system is not powered. Thevoltage to the high-voltage battery cannotbe disconnected. Only duly qualified andtrained technicians are authorised to leavethe high-voltage system without power.● When there is a fault in the high-voltagesystem, the engine may automatically de-

activate and the relevant display may ap-pear on the instrument panel. In this case,the engine will remain deactivated until du-ly qualified and trained technicians resolvethe fault.● When performing works on the high-volt-age system, especially on the orange col-oured high-voltage cables, on the high-voltage components or on the high-voltagebattery, ensure you bear in mind the SEATguidelines.

WARNINGIf works are performed on the high-voltagesystem and on the high-voltage compo-nents in an inappropriate manner, this maylead to faults in the operation, accidentsand injuries.● Only duly qualified and trained techni-cians are authorised to perform works onthe high-voltage system and on any othersystems on which these may have indirectinfluence.

WARNINGAny accidental movement of the vehicleduring maintenance work could cause seri-ous injuries.● Never perform works underneath the ve-hicle without having first immobilised it toprevent it from moving. When performingworks underneath the vehicle with thewheels on the ground, the vehicle must be

178

Verification and replacement

on level ground, the wheels must be lockedand, where appropriate, the vehicle keymust be removed from the ignition lock.● If work must be performed underneaththe vehicle, take the extra precaution ofsupporting it safely using suitable assem-bly support. The jack is not suitable for thispurpose and may not withstand, whichcould lead to serious injuries.

WARNINGThe engine compartment of any vehicle is adangerous area in which serious injuriescan be caused!● When performing any type of work, al-ways ensure you are extremely cautious,and bear in mind the general safety meas-ures. Never put yourself at risk.● Never perform works in the engine com-partment if you do not have solid knowl-edge of the necessary operations. If youare unsure of what needs to be done, seeka specialised workshop to perform theworks. Works performed inadequately,could lead to serious injuries.● Never open the bonnet if the engine com-partment is discharging steam or enginecoolant. Steam or hot coolant can causesevere burns. Always wait until you stophearing or seeing the steam or coolant dis-charging from the engine compartment.

● Before opening the bonnet, always waituntil the electric drive system and the high-voltage components have cooled down.● If you touch hot parts of the electric drivesystem, you may suffer skin burns.● When the electric drive system hascooled down, before opening the bonnetbear in mind the following:– Engage the handbrake, tighten it and

place the selector lever in position P orthe gear lever in neutral.

– Switch off the ignition, remove the keyfrom the ignition lock and store it in asafe place at a safe distance from thevehicle to prevent the ignition fromturning on by mistake or power theelectrical system.

– Always keep children away from theengine compartment and never leavethem unsupervised.

● When the electric drive system is hot, itscooling system is under pressure. Neveropen the coolant expansion tank cap whenthe drive system is hot. Otherwise the cool-ant could splash and cause severe burnand other injuries.– Turn the coolant expansion tank cap

slowly and very carefully anticlockwisewhile pressing it down slightly.

– Always protect your face, hands andarms from the hot coolant and steamwith a large thick cloth.

● When refilling operating fluids, ensurethey do not spill onto the components ofthe engine or onto the exhaust system.These liquids could cause a fire.

WARNINGThe electrical system is under high voltageand can cause electrical shocks, burns, se-rious injuries and even death!● Never short circuit the electrical system.The 12-volt battery may explode.● To reduce the risk of suffering a fatalelectrical shock and serious injuries, whilethe drive system is connected or is con-necting, never touch the high-voltage com-ponents, the high-voltage battery or thehigh-voltage system, especially the orangecoloured high-voltage cables.

WARNINGThe engine compartment contains rotatingparts that could cause serious injuries.● Never insert your hand in the radiator fanor around that area. All the rotor bladescan cause serious injuries. The fan acti-vates depending on the temperature andcan switch on automatically, even with theignition disconnected and with the key re-moved from the ignition lock.● If you have to perform works during thedisconnection of the drive system or whichit connected, bear in mind that the rotating »

179

Practical tips

parts (i.e. the radiator fan) represent a fatalhazard. Always act with extreme care.– Always ensure that no part of your

body, or any jewellery or tie, looseclothing, loose long hair can becometrapped in the rotating parts of the en-gine. Before performing works in the en-gine compartment, remove any jewel-lery or tie you may be wearing, tie upyour hair if it is long and gather anyloose clothing to prevent them from be-coming tangled with the engine parts.

– Never step on the accelerator pedalwithout paying attention, always do sowith extreme care. The vehicle couldmove, even if the electronic parkingbrake is activated.

● Never leave any object in the enginecompartment, i.e. cloths or tools. These ob-jects could cause functional failures, dam-age to the electric drive system and even afire.

WARNINGIf additional insulating elements (i.e. blan-kets) are placed in the engine compart-ment, this could prevent the electric drivesystem from operating correctly, couldcause a fire and lead to serious injuries.● Never cover the electric drive systemwith blankets or other insulating materials.

WARNINGThe operating fluids and some materials ofthe engine compartment are highly flam-mable and could cause a fire and seriousinjuries! · Never smoke in the vicinity of theengine compartment.● Never perform works close to unprotec-ted flames or sparks.● Never spill operating fluids on the elec-tric drive system. The liquids could igniteupon coming into contact with the hotparts of the electric drive system andcause injuries.● When you must perform works on the on-board 12-volt electrical system, bear inmind the following:– Always disconnect the 12-volt battery.

Ensure the vehicle is unlocked whendisconnecting the 12-volt battery, oth-erwise the anti-theft alarm will trigger.

– Never perform works in the vicinity ofheating elements, water boilers or un-protected flames.

● Always have a fire extinguisher close-by,ensuring it is operational and had beenchecked.

CAUTIONWhen refilling or changing the operatingfluids, ensure you pour the correct fluids in-to their corresponding filler caps. Using thewrong operating fluids could cause severe

functional failures and damage to the en-gine.

CAUTIONAfter an accident or having hit an obstaclewith the vehicle underside, the high-volt-age battery must be checked by dulyqualified and trained technicians.

For the sake of the environmentOperating fluids that overflow from the ve-hicle contaminate the environment. There-fore, check underneath the vehicle on aregular basis. If there are marks left by op-erating fluids on the ground, consult a spe-cialised workshop and request the vehiclebe checked. If any operating fluid leaks out,dispose of it in the correct manner.

Working in the engine compart-ment

Before performing works in the engine com-partment, always perform the following oper-ations in the order indicated ››› :

● Place the vehicle on level and firm ground,taking all necessary safety precautions.● Press the brake pedal and keep it presseduntil you disconnect the drive system.● Engage the handbrake and tighten it.

180


● Place the selector lever to the P››› page 145 position.● Disconnect the drive system ››› page 142.● Remove the vehicle key outside the vehicleand keep it at a distance to prevent the drivesystem from connecting by mistake and pow-ering the electrical system ››› page 143.● Wait for the electric drive system to cooldown.● Keep children and other people away fromthe engine compartment.● Ensure the vehicle cannot go into motionunexpectedly.

WARNINGFor your own safety, do not ignore this im-portant check list, otherwise this couldcause accidents and serious injuries.● Always follow the indications on thecheck list and always bear in mind the gen-eral safety measures.

Opening and closing the bonnet

Fig. 159 : Release lever in the footwell onthe driver side : Release lever on the bonnet

Fig. 160 : Bonnet securing rod in the bonnet.: Bonnet supported by the bonnet securingrod

Opening the bonnetThe bonnet is released from inside the vehi-cle.

Before opening the bonnet, make sure thatthe windscreen wiper arms are in placeagainst the windscreen. »

181

Practical tips

● Open the door and pull the lever that is un-derneath the instrument panel ››› Fig. 159 1 .● Lift the bonnet slightly while pressing theunlocking lever ››› Fig. 159 2 in the directionof the arrow to fully open the bonnet.● Remove the bonnet stay from its support inthe direction of the arrow ››› Fig. 160 3 andplace it in the opening provided for this pur-pose 4 (arrow).

Closing the bonnet● Slightly lift the bonnet.● Release the bonnet stay and replace it in itssupport.● At a height of approximately 30 cm let it fallso it locks.

If the bonnet does not close, do not pressdownwards. Open it again and let it fall asmentioned above.

WARNINGIf the bonnet is not properly closed, it couldopen unexpectedly while in motion and im-pede forward visibility. This could causeaccidents and lead to serious injuries.● After closing the bonnet, ensure that thelock is duly engaged in the lock carrier. Thebonnet must be at the same level as theadjacent parts of the bodywork.

● If while in motion you notice the bonnet isnot properly closed, stop the vehicle imme-diately and close the bonnet.● Open and close the bonnet only whenthere is nobody in its path.

CAUTION● To avoid damage to the bonnet and to thewiper arms, open the bonnet only when thewiper is disconnected and the wiper armsare positioned on the windscreen.● Before starting to move, always place thewiper arms on the windscreen.

Cooling system

Control lamp

Flashes red

Excessive engine coolant temperature. Stop the vehicle! Stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible. Disconnect the drive system and allow tocool until the lamp switches off. If the lamp does notswitch off once the drive system has cooled down,seek specialist assistance.

Insufficient engine coolant level. Stop the vehicle! Check the coolant level oncethe drive system has cooled down and, if it is low, re-fill with engine coolant ››› page 183.

Flashing red next to the dis-play --.- on the instrumentpanel.

Engine coolant system faulty. Stop the vehicle! Seek specialist assistance.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Coolant specifications

The engine cooling system is supplied fromthe factory with a specially treated mixture ofwater and at least 40 % of the additiveG12evo (TL-VW 774 J), purple. This mixturegives the necessary frost protection down to-25°C (-13°F) and protects the light alloyparts of the engine cooling system againstcorrosion. It also prevents scaling and con-siderably raises the boiling point of the cool-ant.

To protect the cooling system, the percent-age of additive must always be at least 40 %,even in warm climates where anti-freeze pro-tection is not required.

182


If for weather reasons further protection isnecessary, the proportion of additive may beincreased, but only up to 60 %; otherwise an-tifreeze protection will diminish and this willworsen cooling.

When the coolant is topped up, use a mixtureof distilled water and at least 40 % of theadditive G12evo for optimal protectionagainst corrosion. Mixing G12evo with G13(TL-VW 774 J), G12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G),G12 plus (TL-VW 774 F), G12 (red) or G11(green blue) engine coolants decreases pro-tection again corrosion and should be avoi-ded.

WARNINGIf there is not enough anti-freeze in thecoolant system, the engine may fail lead-ing to serious damage.● Ensure that the percentage of additive iscorrect for the lowest expected ambienttemperature in the zone in which the vehi-cle is to be used.● When the outside temperature is verylow, the coolant could freeze and the vehi-cle would be immobilised.

CAUTIONThe original additives should never bemixed with coolants which are not ap-proved by SEAT.

● If the fluid in the expansion tank is notpurple but is, for example, brown, this indi-cates that the G12evo additive has beenmixed with an inadequate coolant. Thecoolant must be changed as soon as possi-ble if this is the case!

For the sake of the environmentCoolants and additives can contaminatethe environment. If any fluids are spilled,they should be collected and correctly dis-posed of, with respect to the environment.

Refilling coolant

Fig. 161 In the engine compartment: markingon coolant expansion tank.

Fig. 162 Engine compartment: coolant expan-sion tank cap.

The coolant tank is located in the enginecompartment ››› page 178.

Top up coolant when the level is below the (minimum) mark.

Checking coolant level– Park the vehicle in a horizontal position.

– Switch the ignition off.

– Read off the coolant level on coolant ex-pansion tank. When the drive system iscold, the coolant level should be betweenthe marks ››› Fig. 161. With the drive systemhot, the level may be slightly above the topmark.

Topping up coolant– Allow the drive system to cool. »

183

Practical tips

– Unscrew the cap slowly and carefully whilepressing downwards on the cap. ››› .

– Only refill the coolant if the coolant expan-sion tank still contains coolant; otherwiseyou could damage the drive system. Ifthere is no coolant in the expansion tank, donot continue driving. You should obtain pro-fessional assistance ››› .

– If there is still some coolant in the expansiontank, top up to the upper mark.

– Top up with coolant until the level becomesstable.

– Screw the cap back on correctly.

If there is a coolant leak, take the vehicle spe-cialised workshop to have the cooling systemexamined.

WARNING● The cooling system is under pressure. Donot open the coolant expansion tank capwhen the drive system is hot: risk of burns!● Store the antifreeze in its original con-tainer and keep it out of reach of children.● If working inside the engine compart-ment, remember that, even when the igni-tion is switched off, the radiator fan maystart up automatically, and therefore thereis a risk of injury.

CAUTIONIf you run out of coolant in the expansiontank, park the vehicle in a safe place anddo not continue driving. Obtain technicalassistance.

Brake fluid

Check and refill the brake fluid

Fig. 163 Engine compartment: brake fluid res-ervoir cap.

The brake fluid reservoir is located in the en-gine compartment.

Checking the brake fluid levelThe brake fluid level must be between the and markings.

However, if the brake fluid level goes downnoticeably in a short time, or drops below the mark, there may be a leak in the brakesystem. Seek specialist assistance. A warninglight on the instrument panel display monitorsthe brake fluid level ››› page 69.

Changing brake fluidWe recommend that you have the brake fluidchanged by a Technical Service.

WARNINGIf the brake fluid level is low or unsuita-ble/old brake fluid is used, the brake sys-tem may fail or braking power may be re-duced.● Check the brake system and the brakefluid level regularly!● When the brake fluid is used and brakesare subjected to extreme braking forces,bubbles of vapour form in the brake sys-tem. These bubbles can significantly re-duce braking power, notably increasingbraking distance, and could result in the to-tal failure of the brake system.● Be sure to always use the correct brakefluid. Only use brake fluid that expresslymeets the VW 501 14 standard.● You can buy VW 501 14 standard brakefluid in a SEAT dealership or a SEAT OfficialService. If none is available, use only high-quality brake fluid that meets DIN ISO 4925

184


CLASS 4 standards, or USA StandardsFMVSS 116 DOT 4.● The replacement brake fluid must benew.● Brake fluid should be stored in the closedoriginal container in a safe place out ofreach of children. Risk of poisoning!

CAUTIONBrake fluid should not come into contactwith the vehicle paintwork, as it is abrasive.

For the sake of the environmentBrake fluid is an environmental pollutant.Collect any spilt service fluids and allow aprofessional to dispose of them.

Windscreen washer reservoir

Checking the level of the wind-screen washer reservoir and refill-ing it

Fig. 164 In the engine compartment: cap ofthe windscreen washer tank.

The windscreen washer reservoir is in the en-gine compartment.

Check the water level in the windscreenwasher reservoir regularly and top up as re-quired.

The window washer tank contains liquid de-tergent for the windscreen and rear window.

● Open the bonnet ››› page 180.● The window washer tank is marked with the symbol on the cap.● Check there is enough windscreen water inthe reservoir.

Plain water is not enough to clean the wind-screen and headlights. We recommend thatyou always add a product to the windscreenwasher fluid.

Recommended windscreen wipers● For the hottest seasons we recommendsummer G 052 184 A1 for clear glass. Propor-tions of the mixture in the washer fluid tank:1:100 (1 part concentrate per 100 parts wa-ter).● All year round, G 052 164 A2 for clear glass.Approximate proportion of the winter mixture,up to -18°C (0°F): 1:2 (1 part concentrate per 2parts water); otherwise, a 1:4 proportion ofmixture in the washer fluid tank.

The capacity of the window washer tank canbe found in ››› page 214.

CAUTIONIf the water from the windscreen washerdoes not contain enough anti-freeze, it mayfreeze on the windscreen and rear window,reducing forward and rear visibility.● In winter, ensure the windscreen washercontains enough anti-freeze.● In cold conditions, you should not use thewindscreen wiper system unless you havewarmed the windscreen with the ventila-tion system. The antifreeze could freeze onthe windscreen and reduce visibility. »

185

Practical tips

CAUTIONNever mix an unsuitable antifreeze or othersimilar additives with the windscreen wash-er water. A greasy layer may be formed onthe windscreen which will impair visibility.● Use clean water with a window cleanerrecommended by SEAT.● If necessary, add a suitable antifreeze tothe water in the reservoir.

CAUTION● Do not mix cleaning products recommen-ded by SEAT with other products. Thiscould lead to flocculation and may blockthe windscreen washer jets.● When topping up service fluids, make ab-solutely certain that you fill the fluids intothe correct reservoirs. Using the wrong flu-ids could cause serious malfunctions andengine damage!● Not having windscreen wiper fluid re-duces visibility through the windscreen,and leads to loss of visibility in headlightsin models with headlight washer.

12-volt battery

General information

The battery is located in the engine compart-ment and is almost maintenance-free. It is

checked as part of the Inspection Service.Nevertheless, check the terminals are cleanand have the correct tightening torque, espe-cially in summer and winter.

All work on batteries requires specialistknowledge. Please refer to a SEAT OfficialService or a workshop specialising in batter-ies: risk of burns or exploding battery!

The battery must not be opened. Never tryto change the fluid level of the battery. Oth-erwise explosive gas is released from the bat-tery that could cause an explosion.

Battery warning indications

Wear eye protection.

Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wear pro-tective gloves and eye protection. Rinse anysplashes of electrolyte with plenty of water.

Fires, sparks, open flames and smoking areprohibited.

The battery should only be charged in a well-ventilated zone. Risk of explosion!

Keep children away from acid and batteries!

Winter conditionsDuring the winter, the starting power may bereduced, and if necessary, the battery shouldbe charged ›››

Automatic disconnection of devicesThe intelligent vehicle electrical system auto-matically implements a range of measures toprevent the battery from discharging whenhigh demands are made on it:

● Where necessary, the power to the mostpowerful devices is reduced or even com-pletely disconnected.

The on-board management programmecannot always prevent the battery from run-ning flat. For example, when leaving the igni-tion connected for a long period of time withthe drive system switched off or when leavingthe dipped beam lights or parking lights on,while the vehicle is parked.

Why the 12-volt battery discharges:● Long-term parking with the drive systemdisconnected but with the ignition connected.● Use of the electric devices with the drivesystem disconnected.

WARNINGAlways be aware of the danger of injuryand chemical burns as well as the risk ofaccident or fire when working on the bat-tery and the electrical system:● Wear eye protection. Protect your eyes,skin and clothing from acid and particlescontaining lead.

186


● Battery acid is extremely corrosive. Wearprotective gloves and eye protection. Donot tilt the batteries. This could spill acidthrough the vents.● Neutralise any electrolyte splashes onthe skin, eyes or clothing with a soapy solu-tion, and rinse off with plenty of water. Ifacid is swallowed by mistake, consult adoctor immediately.● Fires, sparks, open flames and smokingare prohibited. When handling cables andelectrical equipment, avoid causing sparksand electrostatic charge. Never short thebattery terminals. High-energy sparks cancause injury.● A highly explosive mixture of gases is re-leased when the battery is under charge.The batteries should be charged in a well-ventilated room only.● Keep children away from acid and bat-teries.● Before working on the electrical system,you must switch off the engine, the ignitionand all electrical devices. The negative ca-ble on the battery must be disconnected.When a light bulb is changed, you need on-ly switch off the light.● When disconnecting the battery from thevehicle on-board network, disconnect firstthe negative cable and then the positivecable.● Switch off all electrical devices beforereconnecting the battery. Reconnect first

the positive cable and then the negativecable. Never reverse the polarity of theconnections. This could cause an electricalfire.● Never charge a frozen battery, or onewhich has thawed. This could result in ex-plosions and chemical burns. Always re-place a battery which has frozen. A flatbattery can also freeze at temperaturesclose to 0°C (+32°F).● Ensure that the vent hose is always con-nected to the battery.● Never use a defective battery. This couldcause an explosion. Replace a damagedbattery immediately.

CAUTION● Do not expose the battery to direct sun-light over a long period of time, as the in-tense ultraviolet radiation can damage thebattery housing.● If the vehicle is left standing in cold con-ditions for a long period, protect the bat-tery from “freezing”. If it freezes it will bedamaged.

Warning lamp

It lights up

Alternator fault.

The control lamp lights up when the ignition isswitched on. It should go out when the enginehas started running.

If the control lamp lights up while driving,the alternator is no longer charging the bat-tery. You should immediately drive to thenearest specialised workshop.

You should avoid using electrical equipmentthat is not absolutely necessary because thiswill drain the battery.

Checking the 12-volt battery elec-trolyte level

Fig. 165 In the engine compartment: removethe lid from the vehicle's battery.

The electrolyte level should be checked reg-ularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot coun-tries and in older batteries. »

187

Practical tips

● Open the bonnet and remove the coverprotecting the front part of the battery bypressing on the locking tabs in the direction ofthe arrows ››› Fig. 165.● Check the colour display in the "magic eye"on the top of the battery.● If there are air bubbles in the window, tapthe window gently until they disperse.

The “magic eye” indicator, located on the topof the battery changes colour, depending onthe charge state and electrolyte level of thebattery.

There are two different colours:

● Black: correct charge status.● Transparent/light yellow: the battery mustbe replaced. Contact a specialised work-shop.

Charging or changing the 12-voltbattery

If you often drive short distances or if the ve-hicle is not driven for long periods, the batteryshould be checked by a specialised work-shop between the scheduled services.

If the battery has discharged and you haveproblems starting the vehicle, the batterymight be damaged. If this happens, we rec-ommend you have the vehicle battery

checked by a Technical Service where it willbe re-charged or replaced.

Charging the batteryThe vehicle battery should be charged by aspecialised workshop only, as batteries usingspecial technology have been installed andthey must be charged in a controlled environ-ment.

Replacing a vehicle batteryThe battery has been developed to suit theconditions of its location and has specialsafety features. If the battery must be re-placed, consult a technical service for infor-mation on electromagnetic compatibility, thesize and maintenance, performance andsafety requirements of the new battery inyour vehicle before you purchase one. SEATrecommends you have the battery replacedby a technical service.

WARNING● Always use only maintenance free bat-teries that do not run flat alone and whoseproperties, specifications and size corre-spond to the standard battery. The specifi-cations are indicated on the battery case.● Before starting any work on the batteries,you must read and observe the warnings››› in General information on page 186.

For the sake of the environment Batteries contain toxic substances suchas sulphuric acid and lead. They must bedisposed of appropriately and must not bedisposed of with ordinary household waste.

188

Wheels

Wheels

Wheels and tyres

General notes

– When driving with new tyres, be especiallycareful during the first 500 km (300 miles).

– If you have to drive over a kerb or similarobstacle, drive very slowly and as near aspossible at a right angle to the obstacle.

– Check from time to time if the tyres aredamaged (punctures, cuts, cracks ordents). Remove any foreign objects em-bedded in the treads.

– Damaged wheels and tyres must be re-placed immediately.

– Keep grease, oil and fuel off the tyres.

– Replace any missing valve caps as soon aspossible.

– Mark the wheels before taking them off sothat they rotate in the same direction whenput back.

– When removed, the wheels or tyres shouldbe stored in a cool, dry and preferably darkplace.

Low profile tyresLow profile tyres have a wider tread, a largerwheel diameter and a lower sidewall height.Therefore, its driving behaviour is more agile.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres, for instance due tostrong knocks, potholes, manhole covers andkerbs. Correct tyre pressure is very important››› page 191.

To avoid damage to tyres and wheels, drivewith special care when driving on roads inpoor condition.

Visually check your wheels every 3000 km.

If the tyres or rims have received a heavy im-pact or have been damaged, have a special-ised workshop check whether or not it is nec-essary to change the tyre.

Low profile tyres may deteriorate more quick-ly than standard tyres.

Concealed damageDamage to tyres and rims is often not readilyvisible. If you notice unusual vibration or thecar pulling to one side, this may indicatethat one of the tyres is damaged. Reducespeed immediately if there is any reason tosuspect that damage may have occurred. In-spect the tyres for damage. If no externaldamage is visible, drive slowly and carefullyto the nearest specialised workshop andhave the car inspected.

Foreign objects inserted in the tyre● Do not remove foreign bodies if they havepenetrated through the tyre wall!● If the vehicle comes with a tyre mobilitysystem, where necessary seal the damagedtyre as shown in section ››› page 36. Use aspecialised workshop for repair or replace-ment. SEAT recommends visiting a SEATdealership for this.

The sealant at the lower part of the tyre treadwraps around the foreign body and provision-ally seals the tyre.

Tyres with directional tread patternAn arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the di-rection of rotation on single drive tyres. Al-ways note the direction of rotation indicatedwhen mounting the wheel. This guaranteesoptimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplan-ing, excessive noise and wear.

Subsequent fitting of accessoriesIf you wish to change or fit wheels, rims orwheel trims, we recommend that you consultwith a SEAT Official Service centre for adviceregarding current techniques.

Speed symbolsThe speed rating indicates the maximumspeed permitted for the tyres.

max. 150 km/h (93 mph) »P189

Practical tips

max. 160 km/h (99 mph)max. 170 km/h (106 mph)max. 180 km/h (112 mph)max. 190 km/h (118 mph)max. 200 km/h (124 mph)max. 210 km/h (130 mph)max. 240 km/h (149 mph)

Some manufacturers use the letters “ZR” fortyres with a maximum authorised speedabove 240 km/h (149 mph).

WARNING● New tyres do not have maximum grip dur-ing the first 500 km. Drive particularlycarefully to avoid possible accidents.● Never drive with damaged tyres. Thismay cause an accident.● If you notice unusual vibrations or if thevehicle pulls to one side when driving, stopthe vehicle immediately and check thetyres.● Never use old tyres or those with an un-known history of use.

QRSTUHV

New wheels and tyres

It is best to have all wheels and tyres servicedby a specialised workshop. There they havethe required knowledge, the special tools andthe corresponding spare parts.

● Even winter tyres lose their grip on ice. If youhave installed new tyres, drive the first 500km carefully and at a moderate speed.● All four wheels must be fitted with tyres ofthe same type, size (rolling circumference)and, if possible, tread pattern.● When changing tyres, do not change justone; change at least two on the same axle.● If you want to equip your vehicle with acombination tyres and rims that are differentto those fitted in the factory, inform your spe-cialised workshop before purchasing them››› The sizes of the rims and tyres approved foryour vehicle are listed in the vehicle docu-mentation (e.g. EC Certificate of Conformityor COC document1)). The vehicle documen-tation varies depending on the country of res-idence.

If the type of spare wheel is different form thenormal wheels — e.g. in the case of wintertyres or particularly wide tyres — the sparewheel should only be used temporarily in the

event of a puncture, and the vehicle shouldbe driven with care. Refit the normal roadwheel as soon as possible.

Manufacturing dateThe manufacturing date is also indicated onthe tyre sidewall (or on the inside face of thewheel):

DOT ... 2218 ...it means, for example, that the tyre was man-ufactured in the 22nd week of 2018.

WARNING● Use only combinations of tyres and rims,as well as suitable wheel nuts, approved bySEAT. Otherwise the vehicle may be dam-aged, causing an accident.● For technical reasons it is not possible touse wheels of other vehicles; in some casesnot even wheels from the same vehiclemodel should be used.● Always ensure that the tyres you havechosen have adequate clearance. Whenselecting replacement tyres, do not relyentirely on the nominal tyre size marked onthe tyre, since the nominal tyre size can dif-fer significantly depending on the manu-facturer. Lack of clearance can damagethe tyres or the vehicle and, as a result, en-danger road safety. Risk of accident!

1) COC = certificate of conformity.190

Wheels

● Only use tyres that are over 6 years old inan emergency, and drive with due care.● The fitting of tyres with run-flat proper-ties is not permitted on your vehicle! Pro-hibited use can cause accidents or candamage your vehicle.● If decorative hubcaps are subsequentlyfitted, make sure that they allow enough airin to cool the braking system. Risk of acci-dent!

For the sake of the environmentOld tyres must be disposed of according tothe laws in the country concerned.

Note● A SEAT Service Centre should be consul-ted to find out whether wheels or tyres ofdifferent sizes to those originally fitted bySEAT can be fitted, and to find out aboutthe combinations allowed between thefront axle (axle 1) and the rear axle (axle 2).● Never mount used tyres if you are notsure of their “previous history”.

Tyre life

Fig. 166 Location of the tyre pressure sticker.

Correct inflation pressures and sensible driv-ing habits will increase the useful life of yourtyres.

● Check tyre pressure at least once a month,and also prior to any long trip.● The tyre pressure should only be checkedwhen the tyres are cold. Do not reduce thepressure of warm tyres.● Adjust tyre pressure to the load being car-ried by the vehicle ››› Fig. 166.● In vehicles with a tyre pressure indicator,save the modified tyre pressure ››› page 195.

● Avoid fast cornering and hard acceleration.● Inspect the tyres for irregular wear fromtime to time.

Tyre pressureThe values of the tyre pressure are shown onthe sticker label located on the read frame ofthe front left door ››› Fig. 166.

Insufficient or excessive pressure greatly re-duces the useful life of the tyres and adverse-ly affects vehicle performance and ride. Cor-rect inflation pressures are very important,especially at high speeds.

Depending on the vehicle, tyre pressure canbe adjusted to medium load to improve driv-ing comfort (tyre pressure ››› Fig. 166).When driving with comfort tyre pressure, en-ergy consumption may increase slightly.

The tyre pressure must be adjusted accord-ing to the load the vehicle is carrying. If thevehicle is going to be fully loaded, increasethe tyre pressure to the maximum load valueshown on the sticker label ››› Fig. 166.

Do not forget the spare wheel when checkingthe tyre pressures: Keep this spare wheel in-flated to the highest pressure required for theroad wheels.

In the case of a minimised temporary sparewheel (125/70 R16 or 125/70 R18) inflate to apressure of 4.2 bar as indicated on the tyrepressure label ››› Fig. 166. »

191

Practical tips

Driving styleFast cornering, heavy acceleration and hardbraking (squealing tyres) all increase tyrewear.

Wheel balanceThe wheels on new vehicles are balanced.However, certain circumstances may lead toimbalance (run-out), which is detected as vi-brations in the steering wheel.

Unbalanced wheels should be rebalanced,as they otherwise cause excessive wear onsteering, suspension and tyres. A wheel mustalso be rebalanced when a new tyre is fittedor if a tyre is repaired.

Incorrect wheel alignmentIncorrect running gear alignment causes ex-cessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of thevehicle. If you notice excessive tyre wear, youshould check wheel alignment at a SEAT Of-ficial Service.

WARNINGUnsuitable handling of the wheels andtyres may lead to sudden tyre pressure los-ses, to tread separation or even to a blow-out.● The driver is responsible for ensuring thatall of the vehicle tyres are correctly infla-ted to the right pressure. The recommen-

ded tyre pressure is indicated on the label››› Fig. 166.● Check tyre pressures regularly and en-sure they are maintained at the pressuresindicated. Tyre pressure that is too lowcould cause overheating, resulting in treaddetachment or even burst tyres.● Tyre pressure should be that indicated onthe label when the tyres are cold at alltimes ››› Fig. 166.● Regularly check the cold inflation pres-sure of the tyres. If necessary, change thetyre pressure of the vehicle tyres while theyare cold.● Regularly check your tyres for damageand wear.● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeed or loads specified for the type oftyre fitted on your vehicle.

For the sake of the environmentInsufficient tyre pressure increases energyconsumption.

Tread wear indicators

Fig. 167 Tyre profile: tread wear indicators.

Fig. 168 Interchanging tyres.

Wear indicators around 1.6 mm high can befound on the base of the original tyre treads,ordered at regular intervals and runningacross the tread ››› Fig. 167. The letters "TWI"or triangles on the sidewall of the tyre markthe position of the wear indicators.

192

Wheels

The minimum permitted profile depth1) havebeen reached when the tyres have worndown to the wear indicators. Replace thetyres with new ones ››› .

Changing wheels aroundIn order to wear the wheels in a uniform man-ner, it is recommended to interchange themregularly according to the diagram››› Fig. 168. The useful life of all the tyres willthen be about the same time.

WARNINGThe tyres must be replaced at the latestwhen the tread is worn down to the treadwear indicators. Failure to follow this in-struction could result in an accident.● Particularly in difficult driving conditionssuch as wet or icy roads. It is important thatthe tyre tread be as deep as possible andbe approximately the same on the tyres ofboth the front and the rear axles.● The scant driving safety due to insuffi-cient tread depth is particularly evident invehicle handling, when there is a risk of“aquaplaning” in deep puddles of waterand when driving through corners, andbraking is also adversely affected.

● The speed has to be adapted according-ly, otherwise there is a risk of losing controlover the vehicle.

Wheel bolts

The wheel bolts are matched to the rims.When installing different wheels (for instancealloy wheels or wheels with winter tyres) it isimportant to use the correct wheel bolts withthe right length and correctly shaped boltheads. This ensures that wheels are fitted se-curely and that the brake system functionscorrectly.

The wheel bolts must be clean and turn easi-ly.

A special adapter is required to turn the anti-theft wheel bolts* ››› page 40.

WARNINGWheel nuts should never be greased oroiled.● Use only wheel bolts which belong to thewheel.● If the prescribed torque of the wheelbolts is too low, they could loosen whilstthe vehicle is in motion. Risk of accident! If

the tightening torque is too high, the wheelbolts and threads can be damaged.

CAUTIONSee ››› page 43 to find out the recommen-ded tightening torque for wheel nuts forsteel and alloy rims.

Winter tyres

– Winter tyres must be fitted on all fourwheels.

– Only use winter tyres that are approved foryour vehicle.

– Please note that the maximum permissiblespeed for winter tyres may be lower thanfor summer tyres.

– Also note that winter tyres are no longer ef-fective when the tread is worn down.

– After fitting the wheels you must alwayscheck the tyre pressures. When doing so,take into account the correct tyre pressureslisted on the rear of the front left door frame››› page 191.

In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-siderably improve vehicle handling. The »

1) Follow the regulations of the country you aredriving in.

193

Practical tips

design of summer tyres (width, rubber com-pound, tread pattern) gives less grip on iceand snow. This applies particularly to vehiclesequipped with wide section tyres or withhigh speed tyres (code letters H, V or Y onthe sidewall).

Only use winter tyres of the correct type ap-proved for your vehicle. The sizes of thesetyres are specified in the vehicle's documents(e.g. EC Certificate of Conformity or COC1)).The vehicle documentation varies dependingon the country of residence.

Winter tyres lose a great deal of their proper-ties when the tread is worn down to a depthof 4 mm.

The performance of winter tyres is also se-verely impaired by ageing, even if the tread isstill much deeper than 4 mm.

A code letter indicating the speed limit isstamped on all winter tyres ››› page 189.

Vehicles capable of exceeding these speedsmust have an appropriate sticker attachedso that it is visible to the driver. Suitable stick-ers are available from the SEAT Official Serv-ice and specialised workshop. Please notethe regulations to this effect in your country.

“All-weather” tyres can also be used insteadof winter tyres.

Using winter tyres with V-ratingPlease note that the generally applicable240 km/h (149 mph) speed for winter tyreswith the letter V is subject to technical re-strictions; the maximum permissible speedfor your vehicle may be significantly lower.The maximum speed limit for these tyres de-pends directly on the maximum axle weightsfor your car and on the listed weight rating ofthe tyres being used.

It is best to contact a SEAT Official Service tocheck the maximum speed which is permissi-ble for the V-rated tyres fitted on your car onthe basis of this information.

WARNINGExceeding the maximum speed permittedfor the winter tyres fitted on your car cancause tyre failure, resulting in a loss of con-trol of the vehicle – risk of accident.

For the sake of the environmentWhen winter is over, change back to sum-mer tyres at an appropriate moment. Intemperatures above +7°C (+45°F), perform-ance will be improved if summer tyres areused. Rolling noise, wear and energy con-sumption will all be reduced.

Snow chains

Snow chains should only be used on thefront wheels.

● Check that they are correctly seated afterdriving for a few yards; correct the position ifnecessary, in accordance with the manufac-turer's fitting instructions.● Keep your speed below 50 km/h (30 mph).

Snow chains will improve braking ability aswell as traction in winter conditions.

For technical reasons snow chains may onlybe used with the following wheel rim/tyrecombination.

165/70 R14Chains with links of maximum 15 mm

175/65 R14

Remove any central wheel trims and the rimring before fitting snow chains.

WARNINGThe use of unsuitable or incorrectly fittedchains could lead to serious accidents anddamage.● Always the appropriate snow chains.● Observe the fitting instructions providedby the snow chain manufacturer.

1) COC = certificate of conformity.194

Wheels

● Never exceed the maximum permittedspeeds when driving with snow chains.

CAUTION● Remove the snow chains to drive onroads without snow. Otherwise they will im-pair vehicle handling, damage the tyresand wear out very quickly.● Wheel rims may be damaged or scratch-ed if the chains come into direct contactwith them. SEAT recommends the use ofcovered snow chains.

Tyre pressure loss indicator*

Control lamp

It lights up

The tyre pressure of a wheel is much lower than thevalue set by the driver ››› in Tyre monitoring sys-tem* on page 195.

Several control and warning lamps light upfor a few seconds when the ignition is switch-ed on while the function is verified. They willswitch off after a few seconds.


Tyre monitoring system*

Fig. 169 Centre console: tyre monitoring sys-tem button.

The tyre pressure loss indicator compares therevolutions and thus the wheel diameter ofeach wheel using the ESC. If the wheel diam-eter of a wheel changes, the control indicatorof the tyres informs of this fact . The wheeldiameter changes when:

● Tyre pressure is insufficient.● The tyre structure is damaged.● The vehicle is unbalanced because of aload.● The wheels of one axle are under morepressure (for example, driving with a trailer oron steep slopes).● The vehicle is fitted with snow chains.● The temporary spare wheel is fitted.● The wheel on one axle is changed.

Tyre pressure settingAfter changing the tire pressure or changingone or more wheels, keep the button››› Fig. 169 pressed, with the ignition switchedon, until an acoustic signal is heard.

If the wheels are under excessive load (for ex-ample, driving with a trailer or heavy load),the tyre pressure must be increased to therecommended value for a full load (see thesticker ››› Fig. 166) If the tyre monitor systembutton is pressed down, the new tyre pres-sures are confirmed.

WARNINGWhen the tyres are inflated at differentpressures or at a pressure that is too lowthen a tyre may be damaged resulting in aloss of control of the vehicle and a seriousor fatal accident.● If the lamp lights up, reduce speed im-mediately and avoid any sudden turning orbraking manoeuvre. Stop when possible,and check the tyre pressure and status.● The tyre monitoring system can only op-erate correctly if all of the tyres are infla-ted to the correct pressure when cold.● If a tyre has not been punctured and itdoes not have to be changed immediately,drive to the nearest specialised workshopat a moderate speed and have the tyrechecked and inflated to the correct pres-sure. »

195

Practical tips

Note● Driving for the first time with new tyres ata high speed can cause them to slightly ex-pand, which could then produce an airpressure warning.● Do not only rely on the tyre monitoringsystem. Regularly check your tyres to en-sure that the tyre pressure is correct andthat the tyres are not damaged due topuncture, cuts, tears and impacts/dents.Remove objects from the tyres only whenthey have not pierced the tyres.● The tyre monitoring indicator does notfunction when there is a fault in the ESC orABS ››› page 158.● If the battery is disconnected, the yellowwarning lamp lights up after turning theignition on. This should turn off after a briefjourney.

196

SEAT Maintenance Programme

Maintenance

SEAT Maintenance Pro-gramme

Service intervals

Service works and Digital Mainte-nance Plan

Log of services performed (“Digital Main-tenance Plan”)The SEAT dealership or a specialised work-shop records Service receipts in a centralsystem. Thanks to this comprehensive docu-mentation of the service history, it is possibleto reproduce the services performed anytime. SEAT recommends requesting a Servicereceipt after every service carried out con-taining all the services carried out on the sys-tem.

Whenever there is a new service the receipt isreplaced with a current one.

The Digital Maintenance Plan is not avail-able in some markets. In this case, yourSEAT dealer will inform you about the cur-rent documentation of the work.

Service worksIn the Digital Maintenance Plan, your SEATauthorised service or specialised workshopdocuments the following information:

● When each one of the services was carriedout.● Whether a specific repair has been sugges-ted, e.g. changing the brake pads in the nearfuture.● If you have expressed a special request forthe maintenance. Your Service Advisor willwrite the work order.● The components or fluids that werechanged.● The date of the next service.

The Long Life Mobility Warranty is valid untilthe next inspection. This information is docu-mented in all checks performed.

The type and the volume of the service mayvary from one vehicle to another. A special-ised workshop will be able to provide specificinformation on the jobs for your vehicle.

WARNINGIf the services are insufficient or not per-formed and if the service intervals are notobserved, the vehicle may be immobilisedin traffic cause an accident and severe in-juries.

● Make sure that any repairs are carriedout by a SEAT authorised service or speci-alised workshop.

CAUTIONSEAT cannot be held liable for any damageto the vehicle due to insufficient work or oflack of availability of spare parts.

NoteRegular services on the vehicle not onlymaintain its value, but also its correct oper-ation and road safety. For this reason, con-duct the services in accordance with SEATguidelines.

Set service

Service intervals displayAt SEAT, the dates of the services are indica-ted by the service intervals display of the in-strument panel ››› page 67 .

The service intervals display informs of thedates of the services. When it is time to per-form the corresponding service, other neces-sary additional work may also be done, suchas changing the brake fluid.

197

Maintenance

Information on the conditions ofuse

The service intervals and groups are usuallybased on normal conditions of use.

If, on the other hand, the vehicle is under ad-verse conditions of use, some of the workmust be carried out before the next serviceperiod or even between service intervals.

Conditions of use adverse include:

● Using the vehicle in areas with thick dust.● Using the vehicle mostly in situations with alot of traffic and stops (e.g. in a city).● Using the vehicle mostly in winter.

This applies especially for the followingparts (depending on equipment):

● Dust and pollen filter● Air Care allergen filter

The Service Advisor of your specialisedworkshop will gladly inform you about theneed of performing service work betweennormal service intervals, always consideringthe conditions of use of your vehicle.

Additional service offers

Approved spare parts

Original SEAT Spare Parts have been con-ceived for their vehicles and approved bySEAT, with a special emphasis on safety.These parts correspond exactly to the manu-facturer's requirements in terms of design,accuracy of the measurements and materi-als. The original SEAT Spare Parts have beenconceived exclusively for your vehicle. For thisreason, we always recommend the use ofOriginal SEAT Spare Parts. SEAT cannot beheld liable for the safety and suitability ofparts from other manufacturers.

Approved spare parts

The approved exchange parts, following themanufacturer's instructions, constitute anoth-er service available to you, offering the possi-bility of replacing complete sets, amongwhich the best known are: control units, elec-trical elements, etc.

These parts are, approved parts, and are thesame as the factory parts, which are also ap-proved spare parts.

Original accessories

We recommend you only use SEAT OriginalAccessories and SEAT approved accessoriesfor your vehicle. The reliability, safety andsuitability of these accessories have been in-spected specifically for this type of vehicle.SEAT cannot be held liable for the safety andsuitability of parts from other manufacturers.

SEAT Service Mobility (SEATService Mobility)

Since the moment you purchase your SEATvehicle you will be able to enjoy the benefitsand coverage of the SEAT Mobility Service.

For the first two years after the purchase,your new SEAT vehicle is automatically cov-ered by the SEAT Mobility Service without ad-ditional costs.

If you wish to enjoy this service after this peri-od, you can extend SEAT Mobility as long asyou carry out the recommended Inspectionand Maintenance Services at a SEAT Author-ised Service.

If your SEAT vehicle is immobilised due to afault or an accident, our assistance serviceswill help you keep moving.

Take into account that the SEAT MobilityService differs depending on the country inwhich the vehicle was purchased. For further

198

Vehicle maintenance

information ask your SEAT dealership or theSEAT website in your country.

Warranty

Fault-free operation warranty

SEAT Authorised Services ensure the perfectcondition of new vehicles. Check the pur-chase agreement or complementary addi-tional documentation provided by your Tech-nical Service to see the conditions and theterms of the warranty. Consult further infor-mation in this regard in your SEAT OfficialService.

Commercial warranty for the high-voltage battery of electric and hy-brid vehicles of SEAT S.A.

1. Complementing the aforementioned war-ranties, the seller SEAT dealer grants thehigh-voltage batteries of the vehicles that ithas sold an 8-year or 160,000-km warranty,whichever comes first, for any material or fin-ish defect.

2. The reduction of the battery’s capacityover time is conditioned by the component it-self and does not represent a defect from awarranty point of view, provided said capaci-

ty is not below 70% of the useful capacity be-fore 8 years or 160,000 km have passed,whichever comes first.

3. The warranty for high-voltage batteries willbe invalidated when the defect is due to use,handling or maintenance not in accordancewith the content of the instruction manual.This is particularly applicable the batterycharge.

4. In addition, except for the duration of thewarranty, all conditions relating to the legalwarranty of the SEAT dealer (requirements,criteria for assessing the absence of defects,exclusion grounds, processing of entitlementsto benefits, entry into force, start and scopeof the warranty validity period, etc.) shall ap-ply in relation to the high-voltage battery.

Vehicle maintenance

Maintenance and cleaning

Basic observations

Regular and careful care helps to maintainthe value of your vehicle. In addition, it maybecome a prerequisite to demand the war-ranty in the event of corrosion damage anddeficiencies in the paint coat of the body-work.

Specialised workshops have the necessarycare products. Please follow the instructionsfor application on the packaging.

WARNING● Cleaning products and other materialsused for car care can be damaging to yourhealth if misused.● Always keep care products in a safeplace, out of the reach of children. Dangerof poisoning!

For the sake of the environment● When purchasing car care products,chose products that are compatible withthe environment.● The waste from car-care products shouldnot be disposed of with ordinary householdwaste.

199

Maintenance

Washing the vehicle

The longer you take to clean the tanks, e.g.remains of insects, bird excrements, tree resinor anti frost salt adhered to your vehicle, themore damage it can cause to the surface.High temperatures, for instance strong sun-light, further intensify the damage.

Before washing the car, soften the dirt usingplenty of water.

To remove encrusted dirt such as insects, birddroppings or tree resin, use a lot of water anda microfibre cloth.

Have the underside of the vehicle washed af-ter the end of the anti frost salts in winter.

High pressure cleaning equipmentWhen washing the vehicle with a high-pres-sure cleaner, always follow the operating in-structions for the equipment. This appliesparticularly to the operating pressure and thedistance between the spraying water. Do notpoint the jet directly towards the side win-dows, doors or covers; the same applies forthe tyres, rubber hoses, damping material,sensors* or camera lenses*. Keep a distanceof at least 40 cm.

Do not remove snow and ice with a high-pressure cleaner.

Do not use a nozzle that sprays the water outin a direct stream or one that has a rotatingjet for forcing off dirt.

The water temperature must not exceed60°C.

Automatic car washesSpray the vehicle before starting the carwash.

Make sure that the windows are closed andthe windscreen wipers are deactivated. Bearin mind the instructions of the car wash tunneloperator, especially if your vehicle has de-tachable parts.

Use of car washes without brushes if possible.

Washing by handClean your vehicle from top to bottom with asoft sponge or with a brush. Only use clean-ing products that do not contain solvents.

Washing vehicles with a matte paint byhandTo prevent damage to the vehicle whenwashing it, first remove the thicker dust anddirt. To remove traces of insects, grease andfingerprints, it is best to use a special cleanerfor matte paint.

Apply the product with a microfibre cloth. Toavoid damaging the surface of the paint, donot apply too much pressure.

Rinse with plenty of water. Then clean it witha neutral cleaning product and a soft microfi-bre cloth.

Rinse the vehicle again with plenty of waterand then leave it to dry. Remove traces ofwater with a leather cloth.

WARNING● Only wash the vehicle with the ignitionswitched off or according to the specifica-tions of the car wash tunnel operator. Riskof accident!● When cleaning the underbody or the in-side of the wheel arches, protect yourselffrom sharp or pointy metal parts. Risk ofcut!● After cleaning the brakes could act moreslowly due to moisture or, in winter, the iceon the brake discs and pads. Risk of acci-dent! In this case the brakes should bedried by pressing the brake pedal severaltimes.

CAUTION● Before washing the vehicle in an auto-matic car wash, please make sure to re-tract the exterior mirrors to prevent themfrom being damaged. The electric folding*exterior mirrors should only be folded elec-trically!● Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight.Risk of damaging the paint job!

200

Vehicle maintenance

● Do not use sponges, abrasive householdsponges or similar to clean insect remains.Risk of damaging the surface!● Vehicle parts with matte paint:– Do not use polish or hard wax. Risk of

damaging the surface!– Never select washing programmes that

include the use of wax. This could dam-age the appearance of matte paint.

– Do not put stickers or magnets on partswith matte paint, as removing themmay damage the paint.

For the sake of the environmentThe car should only be washed in specialwash bays. These places are designed toprevent the water that is used for washing,which may be contaminated, from enteringthe drains.

Cleaning and maintenance instruc-tions

The cleaning and maintenance of individualcomponents of the vehicle can be checked inthe following tables. The contents should beunderstood merely as a recommendation. Goto your specialised workshop if you have spe-cial questions or parts that are not listed. Takehe general considerations into account ››› in Take special care with... on page 204.

Cleaning the exterior

Windscreen wipers

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with wipers

Headlights / Tail lights

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)

a) Neutral soap solution: two tablespoons maximum in1 litre of water

Sensors / Camera lenses

Problem Solution

Dirt

Sensors: soft cloth with a sol-vent-free cleaning productCamera lenses: soft cloth withan alcohol-free cleaning prod-uct

Snow/ice Hand brush/Anti frost spraywith no solvents

Wheels

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water

Brake abrasiondust

Acid-free special cleaningproduct

End exhausts

Problem Solution

Antifreeze salt Water, if a steel cleaning prod-uct is required

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if asteel cleaning product is re-quired


Paint

Problem Solution

Paint flawsCheck the paint's colour codein an authorised service and re-store with a touch-up pencil

Spilled fuel Immediately rinse with water

Environmental rusttank

Apply rust remover and thenapply hard wax. Go you yourspecialised workshop if youhave any queries

Corrosion Have your specialised work-shop take care of this

The water doesnot create drop-lets on the cleanpaint

Maintain with hard wax (atleast 2 times a year) »

201

Maintenance

Problem Solution

No shine de-spite sober main-tenance/paint

Treat with suitable wax and ap-ply paint preservative after-wards if the wax used does notcontain preservative ingredi-ents

Tanks, e.g. insectremains, birddroppings, treesap, road salt

Immediately soften with waterand remove with a microfibrecloth

Fat-based dirt,e.g. cosmeticproducts orsunscreen

Delete immediately with a neu-tral soap solutiona) and a softcloth


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean the same way as pain-ted parts ››› page 200

Decoration slides

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft sponge with neutral soapsolutiona)


Interior cleaning

Windows

Problem Solution

Dirt Apply windscreen cleaner andthen dry with a cloth

Covers / Trims

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona)


Plastic parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Damp cloth

Encrusted dirt Neutral soap solutiona), if pos-sible solvent-free plastic clean-er


Displays/instrument panel

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft cloth with a liquid crystaldisplay cleaner

Control panels

Problem Solution

Dirt Soft brush, then soft cloth withneutral soap solutiona)


Seat belts

Problem Solution

Dirt Neutral soap solutiona), al-lowed to dry before retracting


Fabrics, artificial, Alcantara leather

Problem Solution

Particles of dirtstuck to surfaces

Vacuum cleaner

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Absorbent cloth and neutralsoap solutiona)

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Apply a neutral soap solutiona).Absorb the dissolved greaseand paint particles drying withan absorbent cloth, in case youmust treat it with water after-wards

202

Vehicle maintenance

Problem Solution

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Special stain remove: dry withan absorbent cloth, if applica-ble, apply neutral soap solutionafterwardsa)


Natural leather

Problem Solution

Recent dirt Cotton cloth with neutral soapsolutiona)

Water-based dirt,e.g. coffee, tea,blood etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothDry stains: stain remover suita-ble for leather

Grease-baseddirt, e.g. oil, make-up, etc.

Recent stains: absorbent clothand stain remover suitable forleatherDry stains: grease solventspray

Special dirt, e.g.pens, nail polish,dispersion paint,shoe cream etc.

Stain remover suitable forleather

Care Apply preservative cream regu-larly to protect from sunlight.Use a colour preservative if re-quired


Carbon fibre parts

Problem Solution

Dirt Clean like plastic parts

Take special care with...

Headlights/tail lights● Do not clean the headlights/tail lights witha dry cloth or sponge.● Do not use cleaning products that containalcohol. Risk of cracks!

Wheels● Do not use for paint wax or other abrasiveproducts.● If the protective coating on the paint of therim has been damaged due to stone impacts,scratches, etc., the damage should be re-paired immediately.

Camera lenses● Do not use hot or warm water to remove iceor snow from the camera lenses. Risk ofcracking the lens!● To clean the camera lens, never use abra-sive cleaning products or products with alco-hol. Risk of scratches and cracks!

Windows● Remove snow and ice from windows andexterior mirrors with a plastic scraper only. Toavoid scratches, the scraper should only bepushed in one direction and not moved toand fro.● Never remove snow or ice from windowsand rearview mirrors with warm or hot water.Risk of cracks on the windows!● To prevent damage to the heating of therear window, do not put stickers over theheating elements.

Covers/trims● Do not use cleaning products or chromebased cleaning agents.

Paint● The vehicle must be free from dirt and dustbefore applying wax or care products. Risk ofscratches!● Do not apply wax or care products if thevehicle is exposed to direct sunlight. Risk ofdamaging the paint job!● The ambient rust deposits must not be re-moved through friction. Risk of damaging thepaint job!● Remove cosmetic products and sunlightimmediately. Risk of damaging the paint job! »

203

Maintenance

Displays/instrument panel● The displays, the instrument panel and thetrim around it must not be cleaned dry. Risk ofscratches!● Make sure that the instrument panel isswitched off and cooled down before clean-ing.● Make sure that no liquid leaks between theinstrument panel and the trim. Risk of dam-age!

Control panels● Make sure that no liquid leaks into the con-trol panels. Risk of damage!

Seat belts● Do not remove the seat belts to clean them.● Seat belts and their components must nev-er be cleaned with chemical products, norshould they be allowed to come into contactwith corrosive liquids, solvents or sharp ob-jects. Risk of damaging the fabric!● If you find any damage to the belt webbing,belt fittings, the belt retractor or the buckle,ask your specialised workshop to replace thebelt in question.

Fabrics/artificial leather/Alcantara leath-er● Do not treat artificial leather/Alcantaraleather with leather cleaning products, sol-vents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removersor similar products.

● If the stain is very hard to remove, take thevehicle to a specialised workshop to have itremoved there. This will prevent damage.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Open Velcro, e.g. on clothes can damagethe seat upholstery. Make sure that Velcrofasteners are closed.

Natural leather● Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream,spot removers or similar products on leather.● Sharp objects on clothing, such as zips, riv-ets or belts can damage the surface.● Do not use steam cleaners, brushes, hardsponges, etc. to clean.● Do not turn on seat heating* to dry theseats.● Avoid exposing leather to direct sunlight forlong periods, otherwise it may tend to losesome of its colour. If the car is left for a pro-longed period in the bright sun, it is best tocover the leather.

WARNINGDo not use water-repellent coatings on thewindscreen. In bad visibility conditions

such as humid weather, darkness or whenthe sun is in its lowest point, visibility maybe impacted. Risk of accident! Such coat-ings can also cause the windscreen wiperblades to make noise.

Note● Remains of insects can be removed muchmore easily with previously treated paint.● Regular car care treatments can preventdeposits of ambient rust.

Remove the vehicle from traffic

If you want to leave your vehicle stationaryfor a long period of time, contact a qualifiedworkshop. They will gladly inform you aboutthe necessary measures, such as anti-corro-sion protection, Service and storage.

Also bear in mind the indications regardingthe vehicle’s batteries.

204

Accessories and modifications to the vehicle

Accessories and modifi-cations to the vehicle

Accessories, spare parts andrepair work

Introduction

Always ask your dealer or specialist retailerfor advice before purchasing accessoriesand replacement parts.

Your vehicle is designed to offer a high stand-ard of active and passive safety. For this rea-son, we recommend that you ask a SEAT Offi-cial Service for advice before fitting accesso-ries or replacement parts. Your SEAT OfficialService has the latest information from themanufacturer and can recommend accesso-ries and replacement parts which are suita-ble for your requirements. They can also an-swer any questions you might have regardingofficial regulations.

We recommend you to use only SEAT acces-sories and Genuine SEAT parts®. SEAT hastested these parts and accessories for suita-bility, reliability and safety. SEAT OfficialServices have the necessary experience andfacilities to ensure that the parts are installedcorrectly and professionally.

Any retro-fitted equipment which has a di-rect effect on the vehicle and/or the way it isdriven, such as a cruise control system orelectronically-controlled suspension, mustbe approved for use in your vehicle and bearthe e mark (the European Union's authorisa-tion symbol).

If any additional electrical devices are fit-ted which do not serve to control the vehicleitself (for instance a refrigerator box, laptopor ventilator fan, etc.), they must bear the sign (manufacturer conformity declaration inthe European Union).

WARNINGAccessories, for example telephone hold-ers or cup holders, should never be fittedon the covers, or within the working rangeof the airbags. Otherwise, there is a dangerof injury if the airbag is triggered in an acci-dent.

Technical modifications

Unauthorised modifications to the electroniccomponents, software, wiring or data transferin the vehicle may cause malfunctioning.

You will appreciate that your SEAT dealershipcannot be held liable for any damagecaused by modifications and/or work per-formed incorrectly.

We therefore recommend that all work shouldbe performed by a SEAT Official Service us-ing genuine SEAT parts®.

WARNINGIncorrectly performed modifications orother work on your vehicle can lead to mal-functions and cause accidents.

Radio telephones and office equip-ment

Radio transmitters (fixed installation)Any retrofit installations of radio transmittersin the vehicle require prior approval. SEATgenerally authorises in-vehicle installationsof approved types of radio transmitters provi-ded that:

● The antenna is installed correctly.● The aerial is installed on the exterior of thevehicle (and shielded cables are used to-gether with non-reflective aerial trimming).● The effective transmitting power does notexceed 10 Watts at the aerial base.

A SEAT Official Service and specialised work-shop will be able to inform you about optionsfor installing and operating radio transmitterswith a higher transmitting power. »

205

Maintenance

Mobile radio transmittersCommercial mobile telephones or radioequipment might interfere with the electron-ics of your vehicle and cause malfunctions.This may be due to:

● No external aerial.● External aerial incorrectly installed.● Transmitting power more than 10 W.

You must, therefore, do not operate portablemobile telephones or radio equipment insidethe vehicle without a properly installed exter-nal aerial ››› .

Please note also that the maximum range ofthe equipment can only be achieved with anexternal aerial.

Business equipmentRetrofit installation of business or privateequipment in the vehicle is permitted, provi-ded the equipment cannot interfere with thedriver's immediate control of the vehicle andthat any such equipment carries the mark.Any retrofit equipment that could influencethe driver's control of the vehicle must have atype approval for your vehicle and must carrythe e mark.

WARNINGMobile telephones or radio equipmentwhich is operated inside the vehicle without

a properly installed external aerial cancreate excessive magnetic fields thatcould cause a health hazard.

Note● The posterior fitting of electric and elec-tronic equipment in this vehicle affects itslicence and could lead to the withdrawal ofthe vehicle registration document undercertain circumstances.● Please use the mobile telephone/radiooperating instructions.

206

Information for the user



Information stored by thecontrol units

Description and operation

Your vehicle is fitted with a series of electroniccontrol units that, among others, are respon-sible for the engine management. In addition,the control units monitor the proper function-ing of the airbags.

Therefore, while the vehicle is being driven,these electronic control units are continuous-ly analysing the vehicle data. In the event offaults or deviations from the theoretical val-ues, only this data is stored. Normally, thewarning lamps on the instrument panel lightup in the event of faults.

This data can only be read and analysed us-ing special equipment.

The storing of the data allows specialisedworkshops to detect and repair faults. Storeddata may include:

● Data referring to the engine● Speed● Direction of travel

● Braking force● Detection of seat belt

The vehicle control units never record conver-sations held by passengers in the vehicle.

In vehicles equipped with an emergency callfunction via the mobile phone or other appli-ances connected in the vehicle, it is possibleto send the vehicle position. If the control unitrecords an accident with airbag activation,the system may automatically send a signal.This will depend on the network operator.Normally, transmission is only possible inareas with good coverage.

Event data recorder (Event Data Recorder)The vehicle is not fitted with an event data re-corder.

An event data recorder temporarily stores thevehicle information. Therefore, in the event ofan accident, it is possible to obtain detailedinformation about how the accident occur-red. Vehicles with airbag systems can storedata relating to impact speed, seat belt sta-tus, seat positions and airbag activation timesmay be stored, etc. The volume of data de-pends on the manufacturer.

Event data recorders can only be mountedwith authorisation from the vehicle ownerand, in some countries, they are governed bylocal legislation.

Reprogramming of control unitsOn the whole, all the data required for thecomponent management is stored in thecontrol units. The programming of certainconvenience functions, such as the turn sig-nals, individual door opening and instructionson the display can be modified using specialequipment at the workshop. If the comfortfunctions are reprogrammed, the informationand Instruction Manual descriptions will notcoincide with the modified functions. There-fore, SEAT recommends that any modifica-tions be recorded in the section “Other work-shop notes” in the Maintenance Programme.

The SEAT Official Service must have a recordof any modification to the programming.

Reading the vehicle's fault memoryThere is a diagnostics connector in the vehi-cle interior for reading the vehicle fault mem-ory. The fault memory documents errors anddeviations from the theoretical values of theelectronic control units.

The diagnostics connector is in the driver sidefootwell area, next to the lever for openingthe bonnet, below a cover.

The fault memory should only be read andreset by a specialised workshop.

207


Other important information

Environmental compatibility

Environmental protection is a top priority inthe design, choice of materials and manufac-ture of your new SEAT.

Constructive measures to encourage re-cycling● Joints and connections designed for easydismantling.● Modular construction to facilitate disman-tling.● Increased use of single-grade materials.● Plastic parts and elastomers are marked inaccordance with ISO 1043, ISO 11469 andISO 1629.

Choice of materials● Use of recycled materials.● Use of compatible plastics in the same partif its components are not easily separated.● Use of recycled materials and/or materialsoriginating from renewable sources.● Reduction of volatile components, includingodour, in plastic materials.● Use of CFC-free coolants.

Ban on heavy metals, with the exceptionsdictated by law (Annex II of ELV Directive

2000/53/EC): cadmium, lead, mercury,hexavalent chromium.

Manufacturing methods● Reduction of the quantity of thinner in theprotective wax for cavities.● Use of plastic film as protection during vehi-cle transport.● Use of solvent-free stickers.● Use of CFC-free coolants in cooling sys-tems.● Recycling and energy recovery from resi-dues (RDF).● Improvement in the quality of waste water.● Use of systems for the recovery of residualheat (thermal recovery, enthalpy wheels,etc.).● The use of water-soluble paints.

Stickers and plates

Some parts in the engine compartment comefrom the factory with certificates of safety, la-bels or plates containing important informa-tion regarding the operation of the vehicle, forexample, on the battery charging socket flap,on the passenger's sun visor, on the driverdoor strut, or on the floor of the luggagecompartment.

● Never remove these certificates of safety,labels or plates, and ensure they are kept ingood condition and are legible.● If a vehicle part, bearing a certificate ofsafety, label or plate, is replaced, the special-ised workshop should attach the informationback in the same place.

Certificate of safetyA certificate of safety on the door strut statesthat all the safety standards and regulationsestablished by the national traffic authoritiesresponsible for road safety were met at thetime of manufacture. It may also give themonth and year of manufacture, togetherwith the chassis number.

Warning of high voltage labelThere is a label close to the bonnet lockwhich warns of high voltage in the vehicle'selectrical system.

Using the vehicle in other countriesand continents

The vehicle is manufactured at the factory foruse in a particular country in accordancewith the national legislation in force at thetime of manufacture.

If the vehicle is sold in another country orused in another country for an extended

208


period of time, the applicable legislation ofthat country should be observed.

It may be necessary to fit or remove certainpieces of equipment or to deactivate certainfunctions. Service work may also be affected.This is particularly true if the vehicle is used ina different climate for an extended period oftime.

CAUTION● SEAT does not accept liability for anydamage to the vehicle due to an inade-quate service or the non-availability ofgenuine spare parts.● SEAT does not accept liability if the vehi-cle does not comply in part or in full withthe legal requirements of other countries orcontinents.

Radio and antenna reception

For factory-fitted radio equipment, the aerialfor radio reception is fitted to the roof of thevehicle.

NoteIf electrical equipment such as mobile tele-phones, is used near a roof aerial, you mayobserve interference in the reception of AMstations.

Information about SEAT repairs

WARNINGRepairs or modifications which are not per-formed correctly may result in damage orerrors in the vehicle operation, affectingthe effectiveness of the driver assist andairbag systems. This could result in seriousaccident.● Have any repairs or modifications carriedout at a specialised workshop.

Declaration of conformity

The respective manufacturer hereby de-clares that the products indicated belowcomply with basic requirements and the fol-lowing provisions and important legislation onthe date of manufacture of the vehicle,among others FCC Part 15.19, FCC Part 15.21and RSS-Gen Issue 1:

Radio frequency equipment● Electronic gearbox lock.● Vehicle key

Electrical equipment● 12 volt power socket

Collection of end-of-life vehiclesand scrapping

Collection of end-of-life vehiclesSEAT is already prepared for the momentwhen you wish to scrap your vehicle and of-fers you an environmentally-friendly solution.An extensive network of used car receptioncentres already exists in much of Europe. Af-ter the vehicle has been delivered, you will re-ceive a certificate of destruction describingthe environmentally friendly scrapping of thevehicle in accordance with applicable legis-lation.

We will collect the used vehicle free ofcharge, provided it complies with all nationallegislation.

Please see your technical service for furtherinformation about the collection and scrap-ping of end-of-life vehicles.

ScrappingThe relevant safety requirements must be ob-served when the vehicle or components ofthe airbag or belt tensioner systems arescrapped. These requirements are known tospecialised workshops.

209


Recycling of electrical or electron-ic devices

All electrical or electronic devices (EED) thatare not permanently fitted in the vehicle mustbe marked with the following symbol:

This symbol indicates that EED must not bediscarded as home waste but through selec-tive waste collection.

Information about the EU Di-rective 2014/53/EU

Simplified EU compliance declara-tion

Your vehicle has different radioelectrical devi-ces. The manufacturers of these devices de-clare that they comply with Directive2014/53/EU when legally required.

The full text of the EU compliance declarationis available online at the following address:

www.seat.com/generalinfo

Table of correspondences

The table of correspondences will help you toassociate the name of the device in the dec-laration of compliance with the features ofthe vehicle and the terminology used in theon-board documentation.

Features of thevehicle

Name of the deviceaccording to the dec-laration of compli-ance

Radiofrequency re-mote control (vehicle)

FS09, FS12A, FS12P, FS1477,FS94

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxili-ary heater)

Sender STH SEAT -50000914

Telestart

Auxiliary heating 50000864 / D208L VW

Telestart

Bluetooth MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless hotspot MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Keyless Access Sys-tem

MQB-B B



Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ARS4-B

MRRevo14F

BSD3.0

Central control unit 5WK50254

5WK50474

Infotainment system MIB2 Entry

MIB Standard 2

MIB2 Main-Unit

A580 / A270

Wireless charging WCH-183

Connection to the ex-ternal antenna of thecar

UMTS/GSM-MMC

UMTS/GSM-MMC-AG2

LTE-MBC-EU

Instrument panel eNSF

Immobiliser integrated ininstrument panel moduleinstrument cluster

210




Antenna FM/AM Antenna Base

Antennas MQB27 Small/Bigfamily

Antennas KSA Small Fam III

5Q0.035.507 Roof Antenna

GNSS Antenna VAG720166002

8S7.035.503.B

Antenna amplifiers 6F0.035.2256F9.035.225

Addresses of the manufacturers

According to the Directive 2014/53/EU, allrelevant components must include the ad-dress of the manufacturer.

The address of the manufacturers of compo-nents that, due to their size or nature, cannotinclude a sticker are listed below, as long as itis legally required:

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radiofrequency remotecontrol key

Della KGaA Hueck & Co.Rixbecker Straße 7559552 Lippstadt,GERMANY

Radioelectricalequipment fittedin the vehicle

Addresses of themanufacturers

Radio frequency re-mote control (auxiliaryheater)

Digades gmbHÄußere Weberstraße 2002763 Zittau, GERMANY

Webasto Thermo &Comfort SEFriedrichshafener Str. 9982205 Gilching,GERMANY

Radar sensors for as-sistance systems

ADC Automotive DistanceControl Systems GmbHPeter-Dornier-Straße 1088131 Lindau, GERMANY

Robert Bosch GmbHPostfach 16 6171226 Leonberg,GERMANY

Frequency bands, station power

Radioelectrical equipmenta) Frequency band Max. station power Valid for models

Radiofrequency remote control (vehicle)

433.05-434.78 MHz 10 mW (ERP)

All SEAT models433.05-434.79 MHz 10 mW

868.0-868.6 MHz 25 mW

434.42 MHz 32 µW »

211



Radio frequency remote control (auxiliary heater)868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 0.24 mW, / –6.3 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 3.1 mW, / 4.8 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

Auxiliary heating868.0-868.6 MHz (868.3 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Alhambra

868.7-869.2 MHz (869.0 MHz) 23.5 mW, / 13.7 dBm e.r.p. Ateca and Tarraco

Bluethooth2402-2480 MHz 6 dBm

All SEAT models2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm

Wireless hotspot 2400-2483.5 MHz 10 dBm Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Connection to the external antenna of the car

GSM 900: 880-915 MHz 33 dBm

Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca, Alhambraand Tarraco

GSM 1800: 1710-1785 MHz 30 dBm

WCDMA FDD I: 1920-1980 MHz 24 dBm

WCDMA FDD lll: 1710-1785 MHz 24 dBm

LTE FDD1: 1920-1980 MHz 23 dBm

Tarraco




LTE FFD20: 832-862 MHz 23 dBm

LTE FFD20: 703-748 MHz 23 dBm

Keyless Access 434.42 MHz 32 µW Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Radar sensors for assistance systems76 GHz-77 GHz

28.2 dBm Leon and Alhambra

35.0 dBm Ibiza, Arona, Ateca and Tarraco

24050-24250 MHz 20 dBm Arona, Ateca, Tarraco and Alhambra

212



Wireless charging 110-120 kHz 10 W Ibiza, Arona, Leon, Ateca and Tarraco

Instrument panel 125 kHz 40 dBµA/m All SEAT models

a) The commissioning or authorisation of radioelectrical technology may be restricted in some European countries, forbidden or only allowed with additional requirements.

213

Technical data

Technical data

Indications about thetechnical data

Important information

Introduction

The values indicated in the technical datamay differ depending on optional equipmentor version of the model, as well as in the caseof special vehicles and equipment for certaincountries.

The information in the official vehicle docu-mentation takes precedence at all times.

Abbreviations used in the Technical Speci-fications section

kW Kilowatt, engine power measurement.

PS Pferdestärke (horsepower), formerlyused to denote engine power.

rpm, 1/min Revolutions per minute - engine speed.

Nm Newton metres, unit of engine torque.

Vehicle identification data

Vehicle identification numberThe vehicle identification number (vehicle IDnumber) can be read from the outside of thevehicle through a window located on thewindscreen. This viewer is located in the low-er part of the windscreen. The vehicle identifi-cation number (chassis number) is also stam-ped on the right water drain channel. The wa-ter drain channel is located between the sus-pension tower and the wing. Open the bonnetto read the vehicle identification number .

Type plateThe type plate is located on the vehicle’s righthand door frame. Vehicles for certain exportcountries do not have a type plate.

Filling capacities

Capacity of the windscreen washer fluid con-tainer

Windscreen washerfluid container approx. 3 litres

Weights

Load on the roofThe maximum authorised load on the roof ofyour vehicle is 75 kg.

Empty weight, total weight, axle loadsThe empty weight of the vehicle with driver(75 kg) was calculated according to the (EU)1230/2012 standard. Optional equipment canincrease the empty weight, which means thatthe possible useful load decreases propor-tionally.

WARNINGThe values indicated for the maximum per-mitted weights must not be exceeded.There is a risk of accident and damage!

214

Indications about the technical data

Engine data

Electric engine

Power kW (CV) 61 (82)

Maximum torque (Nm) 210

Gearbox automatic

Top speed (km/h) 130

Acceleration from 0-100 km/h (seconds) a)

Maximum authorised weight (kg) a)

a) Data not available as this edition goes to print.

215

Technical data

Dimensions

Fig. 170 Dimensions.

Mii

A/B Front and rear projection (mm) 595/542

C Wheelbase (mm) 2,420

D Length (mm) 3,557

E/F Front/reara) track width (mm) 1,428/1,424

G Width (mm) 1,645

H Height at kerb weight (mm) 1,478

Turning radius (m) approx. 9.8

a) This data will change depending on the type of wheel rim. Values for wheel 185/70 R14 ET38.

216

Index

IndexNumbers and Symbols12-volt battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45automatic disconnection of devices . . . . . . . 186changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188discharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186disconnect and connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186electrolyte level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187operation in winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

AAbroad

longer stay with the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

ABSsee Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Accesories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Adjust

front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Adjustable luggage compartment floor . . . . . . 96Airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21Airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20

activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . 24description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22how it works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

Air conditioningClimatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106instructions for use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Air diffusers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107Air recirculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108Alternator

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Ambient lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Anti-lock brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Anti-puncture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36, 37Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 36

check after 10 minutes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37inflating the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37sealing the tyre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Anti-puncture set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182Aspects to be taken into account before

starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10ASR

see Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Assist systems

cruise control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161parking aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 161tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Audible warningcontrol and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80unbuckled seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 15

Auto Lock (central locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Automatic car wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200Automatic dipped beam control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81Automatic disconnection of devices

12-volt batteryvoltios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186Automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

AUX-IN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129AUX-IN multimedia socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

BBackrest of the rear seat

folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93

Bag support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Before starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Belt tightening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19Blown bulbs

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128Bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

217

Index

Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184brake servo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Braking assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Braking system

warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

CCamera

Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Capacities

windscreen washer water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185Central locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75emergency locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76key by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52front bumper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53number plate light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56side turn signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55

Changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39subsequent works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40

Changing parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Changing the battery

of the vehicle key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72Changing the wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44Child-proof lock

electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Child seatsgroup classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29securing with the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34Top Tether system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 33

CleaningAlcantara . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202carbon fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 203control panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202decoration slides . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202exhaust tail pipes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201fabrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202headlights / tail lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 200interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202leather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203paint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201plastic parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202sensors/camera lenses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201special care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203the radio display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202trims/covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201, 202washing the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202window wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Climatronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Close . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Coming Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Compartment for on-board documentation . 100Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22alternator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Anti-lock brake system ABS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157ASR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157audible warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69braking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182cruise control system (CCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140EDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149electronic parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

Control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207reprogramming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Cooling systemcheck the coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183control lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182refilling coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

218

Index

Correct position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11driver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

DDAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

main menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124station update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Dangers of not using the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . 16Data logger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Data transmissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134Deactivation of the front airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24Declaration of conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Diagnostic connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Digital clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Digital radio

see DAB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123Dimensions of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 63Disposal

airbag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19vehicle at the end of its useful life . . . . . . . . . 209

Door handleinterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76child-proof lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Drink holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101bottle holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Driver’s sideoverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

Drive systemautomatic connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143automatic disconnection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143connecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140disconnecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142problems and solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Drivingdata storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159park on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85, 151

Driving data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Driving data indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65Driving on flooded roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150Driving profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149Driving with trailer

see Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Duplicate keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Dust and pollen filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105Dynamic headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

EEDL

see Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Electric

windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Electric devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Electric windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Electrolyte . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Electronic differential lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Electronic immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Electronic parking brake

lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155Electronic self-locking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Emergencies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188emergency vehicle towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48fire extinguishers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35first aid kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45replace a blown fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Emergency closing and openingrear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Emergency closing or openingfront passenger door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Emergency locking of front passenger door . . 76Emergency opening

rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Engine

assisted start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45running in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

Engine compartmentbattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 183opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180safety warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178

219

Index

windscreen washer reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185working in the engine compartment . . . . . . . 180

Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182check level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183G 12 plus-plus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182G 13 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

Engine data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215Enlarge

the luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93Environment

environmental compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205ESC

electronic stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Event data recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Exterior lighting

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Exterior mirrors

adjusting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89fold manually . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Exterior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7External antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

FFabrics: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Factors that have a negative influence on

safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Fault

parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . 161Fault memory

connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Filling capacitieswindscreen washer system tank . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Fire extinguisher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35First aid kit

housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18Front airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Front passenger front airbag

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22Full-LED headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

colour coded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51fuse box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51preparations for replacing fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . 52recognise blown fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

GGlove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

HHandbrake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157Hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84Head-on collisions and the laws of physics . . . 16Head-protection airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26Headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Headlights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52headlight washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87trips abroad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91, 92Hill start assistant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Hooks for bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 101Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

IIgnition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Ignition key extraction lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Ignition lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Indications on the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

doors, bonnet and rear lid open . . . . . . . . . . . . 63driving profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63positions of the selector lever . . . . . . . . . . 64, 145reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67seat belt status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64warning and information messages . . . . . . . . 66

Information for the user . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112

adjust the playback volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129anti-theft password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116AUX-IN connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128call by telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132changing station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122Drive Mii App . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133energy management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116frequency bands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122frequency change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122general operating information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125overview of the unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114preset buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112saving stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

220

Index

SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127switching media source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116tune a station frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128

INFO (traffic announcement) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Instrument panel display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 61

control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 63instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67use with the windscreen wiper lever . . . . . . . . 68

Interior rear view mirroranti-dazzle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Interior view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9ISOFIX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31ISOFIX system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31

JJack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

mounting points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Jump leads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

KKey by remote control

unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Keys

assign a key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71changing the battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72duplicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71spare key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71synchronise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73unlock and lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Key switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24

LLane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

control and warning lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Lane Assist system

see Lane Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153Leather: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Leaving Home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83Legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Levels control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41Lighting of the instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

audible warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80AUTO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52coming home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80controlling the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80daytime running lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81dipped beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80fog light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82headlight range control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86leaving home . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83lighting of the instruments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85lighting the controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85main beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82main beam headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80reading lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

side lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81switching on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Loading the vehiclebag hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96general advice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 94positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Lock and unlockluggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Lock button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Luggage compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78, 94

adjustable luggage compartment floor . . . . 96closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78emergency unlocking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79luggage compartment lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86store the rear shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Luggage compartment floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96Luggage compartment shelf

storing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95Lumbar support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

MMain beam headlight lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Maintenance

see Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14Media . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

221

Index

MEDIAexternal data media connected to USB

port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

MFDsee Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

Mobile telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130, 205Multifunction display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65

NNavigation

smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Noises

brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155ESC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 193

Number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

OObject holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

front centre console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100glove compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100glove compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86on-board documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100on the passenger side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100other object holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Odometertotal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

One-touch signalling function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79

Opening and closing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73bonnet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Operation in winter12-volt batteryvoltios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186salt on the roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161Overview (left hand drive) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

PParking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Parking assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

optical parking system (OPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161sensors and camera: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Parking distance warning system . . . . . . . . . . . . 160fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Parking the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12, 14Power display and available power . . . . . . . . . . . 61Power socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

12-volt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102Power steering

see Electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . 148

RRadio

station name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

RADIOmain menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Radio-operated remote controlsee Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Radio DISPLAY: clean . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202Radio reception

antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209malfunctions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Radio telephones . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

function control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88Raising the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41RDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

TP (traffic information station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Rear fog light

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Rear lid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78

emergency closing and opening . . . . . . . . . . . 79Rear seat

folding down and raising the backrest . . . . . . 93Rear view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

anti-dazzle interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89Rear view mirrors

adjust the exterior rear view mirrors . . . . . . . . 89Rear windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Rear window wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Releasing the seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17Repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209Repair work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Reprogramming of control units . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Reverse (automatic gearbox) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Revolution counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61Rims

changing a wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39222

Index

Roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97securing the crossbars . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97Rotation direction

tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43Running in

new brake pads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155new engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

SSafe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144Safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10Safe security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75Safety

child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27safe driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10safety for children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27

Safety equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11Safety instructions

Head-protection airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19side airbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25use of child seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29use of the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Scrapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209SD card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14

adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14fitting the seat belt strap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18protective function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14, 20

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16unfastened . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Seat belt tensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22

SEAT CONNECTactivation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137legal provisions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

Seat heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108SEAT information system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68SEAT Original Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Seats

adjust the headrest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92backrest of the rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93fitting the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108incorrect positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12manual adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91number of seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12removing the headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

SEAT Service Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Selective unlocking system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74Selector lever lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146Selector lever (automatic transmission)

positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145Selling the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136

in other countries/continents . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Service

conditions of use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198Digital Maintenance Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197proof of Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197service works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197set service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197

Service intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67Service intervals display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197Set of vehicle keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71Side airbags

safety instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25Smartphone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133Smartphone support

removing and attaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103Snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194Spare parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Special characteristics

towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47tow start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

Speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189Steering

control lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149electromechanical steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148steering column lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Steering wheeladjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Stickers and plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208Storage compartments

see Object holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99Storage of trip data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207Sun blinds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Sun protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Switch

hazard warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

TTail lights

change a bulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

223

Index

Technical data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214dimensions of the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216load on the roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Technical modifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205Telephone

Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130favourites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131to call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Tightening torquewheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Top Tether . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 33Top Tether System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31, 33Tow-starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47Towing device

description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Towing vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47

automatic gearbox . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48front towline anchorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47tow bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48tow cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48towing prohibited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

TP (traffic information station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121TP (Traffic Programme)

traffic announcement (INFO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Traction control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158Traffic announcement (INFO TP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162Transportation of children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27Transporting objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

fastening rings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96positioning the load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

positioning the luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94roof carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97roof carrier system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97, 98trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Trips abroadheadlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Turning off the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Turning on the lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80Turning the ignition on and off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140Turn signal lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82Type plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Tyre Mobility System

see Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Tyre monitoring systems

tyre monitoring indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Tyre pressure loss indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195Tyre profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Tyre repair kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

see also Anti-puncture kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Tyre repairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36Tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43foreign objects inserted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189new tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190speed symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189tread wear indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191useful life . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191with directional tread pattern . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Tyre tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192Tyre wear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192

UUnlock and lock

by remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76with the central locking switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

USBconnecting external data media . . . . . . . . . . . 128location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

USB connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

VVanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90Vehicle

identification number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214lending or selling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136model plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214parking on upward slopes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159raise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41recycling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Vehicle careservice position of the wiper blades . . . . . . . . 44

Vehicle conservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199antenna built into the glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Vehicle conservation products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Vehicle location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136Vehicle paint

care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201Vehicle seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12Vehicle tool kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

WWarning symbols

see Control and warning lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 69Warning triangle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35, 84

224

Index

Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199Washing the vehicle

conserving the exterior of the vehicle . . . . . 200high pressure cleaning equipment . . . . . . . . 200sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214Wheel balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191Wheel bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40, 193

anti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39tightening torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39, 42changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192new wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190snow chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Wheel spanner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35Wheel trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39Window controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79Window washer

window washer lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86Windscreen

infrared protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90insulating glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Windscreen heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86, 185Windscreen washer water

check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185filling capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Windscreen wiper bladescleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201

Winter tyres . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193

Wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87headlight washer system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87lift the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44rain sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88reposition the blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44special characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87thermal washing ejectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Wiper and rear window wiper bladeschanging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

225

SEAT S.A. is permanently concerned about continuous development of its types and models. For this reason we ask you to understand, that at any given time, changes regarding shape, equipment and technique may take place on the car delivered. For this reason no right at all may derive based on the data, drawings and descriptions in this current handbook.All texts, illustrations and standards in this handbook are based on the status of information at the time of printing. Except for error or omission, the information included in the current handbook is valid as of the date of closing print.Re-printing, copying or translating, whether total or partial is not allowed unless SEAT allows it in written form.SEAT reserves all rights in accordance with the “Copyright” Act.All rights on changes are reserved.

❀ This paper has been manufactured using bleached non-chlorine cellulose.

© SEAT S.A. - Reprint: 15.11.19

Vehicle identification da a

Model:

Vehicle Registration:

Vehicle identification number:

Date of vehicle registration or vehicle delivery:

SEAT Official Service:

Service advisor:

Telephone:

Confirmation of eceipt of documentation and vehicle keys

The following items were delivered with the vehicle: YES NO

On-board documentation

First key

Second key

Correct working order of all keys was checked

Location: Date:

Signature of owner:

Owner’s manualSEAT Mii Electric

12S012720BA

Ingl

és 1

2S01

2720

BA (

11.19

)

SEA

T M

ii El

ectr

ic I

nglé

s (11

.19)

(11.19) Inglés Owner’s manual SEAT Mii Electric · 2019-11-11 · Owner’s manual SEAT Mii...

Documents

Transcript of (11.19) Inglés Owner’s manual SEAT Mii Electric · 2019-11-11 · Owner’s manual SEAT Mii...